Lxe Vx6 Users Manual Reference Guide
2015-02-09
: Lxe Lxe-Vx6-Users-Manual-576573 lxe-vx6-users-manual-576573 lxe pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 380
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
VX6 Reference Guide Copyright © September 2008 by LXE Inc. All Rights Reserved E-EQ-VX6RG-J Notices Notice: LXE Inc. reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the products described in this manual at any time without notice. While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy, LXE assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information contained herein. Further, LXE Incorporated, reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes to it from time to time without any obligation to notify any person or organization of such revision or changes. Copyright Notice: This manual is copyrighted. All rights are reserved. This document may not, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent, in writing, from LXE Inc. Copyright © 2008 by LXE Inc. An EMS Technologies Company. 125 Technology Parkway, Norcross, GA 30092 U.S.A. (770) 447-4224 Trademarks: LXE® is a registered trademark of LXE Inc. RFTerm® is a registered trademark of EMS Technologies, Norcross, GA. Microsoft, Windows and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Java® and Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. or other countries, and are used under license. Intel and Intel XScale are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. RAM® and RAM Mount™ are both trademarks of National Products Inc., 1205 S. Orr Street, Seattle, WA 98108. The Cisco Square Bridge logo is a trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc.; Aironet, Cisco and Cisco Systems are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries. Summit Data Communications, Inc. Summit Data Communications, the Summit logo, and “The Pinnacle of Performance” are trademarks of Summit Data Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. Symbol, the Symbol logo and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies, Inc. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by LXE, Inc. is under license. Wavelink® and Wavelink Avalanche® are registered trademarks and the Wavelink logo, tagline and Avalanche MC are trademarks of Wavelink Corporation, Kirkland, WA. All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations. When this manual is in PDF format: “Acrobat® Reader® Copyright © 2008 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. Adobe®, the Adobe logo, Acrobat®, and the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.” applies. Revision Notice VX6 Reference Guide Upgrade From Revision H to Revision J Section Explanation Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Added sections: “Auto Profile” and “Auth Server” Note: Revised sections: “Main Tab”, “Radio Mode” and “Hide Password”. A complete revision history is included in Appendix C, “Reference Material”. Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 Overview .................................................................................................................... 1 When to Use this Guide............................................................................................ 2 Document Conventions ............................................................................................................3 Quick Start................................................................................................................. 4 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................4 Entering the Multi AppLock Activation Key ...........................................................................5 Hotkey (Activation hotkey)....................................................................................................5 Touch......................................................................................................................................5 Components .............................................................................................................. 6 Data Entry .................................................................................................................. 9 Keyboard Data Entry ................................................................................................................9 Tethered Scanners.....................................................................................................................9 Bluetooth Scanners ...................................................................................................................9 RS-232 Data Entry....................................................................................................................9 Touchscreen Entry ..................................................................................................................10 Right Click ...........................................................................................................................10 Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard)............................................................................................10 Touchscreen and Mouse.......................................................................................................11 Setup the Radio and Network ................................................................................ 12 Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters ................................................................. 12 Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect ................................................................. 13 Install LXEConnect ................................................................................................................13 Using LXEConnect.................................................................................................................15 ActiveSync – Initial Setup ...................................................................................... 16 USB Connection .....................................................................................................................16 Serial Connection ...................................................................................................................16 Connect.................................................................................................................................16 Radio.......................................................................................................................................16 Bluetooth ................................................................................................................. 17 Initial Use ...............................................................................................................................17 Settings Tab | Bluetooth Options .........................................................................................18 Report when connection lost.......................................................................................................... 18 Report when reconnected............................................................................................................... 18 Report failure to reconnect............................................................................................................. 18 E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide ii Table of Contents Computer is connectable................................................................................................................ 18 Computer is discoverable............................................................................................................... 18 Prompt if devices request to pair ................................................................................................... 18 Continuous search.......................................................................................................................... 19 Subsequent Use.......................................................................................................................19 Bluetooth Devices...................................................................................................................20 Bluetooth Barcode Reader Setup .........................................................................................21 Introduction.................................................................................................................................... 21 VX6 with Label ............................................................................................................................. 21 VX6 without Label ........................................................................................................................ 22 Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications ............................................................................................ 23 Saving Changes to the Registry ............................................................................ 24 Getting Help............................................................................................................. 25 Manuals and Accessories ...................................................................................... 25 Manuals...................................................................................................................................25 Accessories .............................................................................................................................25 CHAPTER 2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AND LAYOUT 29 Identifying Your VX6 ............................................................................................... 29 Hardware Platforms ................................................................................................................29 Software Revisions .................................................................................................................29 Hardware Configuration ......................................................................................... 30 System Hardware....................................................................................................................30 Central Processing Unit ..........................................................................................................31 I/O Components......................................................................................................................31 System Memory......................................................................................................................31 Video Subsystem ....................................................................................................................31 Power Supply..........................................................................................................................32 Uninterruptible Power Supply..............................................................................................32 Backup Battery.....................................................................................................................32 PCMCIA Slots ........................................................................................................................32 CF Slot ....................................................................................................................................32 SD Slot....................................................................................................................................32 Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing.........................................................................................................33 Power Modes........................................................................................................... 34 Physical Controls.................................................................................................... 35 On/Off Switch.........................................................................................................................35 External Connectors ............................................................................................... 36 Scanner Serial Connector (COM1).........................................................................................37 Pinout ...................................................................................................................................37 Printer/PC Serial Connector (COM3).....................................................................................38 Pinout ...................................................................................................................................38 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Table of Contents iii Technical Specifications – Connection Cable......................................................................39 RTS/CTS Handshaking and the Serial Port ................................................................................... 39 Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable .............................................................40 Ethernet/USB Connector ........................................................................................................41 Pinout ...................................................................................................................................41 Ethernet/USB Dongle Cables .................................................................................................42 D15 Female Connector.........................................................................................................43 Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 43 USB Host Connector ............................................................................................................44 Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 44 USB Client Connector..........................................................................................................44 Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 44 RJ45 Connector ....................................................................................................................45 Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 45 Audio Connector.....................................................................................................................46 Pinout ...................................................................................................................................46 Power Supply Connector ........................................................................................................47 Pinout ...................................................................................................................................47 UPS Battery Pack Connectors ................................................................................................48 Input .....................................................................................................................................48 Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 48 Output...................................................................................................................................48 Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 48 UPS Battery Extension Cable Connectors..............................................................................49 Input .....................................................................................................................................49 Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 49 Output...................................................................................................................................49 Pinout ............................................................................................................................................. 49 Antenna Connections..............................................................................................................50 Spread Spectrum RF Antenna Connector Pin ......................................................................50 Vehicle Remote Antenna Mount..........................................................................................50 Internal Antenna .....................................................................................................................51 The QWERTY Keyboard ......................................................................................... 52 IBM 3270 Overlay..................................................................................................................52 IBM 5252 Overlay..................................................................................................................52 Key Maps................................................................................................................................53 Custom Key Maps ................................................................................................................53 NumLock and the VX6...........................................................................................................53 Keyboard Backlight ................................................................................................................53 Keyboard LEDs ......................................................................................................................54 CAPS LED ...........................................................................................................................54 Secondary Keys LED ...........................................................................................................55 Control Keys ........................................................................................................................56 General Windows CE Keyboard Shortcuts ............................................................................57 USB Keyboard/Mouse............................................................................................................57 Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard) ..............................................................................................58 E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide iv Table of Contents Enabling the Input Panel ......................................................................................................59 The Display.............................................................................................................. 60 Cleaning the Display ..............................................................................................................60 Touchscreen............................................................................................................................60 Touchscreen Heater..............................................................................................................60 PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots ...................................................................................... 61 PCMCIA Slots ........................................................................................................................61 PCMCIA Pinout ...................................................................................................................62 Install PCMCIA Cards .........................................................................................................63 Install the Type II PCMCIA Radio ................................................................................................ 63 CF Card Slot ...........................................................................................................................67 Replace a CF Card................................................................................................................67 SD Card Slot ...........................................................................................................................68 Install an SD Card ................................................................................................................68 Power Supply .......................................................................................................... 69 External Power Supply ...........................................................................................................69 Specifications .......................................................................................................................70 Environmental Specifications ..............................................................................................70 Vehicle 12-80VDC Direct Connection...................................................................................71 VX6 Input Power Specifications..........................................................................................72 Power Adapter Cable ...........................................................................................................72 CMOS Battery ........................................................................................................................73 Fuse.........................................................................................................................................73 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 75 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 75 Windows CE Operating System............................................................................. 75 Wireless Network Configuration............................................................................................75 Warmboot ...............................................................................................................................75 Coldboot .................................................................................................................................75 Installed Software ................................................................................................... 76 Software Load.........................................................................................................................76 Software Applications ..........................................................................................................76 Java (Optional) .....................................................................................................................77 LXE RFTerm (Optional) ......................................................................................................77 AppLock...............................................................................................................................77 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Optional) .............................................................................77 Desktop.................................................................................................................... 79 Folders Copies at Startup........................................................................................................80 My Device Folders .................................................................................................................80 Start Menu Program Options ................................................................................. 81 Communication.......................................................................................................................82 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Table of Contents v ActiveSync ...........................................................................................................................82 Connect.................................................................................................................................83 Start FTP Server / Stop FTP Server .....................................................................................83 Command Prompt ...................................................................................................................84 Internet Explorer.....................................................................................................................84 Media Player...........................................................................................................................84 Remote Desktop Connection ..................................................................................................85 Transcriber..............................................................................................................................85 Windows Explorer ..................................................................................................................85 Taskbar ...................................................................................................................................86 Advanced Tab ......................................................................................................................86 Control Panel Options ............................................................................................ 87 About ......................................................................................................................................88 Language and Fonts .............................................................................................................89 Identifying Software Versions .............................................................................................90 Radio MAC Address ............................................................................................................90 Accessibility ...........................................................................................................................91 Administrator Control.............................................................................................................92 Bluetooth.................................................................................................................................93 Discover ...............................................................................................................................94 Bluetooth Devices ................................................................................................................95 Bluetooth Device Properties .......................................................................................................... 96 Settings .................................................................................................................................97 Turn Off Bluetooth Button ............................................................................................................ 97 Options........................................................................................................................................... 97 About ....................................................................................................................................98 Easy Pairing and Auto-Reconnect........................................................................................99 Certificates............................................................................................................................100 Date/Time .............................................................................................................................100 Dialing ..................................................................................................................................101 Display..................................................................................................................................102 Background ........................................................................................................................102 Appearance.........................................................................................................................102 Backlight ............................................................................................................................102 Input Panel ............................................................................................................................103 Internet Options ....................................................................................................................104 Keyboard...............................................................................................................................105 KeyPad..................................................................................................................................106 KeyMap..............................................................................................................................106 LaunchApp .........................................................................................................................107 RunCmd..............................................................................................................................108 How To: Remap a Single Key............................................................................................108 How To: Remap a Key Sequence.......................................................................................108 How To: Remap an Application Launch............................................................................108 How To: Remap a Command.............................................................................................109 Mixer.....................................................................................................................................110 E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide vi Table of Contents Mouse ...................................................................................................................................111 MX3X-VXC Options............................................................................................................111 Communication ..................................................................................................................111 Enable TCP/IP Version 6............................................................................................................. 111 Allow Remote Desktop Autologon.............................................................................................. 111 Autolaunch TimeSync ................................................................................................................. 112 Misc....................................................................................................................................112 CapsLock ..................................................................................................................................... 112 Touch Screen Disable .................................................................................................................. 112 Touch Screen Heater Disable....................................................................................................... 112 Network and Dialup Connections.........................................................................................113 Owner ...................................................................................................................................114 Password ...............................................................................................................................115 PC Connection ......................................................................................................................116 PCMCIA ...............................................................................................................................117 Power ....................................................................................................................................118 Regional Settings ..................................................................................................................119 Remove Programs.................................................................................................................119 Scanner .................................................................................................................................119 Stylus ....................................................................................................................................120 Double Tap.........................................................................................................................120 Calibration..........................................................................................................................120 System...................................................................................................................................121 General ...............................................................................................................................121 Memory ..............................................................................................................................122 Device Name ......................................................................................................................122 Copyrights ..........................................................................................................................122 Terminal Server Client Licenses ..........................................................................................123 Volume and Sounds..............................................................................................................123 Wi-Fi.....................................................................................................................................123 CF Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs.......................................................... 124 Access Files on the Flash Card.............................................................................................124 Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync ................................................................... 125 Prerequisites..........................................................................................................................125 VX6 and ActiveSync Partnership ......................................................................................125 Serial Port Transfer ............................................................................................................125 USB Transfer......................................................................................................................126 Connect .................................................................................................................................126 Explore..................................................................................................................................126 Disconnect ............................................................................................................................127 Serial Connection ...............................................................................................................127 USB Connection.................................................................................................................127 Radio Connection...............................................................................................................127 Important Information – Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection...............................127 Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................128 Create a Communication Option ..........................................................................................129 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Table of Contents vii Technical Specifications – Connection Cable ......................................................................130 VX6 Utilities ........................................................................................................... 131 LAUNCH.EXE .....................................................................................................................131 REGEDIT.EXE ....................................................................................................................133 REGLOAD.EXE ..................................................................................................................133 REGDUMP.EXE ..................................................................................................................133 WARMBOOT.EXE..............................................................................................................133 WAVPLAY.EXE..................................................................................................................133 VX6 Command-line Utilites.................................................................................................133 COLDBOOT.EXE .............................................................................................................133 PrtScrn.EXE .......................................................................................................................133 API Calls ................................................................................................................ 134 Reflash the VX6..................................................................................................... 135 How To: Reflash using Keypress Method...........................................................................135 How To: Reflash using TAG file Method ...........................................................................136 Clearing Persistent Storage ................................................................................. 137 Network Configuration ......................................................................................... 137 Wireless Radios ....................................................................................................................137 Ethernet Connector ...............................................................................................................137 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration ....................................................... 138 Briefly . . . .............................................................................................................................138 Enabler Install Process..........................................................................................................138 Enabler Install Process..........................................................................................................138 Enabler Uninstall Process .....................................................................................................138 Stop the Enabler Service.......................................................................................................139 Update Monitoring Overview...............................................................................................139 Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings....................................................................140 Enabler Configuration ..........................................................................................................141 File Menu Options..............................................................................................................142 Avalanche Update Settings ................................................................................................143 Menu Options .............................................................................................................................. 143 Connection ................................................................................................................................... 144 Execution ..................................................................................................................................... 145 Server Contact.............................................................................................................................. 146 Startup/Shutdown......................................................................................................................... 147 Scan Config.................................................................................................................................. 148 Display ......................................................................................................................................... 148 Shortcuts ...................................................................................................................................... 149 Adapters ....................................................................................................................................... 150 Status............................................................................................................................................ 153 eXpress Scan ........................................................................................................ 154 E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide viii Table of Contents CHAPTER 4 SCANNER 157 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 157 Barcode Processing Overview ............................................................................ 157 Barcode Manipulation .......................................................................................... 158 Main Tab...............................................................................................................................159 COM Port Tabs.....................................................................................................................160 Barcode Tab..........................................................................................................................161 Buttons ...............................................................................................................................161 Enable Code ID ..................................................................................................................162 Barcode – Symbology Settings ..........................................................................................163 Strip Leading/Trailing Control .................................................................................................... 165 Barcode Data Match List ............................................................................................................. 166 Barcode Data Edit Buttons .......................................................................................................................166 Match List Rules ......................................................................................................................................167 Add Prefix/Suffix Control ........................................................................................................................168 Barcode – Ctrl Char Mapping...................................................................................................... 169 Translate All .............................................................................................................................................169 Barcode – Custom Identifiers ...................................................................................................... 170 Control Code Replacement Examples ......................................................................................... 172 Barcode Processing Examples ..................................................................................................... 173 Length Based Barcode Stripping ........................................................................ 174 Screen Blanking.................................................................................................... 176 Operation ..............................................................................................................................177 CHAPTER 5 WIRELESS NETWORK CONFIGURATION 179 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 179 Summit Radio........................................................................................................ 180 Summit Client Utility ...........................................................................................................181 Help ....................................................................................................................................181 Summit Tray Icon...............................................................................................................182 Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Radio .........................................................182 Main Tab ............................................................................................................................183 Admin Login................................................................................................................................ 184 Auto Profile.................................................................................................................................. 185 Profile Tab..........................................................................................................................186 Using the Scan Feature ................................................................................................................ 187 Parameters.................................................................................................................................... 188 Status Tab...........................................................................................................................191 Diags Tab ...........................................................................................................................192 Global Tab..........................................................................................................................193 Parameters.................................................................................................................................... 193 Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials ............................................................................................199 Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path ............................................................................201 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Table of Contents ix User Certificates.................................................................................................................201 Root CA Certificates ..........................................................................................................201 Summit Wireless Security ....................................................................................................203 No Security.........................................................................................................................204 WEP....................................................................................................................................205 LEAP without WPA Authentication ..................................................................................206 PEAP/MSCHAP.................................................................................................................208 PEAP/GTC .........................................................................................................................210 WPA/LEAP ........................................................................................................................212 EAP-FAST .........................................................................................................................214 EAP-TLS ............................................................................................................................216 WPA PSK...........................................................................................................................218 Cisco Radio ........................................................................................................... 219 Cisco – Aironet Client Utility (ACU) ................................................................................219 Profiles Tab.................................................................................................................................. 220 No Security...............................................................................................................................................220 WEP .........................................................................................................................................................221 LEAP........................................................................................................................................................221 Firmware Tab............................................................................................................................... 222 Status Tab .................................................................................................................................... 222 Statistics Tab................................................................................................................................ 222 Survey Tab................................................................................................................................... 222 Configuring for WPA ...........................................................................................................223 System Requirements .........................................................................................................223 Installing Radio drivers ......................................................................................................223 Checking for the Cisco PEAP Supplicant.................................................................................... 224 Wireless Network Configuration .......................................................................................226 PEAP/MS-CHAP Authentication Configuration ...............................................................229 Configuring the PEAP/MS-CHAP Supplicant ............................................................................ 229 Server Authentication .................................................................................................................. 231 PEAP/ GTC Authentication Configuration........................................................................232 Configuring the PEAP / GTC Supplicant .................................................................................... 232 Server Authentication .................................................................................................................. 234 WPA/LEAP ........................................................................................................................237 Cisco ACU ................................................................................................................................... 237 EAP-TLS Authentication Configuration............................................................................240 User Certificate ............................................................................................................................ 240 Setting EAP/TLS Parameters....................................................................................................... 241 Validating the Server Certificate.................................................................................................. 243 WPA PSK Configuration ...................................................................................................244 Symbol Radio ........................................................................................................ 245 IP Information Tab ...............................................................................................................245 IPv6 Information Tab ...........................................................................................................245 Wireless Information Tab .....................................................................................................246 View Log............................................................................................................................246 Add a new connection ........................................................................................................247 Select a User Certificate.....................................................................................................248 E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide x Table of Contents Certificates ............................................................................................................ 249 Root Certificates ...................................................................................................................249 Generating a Root CA Certificate ......................................................................................249 Installing a Root CA Certificate.........................................................................................251 User Certificates ...................................................................................................................253 Generating a User Certificate.............................................................................................253 Installing a User Certificate ...............................................................................................258 CHAPTER 6 APPLOCK 263 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 263 Determining Your AppLock Version ...................................................................................264 Multi-Application AppLock...............................................................................................264 Single Application AppLock..............................................................................................265 Setup a New Device .............................................................................................. 266 Administration Mode ............................................................................................ 267 End User Mode...................................................................................................... 267 Passwords ............................................................................................................. 268 End-User Switching Technique ........................................................................... 269 Using a Stylus Tap................................................................................................................269 Using the Switch Key Sequence...........................................................................................269 Application Configuration .................................................................................... 270 Application Panel .................................................................................................................270 Launch Button ....................................................................................................................273 Auto At Boot................................................................................................................................ 273 Auto Re-Launch........................................................................................................................... 274 Manual (Launch).......................................................................................................................... 274 Allow Close ................................................................................................................................. 274 Match ........................................................................................................................................... 275 End User Internet Explorer (EUIE)....................................................................................275 Security Panel .......................................................................................................................276 Password.............................................................................................................................277 Options Panel........................................................................................................................277 Launch timeout...................................................................................................................277 Replace timeout..................................................................................................................277 Restart timeout ...................................................................................................................277 Status Panel...........................................................................................................................278 View ...................................................................................................................................278 Log .....................................................................................................................................279 Save As...............................................................................................................................279 Troubleshooting AppLock ................................................................................... 280 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Table of Contents APPENDIX A KEY MAPS xi 281 The VX6 Keypad .................................................................................................... 281 Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies.......................................................................... 281 IBM 3270 Terminal Emulator Keypad .................................................................. 286 IBM 5250 Terminal Emulator Keypad .................................................................. 286 APPENDIX B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 287 Physical Specifications ........................................................................................ 287 Environmental Specifications.............................................................................. 288 Display Specifications ..........................................................................................................289 UPS Battery Pack Specifications..........................................................................................289 Network Device Specifications ............................................................................ 290 Summit 802.11b/g CF 2.4GHz .............................................................................................290 Summit 802.11a/b/g CF 2.4/5.0GHz ....................................................................................290 Bluetooth...............................................................................................................................290 PCMCIA Cisco 2.4GHz Type II ..........................................................................................291 PCMCIA Symbol 11Mb 2.4GHz Type II.............................................................................291 APPENDIX C VX6 CE .NET 4.2 293 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 293 Windows CE . NET 4.2 Operating System........................................................... 293 Wireless Network Configuration..........................................................................................293 Warmboot .............................................................................................................................293 Coldboot ...............................................................................................................................293 Installed Software ................................................................................................. 294 Software Load.......................................................................................................................294 Software Applications ........................................................................................................294 Java (Optional) ...................................................................................................................295 LXE RFTerm (Optional) ....................................................................................................295 AppLock.............................................................................................................................295 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Optional) ...........................................................................295 Desktop.................................................................................................................. 297 Folders Copies at Startup......................................................................................................298 My Computer Folders...........................................................................................................298 Start Menu Program Options ............................................................................... 299 Communication.....................................................................................................................300 ActiveSync .........................................................................................................................300 Connect...............................................................................................................................301 E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide xii Table of Contents Start FTP Server / Stop FTP Server ...................................................................................301 Command Prompt .................................................................................................................302 Internet Explorer...................................................................................................................302 Media Player.........................................................................................................................302 Remote Desktop Connection ................................................................................................303 Transcriber............................................................................................................................303 Windows Explorer ................................................................................................................303 Taskbar .................................................................................................................................304 Advanced Tab ....................................................................................................................304 Control Panel Options .......................................................................................... 305 About ....................................................................................................................................306 Language and Fonts ...........................................................................................................307 Identifying Software Versions ...........................................................................................308 Radio MAC Address ..........................................................................................................308 Accessibility .........................................................................................................................309 Administrator Control...........................................................................................................310 Bluetooth...............................................................................................................................310 Certificates............................................................................................................................310 Date/Time .............................................................................................................................311 Dialing ..................................................................................................................................312 Display..................................................................................................................................313 Background ........................................................................................................................313 Appearance.........................................................................................................................313 Backlight ............................................................................................................................313 Input Panel ............................................................................................................................314 Internet Options ....................................................................................................................315 Keyboard...............................................................................................................................315 Mixer.....................................................................................................................................316 Mouse ...................................................................................................................................317 Network and Dialup Connections.........................................................................................317 Owner ...................................................................................................................................318 Password ...............................................................................................................................319 PC Connection ......................................................................................................................320 PCMCIA ...............................................................................................................................321 Power ....................................................................................................................................322 Regional Settings ..................................................................................................................323 Remove Programs.................................................................................................................323 Scanner .................................................................................................................................323 Storage Manager...................................................................................................................323 Stylus ....................................................................................................................................324 Double Tap.........................................................................................................................324 Calibration..........................................................................................................................324 System...................................................................................................................................325 General ...............................................................................................................................325 Memory ..............................................................................................................................326 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Table of Contents xiii Device Name ......................................................................................................................326 Copyrights ..........................................................................................................................326 Volume and Sounds..............................................................................................................327 APPENDIX D REFERENCE MATERIAL 329 Introduction ........................................................................................................... 329 AppLock Error Messages..................................................................................... 330 AppLock Registry Settings .................................................................................. 339 Valid VK Codes for CE.......................................................................................... 340 ASCII Control Codes............................................................................................. 341 Hat Encoding......................................................................................................... 343 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart............................................................................... 345 Revision History.................................................................................................... 347 INDEX E-EQ-VX6RG-J 353 VX6 Reference Guide xiv Table of Contents Illustrations Figure 1-1 VX6 Components, Top View.............................................................................................................6 Figure 1-2 VX6 Components, Front View...........................................................................................................6 Figure 1-3 VX6 Components, Bottom View .......................................................................................................7 Figure 1-4 VX6 Components, Back View ...........................................................................................................7 Figure 1-5 VX6 Control Panel.............................................................................................................................8 Figure 1-6 VX6 Access Panel..............................................................................................................................8 Figure 1-7 ActiveSync Explore .........................................................................................................................13 Figure 1-8 LXEConnect Installation Files .........................................................................................................14 Figure 1-9 LXEConnect Setup...........................................................................................................................14 Figure 1-10 LXEConnect Notice .......................................................................................................................15 Figure 1-11 LXEConnect Desktop ....................................................................................................................15 Figure 1-12 Bluetooth Devices Display – Before Discovering Devices............................................................17 Figure 1-13 Sample Bluetooth Address Barcode Label.....................................................................................21 Figure 1-14 About tab and Bluetooth Address ..................................................................................................22 Figure 2-1 VX6 Hardware Configuration..........................................................................................................30 Figure 2-2 The Power (On/Off) Switch .............................................................................................................35 Figure 2-3 Scanner Serial Connector (COM1) ..................................................................................................37 Figure 2-4 Printer/PC Serial Connector (COM3) ..............................................................................................38 Figure 2-5 Pinout – Serial Cable........................................................................................................................39 Figure 2-6 Pinout – Screen Blanking Cable.......................................................................................................40 Figure 2-7 Sample Cable for Screen Blanking ..................................................................................................40 Figure 2-8 VX6 USB Connector and External USB Adapter Cable Connector................................................41 Figure 2-9 VX6 Ethernet/USB Dongle Cables ..................................................................................................42 Figure 2-10 D15 Female Connector...................................................................................................................43 Figure 2-11 Dongle Cable USB Host Port.........................................................................................................44 Figure 2-12 Dongle Cable USB Client Port.......................................................................................................44 Figure 2-13 Dongle Cable Ethernet Port............................................................................................................45 Figure 2-14 VX6 Audio Jack for External Speaker or Headphones..................................................................46 Figure 2-15 The Power Connector.....................................................................................................................47 Figure 2-16 The UPS Battery Pack Input Connector.........................................................................................48 Figure 2-17 The UPS Battery Pack Output Connector ......................................................................................48 Figure 2-18 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Input Connector ......................................................................49 Figure 2-19 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Output Connector....................................................................49 Figure 2-20 External Antenna............................................................................................................................50 Figure 2-21 RF Antenna SS Connector .............................................................................................................50 Figure 2-22 Internal Antenna Cables .................................................................................................................51 Figure 2-23 QWERTY Keyboard Standard.......................................................................................................52 Figure 2-24 QWERTY Keyboard with IBM 3270 Overlay ..............................................................................52 Figure 2-25 QWERTY Keyboard with IBM 5250 Overlay ..............................................................................52 Figure 2-26 Keyboard LEDs..............................................................................................................................54 Figure 2-27 The CapsLock Key.........................................................................................................................54 Figure 2-28 The Secondary Key ........................................................................................................................55 Figure 2-29 The VMT Keyboard Display Controls...........................................................................................56 Figure 2-30 Small and Large Virtual Keyboards...............................................................................................58 Figure 2-31 Input Panel Properties ....................................................................................................................59 Figure 2-32 The PCMCIA and ATA Slots ........................................................................................................61 Figure 2-33 Inserting the Type II PCMCIA Radio ............................................................................................63 Figure 2-34 Summit 802.11 a/b/g Antenna Cable Connections.........................................................................64 Figure 2-35 Summit 802.11b/g Antenna Cable Connections ............................................................................65 Figure 2-36 Cisco Antenna Cable Connections .................................................................................................65 Figure 2-37 Symbol 11Mb Antenna Cable Connections ...................................................................................66 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Table of Contents xv Figure 2-38 Inserting the CF ATA Card............................................................................................................67 Figure 2-39 Inserting the SD ATA Card............................................................................................................68 Figure 2-40 Optional Power Supply Cable ........................................................................................................69 Figure 2-41 Direct Vehicle Power Connection Cable (12 Ft.)...........................................................................71 Figure 2-42 Connecting the Power Cable to the Vehicle...................................................................................71 Figure 2-43 Vehicle Connection Wiring Color Codes.......................................................................................71 Figure 2-44 Power Adapter Cable, VX1/2/4 to VX6.........................................................................................72 Figure 2-45 Fuse Replacement ..........................................................................................................................73 Figure 3-1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen ............................................................................................................84 Figure 3-2 Taskbar Properties............................................................................................................................86 Figure 3-3 About Properties, Software ..............................................................................................................89 Figure 3-4 About Properties, Versions ..............................................................................................................90 Figure 3-5 About Properties, Network IP ..........................................................................................................90 Figure 3-6 Accessibility Properties, Keyboard ..................................................................................................91 Figure 3-7 Accessibility Properties, Sound........................................................................................................91 Figure 3-8 Control Panel - Bluetooth.................................................................................................................94 Figure 3-9 Discover Bluetooth Devices.............................................................................................................94 Figure 3-10 Bluetooth Devices Panel ................................................................................................................95 Figure 3-11 Bluetooth Device Disconnect / Delete ...........................................................................................96 Figure 3-12 Bluetooth Device Properties Menu ................................................................................................96 Figure 3-13 Bluetooth Device Settings Panel ....................................................................................................97 Figure 3-14 Bluetooth About Panel ...................................................................................................................98 Figure 3-15 Date/Time Properties....................................................................................................................100 Figure 3-16 Dialing..........................................................................................................................................101 Figure 3-17 Display Properties / Backlight Tab ..............................................................................................102 Figure 3-18 Input Panel Properties ..................................................................................................................103 Figure 3-19 KeyPad Properties / KeyMap Tab................................................................................................106 Figure 3-20 KeyMap Properties / LaunchApp Tab .........................................................................................107 Figure 3-21 KeyMap Properties / RunCmd Tab ..............................................................................................108 Figure 3-22 Mixer ............................................................................................................................................110 Figure 3-23 MX3X-VXC Options Properties / Communication Tab ..............................................................111 Figure 3-24 MX3X-VXC Options Properties / Misc Tab................................................................................112 Figure 3-25 Network Connection Properties ...................................................................................................113 Figure 3-26 Owner Properties..........................................................................................................................114 Figure 3-27 Password Properties .....................................................................................................................115 Figure 3-28 Communication / PC Connection Tab..........................................................................................116 Figure 3-29 PCMCIA Control Tab, Slot 0 and Slot 1 .....................................................................................117 Figure 3-30 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab, Slot 2.....................................................................................117 Figure 3-31 Power Properties ..........................................................................................................................118 Figure 3-32 Stylus Properties / Recalibration Start..........................................................................................120 Figure 3-33 Stylus Properties / Recalibration ..................................................................................................120 Figure 3-34 System / General tab ....................................................................................................................121 Figure 3-35 System / Memory .........................................................................................................................122 Figure 3-36 System / Device Name .................................................................................................................122 Figure 3-37 Volume and Sounds .....................................................................................................................123 Figure 3-38 Pinout – Serial Cable for Synchronization ...................................................................................130 Figure 3-39 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen.............................................................................................141 Figure 3-40 Connection Options......................................................................................................................144 Figure 3-41 Execution Options (Dimmed) ......................................................................................................145 Figure 3-42 Server Contact Options ................................................................................................................146 Figure 3-43 Startup / Shutdown Options .........................................................................................................147 Figure 3-44 Scan Config Option......................................................................................................................148 Figure 3-45 Window Display Options.............................................................................................................148 Figure 3-46 Application Shortcuts...................................................................................................................149 Figure 3-47 Adapter Options – Network .........................................................................................................150 E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide xvi Table of Contents Figure 3-48 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed..........................................................................................151 Figure 3-49 Manual Settings Properties Panels ...............................................................................................152 Figure 3-50 Status Display...............................................................................................................................153 Figure 3-51 eXpress Scan Desktop Icon..........................................................................................................154 Figure 3-52 eXpress Scan Password Input ......................................................................................................154 Figure 3-53 Scan Barcode 1.............................................................................................................................155 Figure 3-54 Scan Remaining Barcodes............................................................................................................155 Figure 2-55 Configuring Settings ....................................................................................................................156 Figure 4-1 Scanner Control / Main Tab ...........................................................................................................159 Figure 4-2 Scanner Control / COM Port Tab...................................................................................................160 Figure 4-3 Scanner Control / Barcode tab .......................................................................................................161 Figure 4-4 Barcode Tab – Symbology Settings ...............................................................................................163 Figure 4-5 Strip Leading/Trailing Controls .....................................................................................................165 Figure 4-6 Barcode Data Match List................................................................................................................166 Figure 4-7 Add Prefix/Suffix Controls ............................................................................................................168 Figure 4-8 Barcode Tab – Ctrl Char Mapping.................................................................................................169 Figure 4-9 Barcode Tab – Custom Identifiers .................................................................................................171 Figure 4-10 AIM Custom IDs..........................................................................................................................174 Figure 4-11 AIM Custom Setup for C1 ...........................................................................................................175 Figure 4-12 Barcode Match Data for C1 .........................................................................................................175 Figure 4-13 Enable Screen Blanking ...............................................................................................................176 Figure 5-1 Summit Client Utility .....................................................................................................................181 Figure 5-2 SCU – Main Tab ............................................................................................................................183 Figure 5-3 Admin Password Entry ..................................................................................................................184 Figure 5-4 Select Profiles for Auto Profile ......................................................................................................185 Figure 5-5 SCU – Profile Tab..........................................................................................................................186 Figure 5-6 Scan................................................................................................................................................187 Figure 5-7 SCU – Status Tab ...........................................................................................................................191 Figure 5-8 SCU – Diags Tab ...........................................................................................................................192 Figure 5-9 SCU – Global Tab..........................................................................................................................193 Figure 5-10 Sign-On Screen ............................................................................................................................200 Figure 5-11 Choose Certificate ........................................................................................................................202 Figure 5-12 Default Profile..............................................................................................................................203 Figure 5-13 No Security...................................................................................................................................204 Figure 5-14 WEP Encryption...........................................................................................................................205 Figure 5-15 WEP Keys ....................................................................................................................................205 Figure 5-16 LEAP Configuration ....................................................................................................................206 Figure 5-17 LEAP Credentials.........................................................................................................................207 Figure 5-18 PEAP/MSCHAP ..........................................................................................................................208 Figure 5-19 PEAP/MSCHAP Credentials .......................................................................................................208 Figure 5-20 PEAP/MSCHAP Certificate Filename .........................................................................................209 Figure 5-21 PEAP/GTC...................................................................................................................................210 Figure 5-22 PEAP/GTC Credentials................................................................................................................210 Figure 5-23 PEAP/GTC Certificate Filename .................................................................................................211 Figure 5-24 WPA/LEAP..................................................................................................................................212 Figure 5-25 WPA/LEAP Credentials...............................................................................................................213 Figure 5-26 EAP-FAST Configuration............................................................................................................214 Figure 5-27 EAP-FAST Credentials ................................................................................................................215 Figure 5-28 EAP-TLS......................................................................................................................................216 Figure 5-29 EAP-TLS Credentials...................................................................................................................216 Figure 5-30 EAP-TLS Credentials...................................................................................................................217 Figure 5-31 WPA/PSK Encryption..................................................................................................................218 Figure 5-32 PSK Entry ....................................................................................................................................218 Figure 5-33 Cisco Aironet Client Utility .........................................................................................................219 Figure 5-34 Cisco Profile Properties Screen....................................................................................................220 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Table of Contents xvii Figure 5-35 Cisco Profile WEP Keys ..............................................................................................................221 Figure 5-36 No Cisco PEAP .............................................................................................................................224 Figure 5-37 Cisco PEAP installed. ...................................................................................................................224 Figure 5-38 Cisco ACU Profile Selection........................................................................................................226 Figure 5-39 Cisco ACU Reboot Message........................................................................................................226 Figure 5-40 Microsoft Wireless Connection Icon............................................................................................226 Figure 5-41 Wireless Information Screen........................................................................................................227 Figure 5-42 Advanced Wireless Settings.........................................................................................................227 Figure 5-43 Wireless Network Properties........................................................................................................228 Figure 5-44 PEAP/MSCHAP Wireless Network Properties ...........................................................................229 Figure 5-45 Authentication Settings ................................................................................................................229 Figure 5-46 Wireless Network Login ..............................................................................................................230 Figure 5-47 IP Information Tab.......................................................................................................................230 Figure 5-48 Authentication Settings, Validate Server .....................................................................................231 Figure 5-49 Advanced Wireless Settings, Authenticated SSID.......................................................................231 Figure 5-50 PEAP/GTC Wireless Network Properties....................................................................................232 Figure 5-51 PEAP Properties...........................................................................................................................232 Figure 5-52 Login Screen ................................................................................................................................233 Figure 5-53 IP Information Tab.......................................................................................................................233 Figure 5-54 PEAP Properties, Validate Server Certificate ..............................................................................234 Figure 5-55 Server Connection Warning.........................................................................................................234 Figure 5-56 PEAP Properties, Trusted Root Certificate ..................................................................................235 Figure 5-57 Accept Server Connection Warning.............................................................................................235 Figure 5-58 PEAP Properties, Connect Only If Server Name Ends In............................................................236 Figure 5-59 Wireless Information, Authenticated ...........................................................................................236 Figure 5-60 ACU Profile Tab ..........................................................................................................................237 Figure 5-61 Renaming Profile ..........................................................................................................................237 Figure 5-62 Profile Properties Screen..............................................................................................................238 Figure 5-63 Select Profile ................................................................................................................................238 Figure 5-64 Login Screen ................................................................................................................................239 Figure 5-65 ACU Status Tab ...........................................................................................................................239 Figure 5-66 Certificate Stores ..........................................................................................................................240 Figure 5-67 View Certificate Details ...............................................................................................................240 Figure 5-68 EAP/TLS Configuration...............................................................................................................241 Figure 5-69 Authentication Settings ................................................................................................................241 Figure 5-70 Select Certificate ..........................................................................................................................242 Figure 5-71 Authentication Settings, Certificate Details .................................................................................242 Figure 5-72 Validate Server.............................................................................................................................243 Figure 5-73 SSID Authenticated......................................................................................................................243 Figure 5-74 WPA PSK Configuration .............................................................................................................244 Figure 5-75 Symbol NETWLAN Screen.........................................................................................................245 Figure 5-76 Symbol Wireless Information Tab ...............................................................................................246 Figure 5-77 Symbol Wireless Network Properties ..........................................................................................247 Figure 5-78 Symbol Advanced Wireless Settings ...........................................................................................248 Figure 5-79 Logon to Certificate Authority.....................................................................................................249 Figure 5-80 Certificate Services Welcome Screen ..........................................................................................249 Figure 5-81 Download CA Certificate Screen .................................................................................................250 Figure 5-82 Download CA Certificate Screen .................................................................................................250 Figure 5-83 Certificates ...................................................................................................................................251 Figure 5-84 Import Certificate .........................................................................................................................251 Figure 5-85 Browsing to Certificate Location .................................................................................................252 Figure 5-86 Certificate Import Confirmation...................................................................................................252 Figure 5-87 Logon to Certificate Authority.....................................................................................................253 Figure 5-88 Certificate Services Welcome Screen ..........................................................................................253 Figure 5-89 Request a Certificate Screen ........................................................................................................254 E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide xviii Table of Contents Figure 5-90 Advanced Certificate Request Screen ..........................................................................................254 Figure 5-91 Advanced Certificate Details .......................................................................................................255 Figure 5-92 Script Warnings............................................................................................................................256 Figure 5-93 Script Warnings............................................................................................................................256 Figure 5-94 Certificate Issued..........................................................................................................................257 Figure 5-95 Download Security Warning........................................................................................................257 Figure 5-96 Certificates ...................................................................................................................................258 Figure 5-97 Import Certificate .........................................................................................................................258 Figure 5-98 Browsing to Certificate Location .................................................................................................259 Figure 5-99 Certificate Listing.........................................................................................................................259 Figure 5-100 Private Key Not Present .............................................................................................................260 Figure 5-101 Browsing to Private Key Location .............................................................................................260 Figure 5-102 Private Key Present ....................................................................................................................261 Figure 6-1 Multi-Application AppLock...........................................................................................................264 Figure 6-2 Single-Application AppLock .........................................................................................................265 Figure 6-3 Switchpad Menu.............................................................................................................................269 Figure 6-4 Application Panel ...........................................................................................................................270 Figure 6-5 Application Launch Options ..........................................................................................................273 Figure 6-6 Security Panel.................................................................................................................................276 Figure 6-7 Options Panel .................................................................................................................................277 Figure 6-8 Status Panel ....................................................................................................................................278 Figure A-1 VX6 QWERTY Keyboard ............................................................................................................281 Figure A-2 IBM 3270 Specific Keypad...........................................................................................................286 Figure A-3 IBM 5250 Specific Keypad...........................................................................................................286 Figure C-1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen..........................................................................................................302 Figure C-2 Taskbar Properties .........................................................................................................................304 Figure C-3 About Properties, Software ...........................................................................................................307 Figure C-4 About Properties, Versions............................................................................................................308 Figure C-5 About Properties, Network IP .......................................................................................................308 Figure C-6 Accessibility Properties, Keyboard ...............................................................................................309 Figure C-7 Accessibility Properties, Sound .....................................................................................................309 Figure C-8 Date/Time Properties .....................................................................................................................311 Figure C-9 Dialing ...........................................................................................................................................312 Figure C-10 Display Properties / Backlight Tab..............................................................................................313 Figure C-11 Input Panel Properties..................................................................................................................314 Figure C-12 Mixer ...........................................................................................................................................316 Figure C-13 Network Connection Properties...................................................................................................317 Figure C-14 Owner Properties .........................................................................................................................318 Figure C-15 Password Properties.....................................................................................................................319 Figure C-16 Communication / PC Connection Tab .........................................................................................320 Figure C-17 PCMCIA Control Tab, Slot 0 and Slot 1.....................................................................................321 Figure C-18 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab, Slot 2 ....................................................................................321 Figure C-19 Power Properties..........................................................................................................................322 Figure C-20 Stylus Properties / Recalibration Start.........................................................................................324 Figure C-21 Stylus Properties / Recalibration .................................................................................................324 Figure C-22 System / General tab....................................................................................................................325 Figure C-23 System / Memory.........................................................................................................................326 Figure C-24 System / Device Name.................................................................................................................326 Figure C-25 Volume and Sounds.....................................................................................................................327 Figure D-1 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart (0 to 159 Decimal) ........................................................................345 Figure D-2 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart (160 to 255 Decimal) ....................................................................346 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Chapter 1 Introduction Overview The VX6 Vehicle Mount Computer (VMC) is a rugged, vehicle mounted, PC (Personal Computer) running a Microsoft® Windows® CE operating system and capable of wireless data communications from a fork-lift truck or any properly configured vehicle. The VX6 provides power and functionality in a vehicle mounted unit, with a wide range of options: E-EQ-VX6RG-J CPU 400MHz Intel® PXA255 Memory 128MB DRAM Display Indoor or Outdoor half screen display, integrated Touchscreen, adjustable brightness Network connectivity Wireless LAN radio (single or dual antenna) Ethernet port Optional Bluetooth module Audio Speakers in front bezel, audio jack for headset with microphone Storage media Compact Flash PCMCIA Secure Digital (SD) Operating system Microsoft Windows CE .NET 4.2 or CE 5.0 Other options Extended temperature version RAM MountTM vehicle mounting VX6 Reference Guide 2 When to Use this Guide When to Use this Guide The “VX6 User’s Guide” is directed toward the VX6 user. It is delivered on the LXE Documentation CD. It contains safety warnings, descriptions of the controls and connectors, instruction on installing antennas, and day to day operation. As the reference for LXE’s VX6 equipped with a Microsoft Windows CE operating system, this guide provides detailed information on its features and functionality. Use this guide as you would any other source book -- reading portions to learn about the VX6, and then referring to it when you need more information about a particular subject. This chapter, “Introduction”, briefly describes this reference guide structure, contains setup and installation instruction, briefly describes data entry processes, and explains how to get help. Chapter 2 “Physical Description and Layout” describes the function and layout of the controls and connectors on the VX6. Describes AC power and DC power connections. Chapter 3 “System Configuration” takes you through the system setup and file structure, covering all components except the wireless network, AppLock and Scanner. Chapter 4 “Scanner” contains information on the scanner keyboard wedge, active scanner port, and COM port settings such as baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits. Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” details radio setup. Configuration for WEP and WPA is included. Chapter 6, “AppLock” contains explanation and instruction when working with VX6’s running AppLock. Appendix A “Key Maps” describes the keypress sequences for the VX6 keyboard. Appendix B “Technical Specifications” lists technical specifications including physical, environmental, display and the radios. Appendix C “VX6 CE .NET 4.2” takes you through the Windows CE .NET 4.2 system setup and files structure. Appendix D, “Reference Material” includes parameter programming charts and other reference information. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J When to Use this Guide 3 Document Conventions This reference guide uses the following document conventions: ALL CAPS Menu | Choice “Quotes” < > All caps are used to represent disk directories, file names, and application names. Rather than use the phrase “choose the Save command from the File menu”, this guide uses the convention “choose File | Save”. Indicates the title of a book, chapter or a section within a chapter (for example, “Document Conventions”). Indicates a key on the keyboard (for example,). Indicates a reference to other documentation. P S ATTENTION ! Differences in operation or commands due to platform type. Differences in operation or commands due to software revision. Keyword that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow. Attention symbol that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow. Also, when marked on product, means to refer to the manual or user’s guide. International fuse replacement symbol. When marked on the product, the label includes fuse ratings in volts (v) and amperes (a) for the product. Note: Caution ! WARNING ! DANGER ! E-EQ-VX6RG-J Keyword that indicates immediately relevant information. Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Keyword that indicates an imminent hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. VX6 Reference Guide 4 Quick Start Quick Start This section’s instructions are based on the assumption that your new system is pre-configured and requires only accessory installation (e.g. antenna, external keyboard and/or barcode scanner) and a power source. In general, the sequence of events is: 1. Install Vehicle Mounting Bracket on vehicle and secure VX6 in Mounting Bracket Assembly (see “VX6 User’s Guide”). 2. Connect power cable to the VX6. The power cable can also be connected to a UPS battery pack, which is then connected to the VX6 (see “VX6 User’s Guide”). 3. Connect accessories to VX6, e.g. scanner, antenna, etc. (see “VX6 User’s Guide). 4. Secure all cables to the VX6 with the Strain Relief Cable Clamps. 5. Turn the VX6 on. 6. When instructed, calibrate the touchscreen (see Chapter 3, “System Configuration”). 7. The screen may appear white while applications and drivers are loading. When complete, set Date and Time (see Chapter 3, “System Configuration”). 8. Pair Bluetooth devices. 9. Configure radio (see Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration”). 10. Warmboot to ensure all registry settings are saved. 11. Device is ready for use. The VX6 should be mounted in an area in the vehicle where it: • Does not obstruct the vehicle driver’s vision or safe vehicle operation. • Can be easily accessed by anyone seated in the driver’s seat. Troubleshooting Can’t calibrate the touch screen, change the date/time or adjust the volume. AppLock is installed and running on the mobile device. AppLock restricts User access to running programs. Changes or modifications require Administrator access. Refer to “Chapter 6 – AppLock” for setup and processing information. RFTerm opens and runs upon each cold reset and warm reset. Tap File | Exit to close the RFTerm application. VX6 seems to lockup as soon as it is warmbooted. There may be small delays while the wireless client connects to the network, authorization for Voxware-enabled applications complete, Wavelink Avalanche management of the VX6 startup completes, and Bluetooth relationships establish or re-establish. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Quick Start 5 Entering the Multi AppLock Activation Key See Also: Chapter 6 “AppLock”. Hotkey (Activation hotkey) If the mobile device uses LXE’s Multi AppLock to allow the user to switch between applications, the default Activation key is Ctrl+Spc. The key sequence switches the focus between one application and another. Data entry affects the application running in the foreground only. Note that the system administrator may have assigned a different key sequence to use when switching applications. Touch Note: The touch panel must be enabled. Tap the taskbar icon to place the popup menu on screen. Tap one of the application icons in the popup menu. The selected application is brought to the foreground while the other application continues to run in the background. Stylus taps affect the application running in the foreground only. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 6 Components Components 1 1 Access Panel Cover (See Following Illustrations for Detail) 2 Antenna Connectors or Hole Plugs 2 Figure 1-1 VX6 Components, Top View 1 1. Speakers 2 2. Control Panel (See Following Illustrations for Detail) 3 3. 2nd Indicator 4 4. Caps Lock Indicator VX6 Figure 1-2 VX6 Components, Front View VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Components 7 1. COM1/Scanner Connector 2. COM3 Connector IP66 LISTED I.T.E. REFER TO MANUAL N107 C UL ® THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. US E-130794 CAUTION: For continues protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse. This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICE-003. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A est confirme là norme NMB-003 du Canada ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromette la preotection contre les risques d'incendie, remplacer par un fusible de mmes ê types de mmes ê caractristques é nominales. PRODUCT OF U.S.A. U.S. PATENT 5862393 AUDIO 3. Keyboard/Mouse Connector (Not Used) INPUT: 12-80VDC 6A 72W COM1 / SCANNER COM2/3 KEYBOARD / MOUSE ETHERNET / USB T10A, 125V 4. Ethernet/USB Cable Connector (USB-Host and USB-Client) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 5. Fuse 6. Audio Connector 7. Power Cable Connector Figure 1-3 VX6 Components, Bottom View Note: COM1 is configured with Pin 9 +5V. COM3 is labeled “COM2/3” and is configured with Pin 9 RI. Please see Chapter 4, “Scanner”, for details on configuring Pin 9 of the serial ports. 1 1. Antenna Connectors 2 2. Bracket Mounting Area 3. Strain Relief Bracket and Screws 3 Figure 1-4 VX6 Components, Back View E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 8 Components 1 2 3 1. Power LED 2. Power Switch 3. Brightness Increase 4. Brightness Decrease 4 Figure 1-5 VX6 Control Panel SD CF ATA 1. SD Memory Card Slot PCMCIA A PCMCIA B 2. Compact Flash Hard Drive 1 2 3 3. PCMCIA Slots Figure 1-6 VX6 Access Panel Note: VX6 Reference Guide The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Data Entry 9 Data Entry You can enter data into the VX6 through several different methods. A tethered scanner connected to the COM1 serial port provides barcode data entry, the serial ports are used to input/output data, keyboards provide manual entry and the touchscreen also provides manual entry (simulating a desktop PC’s mouse). Keyboard Data Entry Refer to Appendix A “Key Maps” for 101-key keyboard equivalent keypresses. The keyboard is used to manually input data that is not collected otherwise. Almost any function that a full sized computer keyboard can provide is duplicated on the VX6 keyboard but it may take a few more keystrokes to accomplish a keyed task. Almost every key has two or three different functions. The primary alpha or numeric character is printed on the key. For example, when the <2nd> key is selected pressing the desired second-function key produces the <2nd> character i.e. <2nd> + toggles the CAPS Lock function. The specific <2nd> character is printed above the corresponding key. Please refer to Appendix A “Key Maps” for instruction on the specific keypresses to access all PC-compatible keyboard functions. Tethered Scanners The VX6 supports an accessory barcode label reading device. Keyboard data entries can be mixed with barcode data entries. Any scanner that decodes the barcode internally and outputs an RS-232 data stream may be used. COM port 1 is designed to be used with a hand held tethered barcode scanner. COM1 is set to +5V on pin 9 up to accept input from a barcode scanner by default. To change the setting for pin 9, refer to Chapter 4: “Scanner” section titled “Serial Port Pin 9” for details. Bluetooth Scanners Bluetooth scanners are paired to the VX6 wirelessly using the VX6 Bluetooth wireless client. The VX6 does not have a Bluetooth LED. See following section “Bluetooth” for more information. Only LXE Bluetooth scanners and LXE Bluetooth printers are supported by LXE. See Accessories. RS-232 Data Entry The VX6 accepts input from an RS-232 device connected to either RS-232 port, COM1 or COM3 (labeled “COM2/3”). The data is entered at the cursor position, and the data is subject to all of the barcode/RS-232 input menu parameters, such as truncate. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 10 Data Entry Touchscreen Entry Note: The touchscreen should be calibrated before initial use. See “Touchscreen Calibration” in Chapter 3, “System Configuration”. Note: Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display. Never use an actual pen, pencil or sharp object to write on the touchscreen. The touchscreen input performs the same function as the mouse that is used to point to and click elements on a desktop computer. A stylus is used in the same manner as a mouse – single tap or double tap to select menu options, drag the stylus across text to select, hold the stylus down to activate slider bars, etcetera. Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil. Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen. The touchscreen responds to an actuation force (touch) of up to 4 oz. of pressure. The touchscreen can be used in conjunction with the keyboard and scanner and an input/output device connected to one of the VX6’s serial ports. Note: • Touch the stylus to the field of the data entry form to receive the next data feed. • The cursor begins to flash in the field. • The unit is ready to accept data from either the keyboard or a device connected to a serial port. The touchscreen may be disabled. Please refer to “MX3-VXC Options” in Chapter 3, “System Configuration” for details. Right Click A right click can be simulated on the touchscreen. To perform a right click, touch the touchscreen with the stylus and hold it in the same location for a short time. Note: Some applications may not support this right click method. Please review documentation for the application to see if it provides for right mouse click configuration. Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard) Data may be entered via the input panel (virtual keyboard) on the touchscreen. For more details on the input panel, please refer to Chapter 2, “Physical Description and Layout”. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Data Entry 11 Touchscreen and Mouse The behavior of the mouse pointer on the touchscreen varies by VX6 construction. To identify your VX6 platform type, please see “Identifying Your VX6”, in Chapter 2, “Physical Description and Layout”. P Platform 1 VX6’s Because the touchscreen also functions as a mouse, the pointer for a USB mouse may not always be visible on the screen. The mouse pointer reappears when the USB mouse is moved or clicked. • When a USB mouse is first attached to the VX6, the mouse pointer may not be visible. However, moving or clicking the mouse causes the pointer to appear. • When the USB mouse is unplugged, the pointer may remain visible until the touchscreen is tapped. • If the touchscreen is used for input, the mouse pointer may disappear. However, moving or clicking the mouse causes the pointer to reappear. Platform 2 VX6’s The mouse pointer is not visible unless a USB mouse is attached. If a mouse is attached, the mouse pointer is displayed on screen. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 12 Setup the Radio and Network Setup the Radio and Network Prerequisites • Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point • WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys See “Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for complete information. Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters Before you make a host connection, you will, at a minimum, need to know: • the alias name or IP address (Host Address) and • the port number (Telnet Port) of the host system to properly set up your host session. 1. Make sure the mobile client network settings are configured and functional. If you are connecting over wireless LAN, make sure your mobile client is communicating with the Access Point. 2. From the Start | Programs, run LXE RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop. 3. Select Session | Configure from the application menu and select the “host type” that you require. This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to; i.e. 3270 mainframe, AS/400 5250 server or VT host. 4. Enter the “Host Address” of the host system that you wish to connect to. This may either be a DNS name or an IP address of the host system. 5. Update the telnet port number, if your host application is configured to listen on a specific port. If not, just use the default telnet port. 6. Select OK 7. Select Session | Connect from the application menu or tap the “Connect” button on the Command Bar. Upon a successful connection, you should see the host application screen displayed. To change options such as Display, Colors, Cursor, Barcode, etc., please refer to the “RFTerm Reference Guide” on the LXE Manuals CD. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect 13 Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect Requirements: ActiveSync version 3.8 (or higher) must be resident on the host (desktop/laptop) computer. Please see the following section ActiveSync – Initial Setup for more details on ActiveSync. ActiveSync is already installed on the VX6. The VX6 is preconfigured to establish a USB ActiveSync connection to a PC when the proper cable is attached to the VX6 and the PC. If The VX6 uses a serial port for ActiveSync, it is necessary to configure the VX6 to use the serial port. Complete details on the proper cables and port configuration are included in the ActiveSync section later in this chapter. LXEConnect allows a user to view the VX6 screen remotely from a PC using an ActiveSync connection. Install LXEConnect 1. Install Microsoft ActiveSync version 3.8 or higher on a PC with a USB port. For details, please see ActiveSync later in this chapter. 2. Power up the VX6. 3. Connect the VX6 to the PC using the proper connection cable. Once connected, the ActiveSync dialog box appears. If using the USB connection, the ActiveSync connection is automatically established. If using a serial connection, it is necessary to initiate the connection from the VX6. 4. Select “No” for partnership when prompted. Dismiss any ActiveSync dialog boxes warning a partnership is not set up. It is not necessary to establish a partnership to use LXEConnect. However, if a partnership is desired for other reasons, one may be established now. More details on partnerships are included in ActiveSync later in this chapter. 5. When the ActiveSync screen appears, select Explore. Figure 1-7 ActiveSync Explore 6. E-EQ-VX6RG-J An explorer window is displayed for the VX6. Browse to the \System\LXEConnect folder. VX6 Reference Guide 14 Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect Figure 1-8 LXEConnect Installation Files 7. Select and copy the LXEConnect.msi and Setup.exe files from the VX6 to the user PC. Note the location chosen for files 8. Close the ActiveSync explorer dialog box. connection. 9. Execute the setup.exe file that was copied to the user PC. This setup program installs the LXEConnect utility. Do not disconnect the VX6 ActiveSync Figure 1-9 LXEConnect Setup 10. Follow the on screen installation prompts. The default installation directory is C:\Program Files\LXE\LXEConnect. 11. When the installation is complete, create a desktop shortcut to the following file: C:\Program Files\LXE\LXEConnect\LXEConnect.exe. If a different directory was selected during installation, please substitute the appropriate directory. 12. LXEConnect is now installed and ready to use. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect 15 Using LXEConnect 1. If an ActiveSync connection is has not been established, connect the VX6 to the PC. Details on ActiveSync are included in the following section. 2. Double-click the LXEConnect icon that was created on the desktop. 3. LXEConnect launches. Figure 1-10 LXEConnect Notice 4. Click the OK button to dismiss the About CERDisp dialog box. The dialog box automatically times out and disappears after approximately 30 seconds. Figure 1-11 LXEConnect Desktop 5. The VX6 can now be configured from the LXEConnect window. Input from the PC’s mouse and keyboard are recognized as if they were attached to the VX6. 6. When the remote session is completed, terminate the LXEConnect program by selecting File | Exit or clicking on the X in the upper right hand corner to close the application then disconnect the ActiveSync cable. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 16 ActiveSync – Initial Setup ActiveSync – Initial Setup The following instructions relate to initial setup of ActiveSync. When there is a Connect icon on the VX6 desktop, this section can be bypassed. USB Connection The VX6 is configured to use USB-C by default. No configuration is necessary Connect the cable to the PC (the host) and to the dongle cable on the VX6 (the client). The ActiveSync connection is established automatically when the cable is connected. Cables for USB ActiveSync Connection: USB Client to PC/Laptop Dongle cable w/USB-C connector 9000A075CBLUSBHCETH Also requires a standard USB cable with a type A plug on one end, and a type B plug on the other. Serial Connection Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection. Click the Change button. From the popup list, choose the appropriate COM port and baud rate. This will set up the VX6 to use the USB or designated COM port. Click OK and ensure the check box for “Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached” is checked. Click OK to return to the Control Panel. Note: By default COM3 (labeled “COM2/3”) is configured to use ActiveSync (Pin 9 = RI). Please refer to “Serial Port Pin 9” in Chapter 4, “Scanner” for details on configuring Pin 9 of the serial ports. Connect Connect the correct cable to the PC (the host) and the VX6 (the client). Select “Connect” from the Start Menu on the VX6 (Start | Programs | Communications | Connect). Note: Run “Connect” when the “Get Connected” wizard on the host PC is checking COM ports to establish a connection for the first time. Cable for Serial ActiveSync Connection: Serial Client to PC/Laptop RS-232 9 Pin to 9 Pin 9000A054CBL6D9D9 Radio Note: You must establish a partnership with a desktop computer prior to running ActiveSync on the VX6. The initial partnership must be done using direct serial / USB cable connection. Once the relationship is established using the serial port, the ActiveSync link in the Start Menu gives a choice of connections, one of which is radio. Select Start | Settings | Programs | Communication | ActiveSync. From the popup list, choose Network and then click the Connect button. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Bluetooth 17 Bluetooth Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth or Bluetooth icon in taskbar or Bluetooth icon on desktop Tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar to open the Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing application. or The VX6 default Bluetooth setting is Enabled. The LXE HX3 Bluetooth® module is designed to Discover and pair with nearby LXE Bluetooth devices. Only LXE printers or scanners are recognized and displayed in the Bluetooth panel. All other Bluetooth devices are ignored. Prerequisite The Bluetooth devices (printers and/or scanners) have been setup to allow them to be “Discovered” and “Connected/Paired”. The SysAdmin is familiar with the pairing function of the Bluetooth devices. Figure 1-12 Bluetooth Devices Display – Before Discovering Devices Initial Use 1. Select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or on the desktop. 2. Tap the Settings Tab. 3. Change the Computer Friendly Name at the bottom of the Settings display. The Bluetooth VX6 default name is determined by the LXE factory installed software version. LXE strongly urges assigning every VX6 a unique name (up to 32 characters) before Bluetooth Discovery is initiated. 4. Check or uncheck the VX6 Bluetooth options on the Settings tab. 5. Tap the OK button to save your changes or the X button to discard any changes. See Also: Chapter 3 – System Configuration, section titled Bluetooth. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 18 Bluetooth Settings Tab | Bluetooth Options Note: These options can still be checked or unchecked whether Bluetooth connection is enabled or disabled. As Bluetooth devices pair with the VX6, the name of the device and an icon representing the type of device is displayed in the Devices window. The icon state changes as the paired Bluetooth devices connect and disconnect from the VX6. When the Bluetooth devices are disconnected, the device icon has a red background. Report when connection lost A dialog box appears on the VX6 display notifying the user the connection between one (or all) of the paired Bluetooth devices has stopped. This option is enabled by default. Click the OK button or the X button to remove the dialog box from the screen. Report when reconnected A dialog box appears on the VX6 display notifying the user a connection between one (or all) of the previously-paired Bluetooth devices is complete. This option is disabled by default. Click the OK button or the X button to remove the dialog box from the screen. Report failure to reconnect If the reconnect timeout (30 minutes) expires, a dialog box appears on the VX6 display notifying the end-user the connection between one (or all) of the previously-paired Bluetooth devices has failed. This option is enabled by default. Click the OK button to remove the dialog box from the screen. Computer is connectable There is no dialog connected to this checkbox. Enable this checkbox when you want the VX6 to be able to pair with other Bluetooth devices. This option is enabled by default. Computer is discoverable There is no dialog connected to this checkbox. Enable this checkbox when you want the VX6 to be Discovered by other Bluetooth devices. This option is disabled by default. Prompt if devices request to pair A dialog box appears on the VX6 screen notifying the user a Bluetooth device requests to pair with the VX6. This option is disabled by default. The requesting Bluetooth device does not need to have been Discovered by the VX6 before the pairing request is received. Click the Accept button or the Decline button to remove the dialog box from the screen. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Bluetooth 19 Continuous search When enabled, the VX6 never stops searching for a device it has paired with once the connection is broken (such as the paired device entering Suspend mode, going out of range or being turned off). When disabled, the VX6 stops searching after one half hour. The search can be restarted by putting the VX6 through a Suspend/Resume cycle or accessing the Bluetooth control panel. This option is disabled by default. Subsequent Use Note: Taskbar and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered, pair, connect and disconnect. A taskbar Bluetooth icon with a red background indicates Bluetooth is active and not paired with any device. A device icon with a red background indicates a disconnected paired device. 1. Tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or on the desktop to open the Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing application. 2. Tap the Bluetooth Devices tab. 3. Tap the Discover button. When the Bluetooth module begins searching for in-range Bluetooth devices, the button name changes to Stop. Tap the Stop button to cancel the Discover function at any time. 4. The discovered devices are listed in the Bluetooth Devices window. 5. Doubletap a Bluetooth device in the Discovered window to open the device properties menu. 6. Tap Pair as Scanner to set up the VX6 to receive scanner data. 7. Tap Pair as Printer to set up the VX6 to send data to the printer. 8. Tap Disconnect to stop pairing with the device. Once disconnected, tap Delete to remove the device name and data from the VX6 Bluetooth Devices list. The device is deleted after the user taps OK.. 9. Upon successful pairing, the selected device may react to indicate a successful connection. The reaction may be an audio signal from the device, flashing LED on the device, or a dialog box is placed on the VX6 display. 10. Whenever the VX6 is turned On, all previously paired, live, Bluetooth devices in the vicinity are paired, one at a time, with the VX6. If the devices cannot connect to the VX6 before the re-connect timeout time period expires (default is approximately 20 seconds for each paired device) there is no indication of the continuing disconnect state if Report Failure to Reconnect is disabled. See Also: Chapter 3 – System Configuration, section titled Bluetooth. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 20 Bluetooth Bluetooth Devices Assumption: The System Administrator has Discovered and Paired targeted Bluetooth devices for each VX6. The System Administrator has also enabled / disabled Bluetooth settings and assigned a Computer Friendly Name for each VX6. See Chapter 3 System Configuration, Bluetooth control panel applet and supported Bluetooth printers and scanners. The Bluetooth taskbar Icon state and Bluetooth LED states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered, pair, connect and disconnect. There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices re-connect with the VX6. Only LXE printers or scanners are recognized and displayed in the Bluetooth panel. All other Bluetooth devices are ignored. Taskbar Icon Legend Bluetooth module is connected to one or more of the targeted Bluetooth device(s). VX6 is not connected to any Bluetooth device. VX6 is ready to connect with any Bluetooth device. VX6 is out of range of all paired Bluetooth device(s). Connection is inactive. Note: When an active paired device enters Suspend Mode, is turned Off or leaves the VX6 Bluetooth scan range, the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the VX6 is lost. There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the VX6. See Accessories for supported Bluetooth printers and scanners. AppLock, if installed, does not stop the end-user from using Bluetooth applications, nor does it stop authorized Bluetooth-enabled devices from pairing with the VX6 while AppLock is in control. See Chapter 6 – AppLock for more information. See Also: Chapter 3 – System Configuration, section titled Bluetooth. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Bluetooth 21 Bluetooth Barcode Reader Setup Please refer to the Bluetooth scanner manufacturer’s User Guide; it may be available on the manufacturer’s web site. Contact your LXE representative for Bluetooth product assistance. Introduction LXE supports several different types of barcode readers. This section describes the interaction and setup for a mobile Bluetooth laser scanner or laser imager connected to the VX6 using Bluetooth functions. • The VX6 must have the Bluetooth hardware and software installed. An VX6 operating system upgrade may be required. Contact your LXE representative for details. • If the VX6 has a Bluetooth address identifier barcode label affixed, then Bluetooth hardware and software is installed. • The mobile Bluetooth laser scanner / laser imager battery is fully charged. • The barcode numbering examples in this segment are not real and should not be created nor scanned with a Bluetooth scanner. • To open the LXEZ Pairing program, tap Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth icon on the desktop or tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar. LnkB00440fd01020 - Sample Figure 1-13 Sample Bluetooth Address Barcode Label Locate the barcode label, similar to the one shown above, attached to the mobile device. The label is the Bluetooth address identifier for the VX6. The mobile Bluetooth scanner / imager requires this information before discovering, pairing, connecting or disconnecting can occur. Important: The VX6 Bluetooth address identifier label should remain protected from damage (rips, tears, spills, soiling, erasure, etc.) at all times. It may be required when pairing, connecting, and disconnecting new Bluetooth barcode readers. VX6 with Label If the VX6 has a Bluetooth address barcode label attached, follow these steps: 1. Scan the Bluetooth address barcode label, attached to the VX6, with the LXE Bluetooth mobile scanner. 2. If this is the first time the Bluetooth scanner has scanned the VX6 Bluetooth label, the devices are paired. See section titled “Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications”. If the devices do not pair successfully, go to the next step. 3. Open the LXEZ Pairing panel [Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth]. 4. Tap Discover. Locate the Bluetooth scanner in the Discovery panel. 5. Doubletap the stylus on the Bluetooth scanner. The right-mouse-click menu appears. 6. Select Pair as Scanner to pair the VX6 with the Bluetooth mobile scanner. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 22 Bluetooth The devices are paired. The Bluetooth barcode reader responds with a series of beeps and LED flashes. Refer to the following section titled “Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications”. Note: After scanning the VX6 Bluetooth label, if there is no beep and no LED flash from the Bluetooth device, the devices are currently paired. VX6 without Label If the VX6 Bluetooth address barcode label does not exist, follow these steps to create a unique Bluetooth address barcode for the VX6: First, locate the VX6 Bluetooth address by tapping Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth | About tab. Figure 1-14 About tab and Bluetooth Address Next, create a Bluetooth address barcode label for the VX6 1. The format for the barcode label is as follows: • Barcode type must be Code 128. • FNC3 character followed by string Uppercase L, lowercase n, lowercase k, uppercase B and then the Bluetooth address (12 hex digits, no colons). For example, LnkB0400fd002031. Create and print the label. Scan the VX6 Bluetooth address barcode label with the Bluetooth barcode reader. The devices are paired. The Bluetooth barcode reader responds with a series of beeps and LED flashes. Refer to the following section titled “Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications”. Note: 1 After scanning the VX6 Bluetooth label, if there is no beep and no LED flash from the Bluetooth device, the devices are currently paired. Free barcode creation software is available for download on the World Wide Web. Search using the keywords “barcode create”. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Bluetooth 23 Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications Beep Type from Bluetooth Device Behavior Acknowledge label 1 beep Label rejected 2 beeps at low frequency Transmission error Beep will sound high-low-high-low Link successful Beep will sound low-medium-high Link unsuccessful Beep will sound high-low-high-low LED on Bluetooth Device Behavior Yellow LED blinks at 2 Hz Linking in progress Off Disconnected or unlinked Yellow LED blinks at 50 Hz Bluetooth transmission in progress Yellow LED blinks at the same rate as the paging beep (1 Hz) Paging Green LED blinks once a second Disabled indication Upon startup, if the scanner sounds a long tone, this means the scanner has not passed its automatic Selftest and has entered isolation mode. If the scanner is reset, the sequence is repeated. Contact LXE Support for assistance. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 24 Saving Changes to the Registry Saving Changes to the Registry The VX6 saves the registry when you: • Tap the Start | Run then type Warmboot. Tap OK. • Install Restart in the Start menu by Start | Run then type CTL RESTART=1 and tap the OK button. Tap Start | Restart. The registry save process takes 0 – 3 seconds. If nothing has been changed, nothing is saved (e.g. 0 seconds) The registry is automatically saved every 20 minutes. It is also saved every tenth time the registry settings are changed. Registry settings are changed when control panel applet (e.g. Date/Time) parameters are changed by the user and a warm boot was not performed afterward. When you tap the Start | Run then type Coldboot and tap the OK button, factory default registry settings are loaded during coldboot. All changes and settings are lost. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Getting Help 25 Getting Help All LXE manuals are now available on one CD and they can also be viewed/downloaded from the LXE website. Contact your LXE representative to obtain the LXE Manuals CD. You can also get help from LXE by calling the telephone numbers listed on the LXE Manuals CD, in the file titled “Contacting LXE”. This information is also available on the LXE website www.lxe.com. Explanations of terms and acronyms used in this guide are located in the file titled “Glossary” on the LXE Manuals CD. Manuals and Accessories Manuals The following manuals are available on the LXE Manuals CD: • • • • VX6 User’s Guide RFTerm® Reference Guide Contacting LXE LXE Technical Glossary Accessories The table below lists the available VX6 accessories. • Where two parts numbers are listed for a given part, the part number ending in “-R” is the RoHS compliant version. • When only one part number is listed, the part is RoHS compliant unless otherwise noted. VX6 Brackets Bracket, U Style, VX6 VX77 9000A021UBRACKET-R Kit, VXX U-Bracket to VX6 VX7 Adapter 9000A022BRKTADPTKIT-R Bracket, RAM Mount VX6 VX7 9000A023BRKTRAMMOUNT-R Bracket, VXX RAM ball on plate 9000A028RAMPLATEBALL-R Bracket, RAM Squeeze Mount, VX6 VX7 9000A031BRKTRAMSQZMT-R Bracket, RAM Backup Mounting Plate 9000A033BACKUPPLATE Data Cables Cable, Combo D15 to USB and Ethernet Adapter 1 Ft 9000A071CBLD15USBETH Cable, Combo D15 to USB-H, USB-C and Ethernet Adapter 9000A075CBLUSBHCETH Cable, Printer/PC, D9 to D25 9000A053CBL6D9D25 (above part is not RoHS compliant) Cable, PC, D9 to D9 9000A054CBL6D9D9 Power Cables E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cable, Input Power, 12 FT, VX5 VX6 VX7 9000A073CBLPWR12FT-R Adapter Cable, VX1 VX2 VX4 Power Cable to VX5 VX6 VX7 9000A077CBLPWRADPTR VX6 Reference Guide 26 Manuals and Accessories Power Supplies Power Supply, External, AC, W/US Power Cord VX5 VX6 VX7 9000A317PSACUS-R Power Supply, External, AC, No Power Cord VX5 VX6 VX7 9000A318PSACWW-R UPS Battery and Cables Battery, UPS Lead Acid, VX5 VX6 VX7 9000A378UPSBATTPACK-R Cable, UPS Battery, Remote Mount Extender, 6 Ft 9000A074CBLUPSEXTNDR Antenna and Antenna Mount Kits Replacement antenna, 2.4GHz 153180-0001 Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 8 Ft Cable, b/g 9000A279ANTREMOTE8-R Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 8 Ft Cable, a/b/g 9000A283RMTAGANT8 Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 6 Ft Cable, b/g 9000A278ANTREMOTE6-R Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 6 Ft Cable, a/b/g 9000A282RMTAGANT6 Right Angle Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 6 Ft Cable, b/g 9000A280ANTREMOTE6RT Right Angle Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 6 Ft Cable, a/b/g 9000A284RMTAGANT6RT Right Angle Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 15 Ft Cable, b/g 9000A281ANTREMOT15RT Right Angle Remote Mount Antenna Kit, 15 Ft Cable, a/b/g 9000A285RMTAGANT15RT Miscellaneous Stylus, with Tethers and Sleeves, 5 Pack 9000A510STYLUS Protective Film, Touchscreen, 10 Pack, VX6 VX6A512PROTFILM Voice Recognition Accessories Headset coiled adapter cable, with quick disconnect connector to a 2.5 mm audio jack. A headset (see below) is required 9000A076CBLHEADSET1 Headset, Single Band HX1A501SINGHEADSET Headset, Dual Band HX1A502DUALHEADSET Headset, Behind the Ear, Dual Ear HX1A503BTHHEADSET Foam, Replacement Block, Headset HX1A504HSBLOCKFOAM Yoke, Replacement for Dual Band Headset HX1A505DUALYOKE Yoke, Replacement for Single Band Headset HX1A506SINGLEYOKE Replacement Microphone Foam, Wind Screen, 10 pack HX1A508WINDSREEN10 Replacement Microphone Foam, Wind Screen, 50 pack HX1A509WINDSREEN50 Replacement Headset Foam, Ear Cover, 10 pack HX1A510FOAMEAR10 Replacement Headset Foam, Ear Cover, 50 pack HX1A511FOAMEAR VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Manuals and Accessories 27 Scanners E-EQ-VX6RG-J Scanner, Powerscan, SR, 8’ Cbl, WW 8300A326SCNRPWRSR8DA9F 8300A326SCNRPWRSR8DA9F-R Scanner, Powerscan, SR, 12’ Cbl, US 8300A327SCNRPWRSR12DA9F (above part is not RoHS compliant) Scanner, Powerscan, SR, Low Temp, 8’ Cbl 8300A332SCNRS8D9FLT (above part is not RoHS compliant) Scanner, Powerscan, SR, Low Temp, 12’ Cbl 8300A333SCNRS12D9FLT (above part is not RoHS compliant) Scanner, Powerscan, LR, 8’ Cbl, WW 8310A326SCNRPWRLR8DA9F 8310A326SCNRPWRLR8DA9F-R Scanner, Powerscan, LR, 12’ Cbl, US 8310A327SCNRPWRLR12DA9F 8310A327SCNRPWRLR12DA9F-R Scanner, Powerscan, LR, Low Temp, 8’ Cbl 8310A332SCNRL8D9FLT (above part is not RoHS compliant) Scanner, Powerscan, LR, Low Temp, 12’ Cbl 8310A333SCNRL12D9FLT (above part is not RoHS compliant) Scanner, Powerscan, XLR, 8’ Cbl, WW 8320A326SCNRPWRXLR8DA9F 8320A326SCNRPWRXLR8DA9F-R Scanner, Powerscan, XLR, 12’ Cbl, US 8320A327SCNRPWRXLR12DA9F (above part is not RoHS compliant) Scanner, Powerscan, XLR, Low Temp, 8’ Cbl 8320A332SCNRX8D9FLT (above part is not RoHS compliant) Scanner, Powerscan, XLR, Low Temp, 12’ Cbl 8320A333SCNRX12D9FLT (above part is not RoHS compliant) Scanner, LS3408 Fuzzy Logic SR, D9 Interface Cable, 8ft 8510A326SCNRFZYDA9F 8510A326SCNRFZYDA9F-R Scanner, LS3408 Extended Range, D9 Interface Cable, 8ft 520A326SCNRERDA9F-R VX6 Reference Guide 28 Manuals and Accessories Bluetooth Scanner and Accessories LXE Bluetooth module with laser ring scanner, battery, two hand/wrist straps (large and small) 8651A100BTLASERKIT LXE Bluetooth module with 1D/2D imager ring scanner, battery, two hand/wrist straps (large and small) 8652A100BTIMAGERKIT Li-Ion Spare Battery for LXE Bluetooth Ring Scanner Module 8650A376BTBOHBATTERY LXE 8-bay battery charger with US power cord 8650A377BTBOHCHGRUS LXE single-bay charger with US wall plug 8651A379SINGLECHGRUS PowerScan 7000BT Scanner RS-232 with pointer 8700A301SCNRBTSRI PowerScan 7000BT Base Station, RS232, without universal power supply. 8700A501BASERS232 PowerScan 7000BT Base Station Power Supply, Std US, 120V 8700A502PSACUS PowerScan 7000BT, RS232 Cable for Base Station, DB9S, Coil, 8’ 8700A001CBL8DA9F PowerScan 7000BT Battery Charger with Power Supply, Four Station, US Std 8700A503CHGR4US PowerScan 7000BT Battery Pack 8700A504BATT Bluetooth Standard Range Fuzzy Logic laser scanner 8810A326SCNRBTFZ Bluetooth Auto range “LORAX” scanner 8820A327SCNRBTER Desk Cradle, Radio/Charging, Multi-Interface 8800A001CRADLERCMI Desk Cradle, Charge Only, Mulit-Interface 8800A002CRADLECMI Forklift Cradle, Radio/Charging, Multi-Interface 8800A003CRADLEVRCMI Forklift Cradle, Charge Only, Multi-Interface 8800A004CRADLEVCMI US AC Power Cord 8800A051POWERCORD Universal Desktop Power Supply 90-264VAC 8800A301ACPS 9-60VDC Forklift Power Supply 8800A302DCPS Power Cable (connects Power Supply to Forklift) 8800A052DCPWRCABLE Cable Assembly, DA9F, 9 ft, Cradle to Terminal 8500A051CBL9DA9F Forklift Rugged Scanner Holder with RAM mount 8800A005STAND 8800 Spare Battery 8800A376BATTERY Single slot Universal Battery Charger Adapter Cup 8800A377CHGRADPTRCUP Single Slot Battery Charger w/International Power 8800A378CHGR1SLOT Universal Battery Charger, 4 slot. Requires 4 adapter cups 8800A379CHGRBASE Scanner Holster for Belt 8200A501HOLSRBELT Mounted take up Reel 8000A501INDREEL Auto Sense Intellistand, Hands Free Scanning 8500A505STANDSMT Strap with Scanner Clip 9000A411SCNRSTRAP VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout Identifying Your VX6 Some features discussed in this document may not be available for all VX6’s. Additionally, some features require a certain revision level of system software. Any feature that is not identified as platform specific or requiring a certain level of system software is available to all VX6’s. Hardware Platforms To determine the platform level of your VX6, please refer to the VX6 serial number decal. P Platform 1 VX6 VX6’s identified as Platform 1 by a P1 notation on the serial number decal (and VX6’s with no platform identification on the serial number decal) are referred to as Platform 1 VX6’s. These VX6’s DO NOT support the features identified as “Platform 2” throughout this manual. Note: If software revision 1ED or greater is installed, “LXE VX6 Platform 1” is displayed during boot up. See “Software Revisions”, below, to determine the software revision installed on the VX6. If no software revision is displayed during bootup, the VX6 is a Platform 1 type as all Platform 2 VX6’s ship with software revision 1ED or greater. Platform 2 VX6 VX6’s identified as Platform 2 by a P2 notation on the serial number decal support all features, including those noted as Platform 2 specific. Note: If software revision 1ED or greater is installed, “LXE VX6 Platform 2” is displayed during boot up. See “Software Revisions”, below, to determine the software revision installed on the VX6. Software Revisions S Some features described in this manual require a certain minimum revision level of system software. These features are available on all VX6’s if the proper revision level (or newer) of system software is installed. The software revision is displayed during boot up and on the default desktop wallpaper. The revision can also be viewed using the Start | Settings | Control Panel | About icon. For more information, please refer to Chapter 3, “System Configuration”. To upgrade the VX6 with a newer revision of system software, please refer to “Reflash the VX6” in Chapter 3, “System Configuration”. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 30 Hardware Configuration Hardware Configuration System Hardware The VX6 hardware configuration is shown in the following figure. Compact Flash Hard Drive Any Type I, II or III PCMCIA Card Antenna Connector CF Slot Slot A & Slot B Secure Digital Memory Card SD Slot VX6 Audio Keyboard/ Connector Mouse Connector (Not Used) Serial USB/ Connector Ethernet COM3 - PRINTER/PC Connector (9pin male "D") DC out (12V) Serial Connector COM1 - Scanner (9 pin male "D") AC Adapter AC in (120 - 240V) Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) DC in (12-80V) DC in (12-80V) Figure 2-1 VX6 Hardware Configuration VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Hardware Configuration 31 Central Processing Unit The LXE VX6 contains a 400MHz Intel PXA255 CPU. I/O Components The VX6 supports the following I/O components: • Two 9-pin RS-232 serial ports configured as: o o Note: COM1 COM3 (labeled “COM2/3”) There is no COM2 port on the VX6. • Two PCMCIA slots (supporting Type I or II PCMCIA cards). • One slot for SD memory card. • Compact flash drive. • Integrated QWERTY keyboard. • Ports available via dongle cable: • o USB Host port o USB Client port o Ethernet port One audio jack providing monaural audio output. System Memory Main system memory is 128MB DRAM. Note: The 64MB SDRAM option has been discontinued. Video Subsystem The LXE VX6 video subsystem consists of a color TFT display. The video subsystem complies with the VESA VL bus standard. The resolution of this display is 800 by 320 pixels. This resolution complies with the SVGA graphics industry standard. The display supports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion. Please see “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable” later in this chapter and “Screen Blanking” in Chapter 4, “Scanner” for details. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 32 Hardware Configuration Power Supply Vehicle power input for the VX6 is 12V to 80V DC nominal and is accepted without the need to perform any manual operation within the VX6. If 12V to 60V DC power is not available – for example, in an office environment – an optional external Universal Input Power Supply can be used to convert AC wall power to an appropriate DC level. See “External Power Supply”, later in this chapter. Power input is fused for protection and the fuse is externally accessible. Uninterruptible Power Supply A DC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) battery is available to maintain power to the VX6 for a minimum of 15 minutes when vehicle power is not available (such as when a vehicle battery is being swapped). Backup Battery The LXE VX6 has a permanent lithium battery installed to maintain time and date. The backup battery is not user serviceable and should last five years with normal use before it requires replacement. Note: This battery should only be changed by authorized service personnel. PCMCIA Slots Microsoft Windows CE Plug and Play operating system controls the PCMCIA cards. These cards are hot swappable per the PCMCIA specifications. CF Slot The CF ATA slot is not hot swappable. The VX6 must be powered down to insert or remove an ATA card. Since the operating system is stored on the ATA card, the VX6 cannot operate without the ATA card. SD Slot The SD slot accepts an SD memory card. These cards are hot swappable. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Hardware Configuration 33 Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing The VX6 contains Bluetooth version 2.0 with Enhanced Data Rate (EDR) up to 3.0 Mbit/s over the air. Bluetooth device connection (or pairing) can occur at distances up to 32.8 ft (10 meters) Line of Sight. The wireless client retains wireless connectivity while Bluetooth is active. The user will not be able to select PIN authentication or encryption on connections from the HX3. However, the HX3 supports authentication requests from pairing devices. If a pairing device requests authentication or encryption, the VX6 displays a prompt for the PIN or passcode. Maximum encryption is 128 bit. Encryption is based on the length of the user’s passcode. Bluetooth will simultaneously support one printer as a slave Bluetooth device and one scanner, either as a slave or as a master Bluetooth device. See Chapter 3 System Configuration, control panel section titled Bluetooth. Notes • The VX6 does not have a Bluetooth managed LED. • The LED on the Bluetooth scanner illuminates during a scanning operation. • Barcode data captured by the Bluetooth scanner is manipulated by the settings in the VX6 Scanner Properties control panel applet. • Multiple beeps may be heard during a barcode scan using the Bluetooth scanner; beeps from the Bluetooth scanner as the barcode data is accepted/rejected, and other beeps from the VX6 during final barcode data manipulation. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 34 Power Modes Power Modes The VX6 has several distinct power modes. • On Mode – When the VX6 is attached to either vehicle 12-80 VDC or an external power supply and the power button is pressed, the VX6 is in the On mode. In this mode, the keypad, touchscreen and any attached peripherals such as a scanner function normally. The display remains on until the backlight timer (if enabled) expires. • User Idle Mode – If the Display Backlight Timer is enabled (see the Display section in the Windows CE Control panel), the VX6 enters User Idle Mode when the display backlight timer expires without any Primary Event (see below) to reset the timer. The VX6 exits User Idle Mode with any Primary Event. The keypress or screen touch that exits User Idle Mode is sent to the operating system. The VX6 then transitions to On Mode. Primary Events Any key on the keypad COM1 activity Stylus touch on the touchscreen Scanner activity Power button tap USB client connection Bluetooth device reconnect / disconnect message VX6 Reference Guide • System Idle Mode – The VX6 does not support System Idle mode. • Suspend Mode – TheVX6 does not support Suspend mode. However, if the Suspend timer is enabled, the VX6 transitions to Off mode when the Suspend timer expires. • Off Mode – The VX6 turns off if the user presses the power button when the VX6 is On. The VX6 is also off when it is not connected to a power source. However, an internal Real Time Clock (RTC) powered by an internal battery maintains the date and time while the VX6 is off. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Physical Controls 35 Physical Controls On/Off Switch The power (on/off) switch is a push button switch located on the front control panel of the VX6. The switch is a momentary switch. If the VX6 is Off, pressing the power switch turns the VX6 On. For Platform 2 VX6’s, the keyboard LEDs turn on for about one second when the operating system loads the keyboard driver. If the LEDs blink more than once, this indicates a keyboard problem. • On an external USB keyboard, the NumLock, CapsLock and Scroll Lock keys blink the same as a desktop PC. • On the 60-key keyboard, only the CAPs led is lit during this process. To identify your VX6 platform type, please see “Identifying Your VX6”, earlier in this chapter. P If the VX6 is On, pressing and releasing the power switch turns the VX6 Off. An orderly shutdown is preformed. Any open programs are closed, the Windows CE operating system shuts down and then the VX6 powers off. If a software lockup should occur and the VX6 is unresponsive to keyboard or touchscreen input, pressing and holding the power button for several seconds forces a shutdown. However, the forced shutdown is not an orderly shutdown. All unsaved data and any registry settings not saved to persistent storage are lost. The Status LED, located on the keyboard of the VX6, is lit when the power is on: Note: • Green – VX6 is operating from vehicle power or AC power. • Solid Yellow – VX6 is operating from the UPS, UPS battery is good. • Flashing Yellow – VX6 is operating from the UPS, UPS battery is critically low. Always turn the computer off prior to removing power cables. VX6 Figure 2-2 The Power (On/Off) Switch Caution ! E-EQ-VX6RG-J The VX6 has voltage on it even when power is off. Always disconnect input power before working on the VX6 (changing fuse, opening access panel, etc). VX6 Reference Guide 36 External Connectors External Connectors Most external connectors for the VX6 are located on the bottom of the unit. • The Keyboard/Mouse connector is not used on the VX6 as the VX6 contains an integrated keypad. • COM1 connects to a serial barcode scanner. • COM3 (labeled “COM2/3”) connects to a serial printer or PC with the appropriate cables. • The USB/Ethernet connector accepts dongle cables, offering a combination of the following ports: • o An Ethernet port o A USB Host port o A USB Client port. Audio connects to a mono or stereo telephone headset/microphone. Other external connectors are located as follows: • VX6 Reference Guide Antenna connectors are located on the top of the VX6. VX6’s can be configured for a single antenna or dual antennas. E-EQ-VX6RG-J External Connectors 37 Scanner Serial Connector (COM1) The serial connector, labeled “SCANNER”, (configured as COM1) is industry-standard RS-232. The connector includes a PC/AT standard 9–pin “D” male connector. By default, Pin 9 is configured to supply +5 VDC at 0.4A (max) for an external bar code scanner. Pin 9 may also be configured to provide RI. Refer to Chapter 4, “Scanner”, section titled “Serial Port Pin 9” for more information on configuring Pin 9. If Pin 9 is powered off, please see “Technical Specifications – Connection Cable” in the following section for information on using a serial cable. If COM1 is not being used for a scanner, it can also be used for screen blanking when the vehicle is in motion. Please see “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable” in the following section for more details. 1 5 6 9 Figure 2-3 Scanner Serial Connector (COM1) Note: Power the VX6 off before attaching a cable or device to the COM1 serial port. Pinout E-EQ-VX6RG-J Pin Signal Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect – Input 2 RXD Receive Data – Input 3 TXD Transmit Data – Output 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready – Output 5 GND Signal/Power Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready – Input 7 RTS Request to Send – Output 8 CTS Clear to Send – Input 9 +5VDC or RI Barcode Scanner Power – 400mA max (Default) or Ring Indicator – Input Shell CGND Chassis Ground VX6 Reference Guide 38 External Connectors Printer/PC Serial Connector (COM3) The serial connector (labeled “COM2/3”) is an industry-standard RS-232 9-pin “D” connector. The connector and its pin assignments are shown below. By default, Pin 9 provides RI. Pin 9 may also be configured to supply +5 VDC at 0.4A (max) for an external bar code scanner. Refer to Chapter 4, “Scanner”, section titled “Serial Port Pin 9” for more information on configuring Pin 9. 1 5 6 9 Figure 2-4 Printer/PC Serial Connector (COM3) Note: Power the VX6 off before attaching a cable or device to the COM3 serial port. Pinout Pin Signal Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect – Input 2 RXD Receive Data – Input 3 TXD Transmit Data – Output 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready – Output 5 GND Signal/Power Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready – Input 7 RTS Request to Send – Output 8 CTS Clear to Send – Input 9 RI or +5VDC Ring Indicator – Input (default) or Bar Code Scanner Power – 400mA max Shell CGND Chassis Ground VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J External Connectors 39 Technical Specifications – Connection Cable The exact serial cable is crucial. Many commercial null modem cables will not work. LXE recommends the following cable: Serial cable: 9000A054CBL6D9D9 5 9 1 6 Pinout: DB9 female DB9 female 1 7 2 3 3 2 4 6, 8 5 5 6, 8 4 7 1 9 no connection Figure 2-5 Pinout – Serial Cable Some laptop devices do not properly implement all control lines on the serial port – the laptop connection will not work. RTS/CTS Handshaking and the Serial Port RTS Ready to Send CTS Clear to Send DTR Data Terminal Ready DSR Data Set Ready Remote Side The device sending data to and receiving data from the VX6 through the LXE serial cable connected to the RS-232 ports on both devices. LXE Serial Cable 9000A054CBLD9D9 The VX6 serial port supports four types of handshaking via the LXE serial cable: None, standard Xon/Xoff, standard DTR/DSR, and a form of RTS/CTS. To use RTS/CTS, the remote side computer must clear the DTR line which sets the VX6 CTS line and allows the VX6 to send data to the remote side. This allows signals and data to travel smoothly between both devices. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 40 External Connectors Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable The customer must supply their own cable. The cable must be designed so that pin 7 (RTS – Request to Send Output) and pin 8 (Clear to Send Input) of a D9 female connector provide continuity only when the vehicle is stopped (for example, via a switch on the accelerator pedal of the fork truck). All other pins on the connector must be left unconnected. If pins 7 and 8 do not provide continuity (or the cable is removed), the VX6 screen remains blank. Serial cable: Customer built cable with the following specifications: 5 8 1 7 Pinout: DB9 female Function 1 Not Used 2 Not Used 3 Not Used 4 Not Used 5 Not Used 6 Not Used 7 No signal when in motion, Continuity to Pin 8 when stopped 8 No signal when in motion, Continuity to Pin 7 when stopped 9 Not Used Figure 2-6 Pinout – Screen Blanking Cable Pin 8 Pin 7 Figure 2-7 Sample Cable for Screen Blanking Please refer to Chapter 4, “Scanner”, for the proper COM port settings to support screen blanking. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J External Connectors 41 Ethernet/USB Connector The VX6 Ethernet/USB connector accepts dongle cables that provide combinations of the following connections: Note: • an Ethernet port, via an RJ45 connector • a USB Host port for connecting a USB device to the VX6 • a USB Client port to connect the VX6 to a USB host or hub. Please refer to the diagrams later in this chapter for details on available ports with the dongle cable options. The connector is shown below. 1 5 6 10 11 15 Figure 2-8 VX6 USB Connector and External USB Adapter Cable Connector Note: Power the VX6 off before attaching a cable or device to the Ethernet/USB connector. Pinout E-EQ-VX6RG-J Pin Signal Description 1 USB2N_A 2 – Not Connected 3 – Not Connected 4 RXP Receive + 5 RXN Receive – 6 USB2P_A USB D + 7 DGND 8 – 9 RJ45_45 RJ45, Pins 4 and 5 Connections 10 RJ45_78 RJ45, Pins 7 and 8 Connections 11 5V_USB_23 12 – Not Connected 13 – Not Connected 14 TXN Transmit – 15 TXP Transmit + Shell CGND USB D – USB Power Return Not Connected USB Power, Current Limited Chassis Ground VX6 Reference Guide 42 External Connectors Ethernet/USB Dongle Cables The available dongle cables are shown below. 1 2 1 D15 Connector 2 RJ45 Connector 3 USB Host Connector 4 USB Client Connector 1 D15 Connector 2 RJ45 Connector 3 USB Host Connector 3 4 9000A075CBLUSBHCETH 1 2 3 9000A071CBLD15USBETH Figure 2-9 VX6 Ethernet/USB Dongle Cables Note: Power the VX6 off before attaching a cable or device to the Ethernet/USB connector. The connectors and pinouts for the dongle cables are detailed below. ! VX6 Reference Guide 9000A075CBLUSBHCETH is required when using ActiveSync via USB on the VX6. E-EQ-VX6RG-J External Connectors 43 D15 Female Connector 1 6 11 5 10 15 Figure 2-10 D15 Female Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description 1 USB2N_A USB-H D – 2 – 3 USB-D Power 4 RXP Receive + 5 RXN Receive – 6 USB2P_A 7 DGND 8 E-EQ-VX6RG-J Not Connected USB-H D + USB-H Power Return USB-D D – 9 RJ45_45 RJ45, Pins 4 and 5 Connections 10 RJ45_78 RJ45, Pins 7 and 8 Connections 11 5V_USB_23 USB-H Power, Current Limited 12 USB-D Power Return 13 USB-D D + 14 TXN Transmit – 15 TXP Transmit + Shell CGND Chassis Ground VX6 Reference Guide 44 External Connectors USB Host Connector 4 3 2 1 Figure 2-11 Dongle Cable USB Host Port Pinout Pin Signal Description 1 5V_USB_23 2 USB2N_A USB D – 3 USB2P_A USB D + 4 DGND USB Power Return Shell CGND Chassis Ground USB Power, Current Limited USB Client Connector 2 3 1 4 Figure 2-12 Dongle Cable USB Client Port Pinout Pin Signal 1 5V_USB_23 2 USB2N_A USB D – 3 USB2P_A USB D + 4 DGND VX6 Reference Guide Description USB Power, Current Limited USB Power Return E-EQ-VX6RG-J External Connectors 45 RJ45 Connector 1 8 Figure 2-13 Dongle Cable Ethernet Port Pinout E-EQ-VX6RG-J Pin Signal Description 1 TXP Transmit + 2 TXN Transmit – 3 RXP Receive + 4 – Not Connected 5 – Not Connected 6 RXN 7 – Not Connected 8 – Not Connected Receive – VX6 Reference Guide 46 External Connectors Audio Connector The VX6 audio connector accepts a headset with a 2.5mm plug, such as a mono telephone headset with microphone or a stereo headset. Please refer to “Mixer” in Chapter 3, “System Configuration” for information on configuring the audio port for either a mono headset with microphone or a stereo headset. Figure 2-14 VX6 Audio Jack for External Speaker or Headphones Note: The VX6 is not configured for standard PC speakers. Pinout Pin Description 1 Microphone 2 Speaker 3 Ground VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J External Connectors 47 Power Supply Connector Power is supplied to the VX6 through the power connector. Additionally this assembly provides a connection point for the vehicle’s chassis ground to be connected internally to the conductive chassis of the computer. The VX6 internal power supply can accept DC input voltages in the range of 12 to 80 Volts. 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 2-15 The Power Connector Pinout Pin E-EQ-VX6RG-J Signal 1 DC Positive (+) 2 UPS Battery Positive (+) 3 Chassis Ground 4 UPS Battery Negative (–) 5 DC Negative (–) VX6 Reference Guide 48 External Connectors UPS Battery Pack Connectors Input 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 2-16 The UPS Battery Pack Input Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 DC Positive (+) 2 Not used 3 Chassis Ground 4 Not used 5 DC Negative (–) Output 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 2-17 The UPS Battery Pack Output Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 DC Positive (+) 2 UPS Battery Positive (+) 3 Chassis Ground 4 UPS Battery Negative (–) 5 DC Negative (–) VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J External Connectors 49 UPS Battery Extension Cable Connectors Input 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 2-18 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Input Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 DC Positive (+) 2 UPS Battery Positive (+) 3 Chassis Ground 4 UPS Battery Negative (–) 5 DC Negative (–) Output 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 2-19 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Output Connector Pinout Pin E-EQ-VX6RG-J Signal 1 DC Positive (+) 2 UPS Battery Positive (+) 3 Chassis Ground 4 UPS Battery Negative (–) 5 DC Negative (–) VX6 Reference Guide 50 External Connectors Antenna Connections Note: VX6’s are equipped with a radio and require an either an external or an internal antenna. Some VX6’s may be equipped with a dual antenna option. For these VX6’s, an external antenna must be connected to each antenna connector. 1. Antenna 2. Antenna Connector 1 2 Figure 2-20 External Antenna Spread Spectrum RF Antenna Connector Pin VX6’s ordered with an external antenna option have either one or two antenna connectors located on top of the unit. VX6’s ordered with the internal antenna option do not have an external antenna connector. Figure 2-21 RF Antenna SS Connector Vehicle Remote Antenna Mount The external antenna (or antennas) can be remotely mounted on the vehicle. Please refer to the “Vehicle Remote Mount Antenna Installation Sheet” for details. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J External Connectors 51 Internal Antenna If the internal antenna option is ordered, an antenna is mounted on the inside of the user access panel cover. Figure 2-22 Internal Antenna Cables The internal antenna assembly has two antenna cables which are attached to the radio card. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 52 The QWERTY Keyboard The QWERTY Keyboard The VX6 has a QWERTY keyboard, available with a standard overlay, an IBM 3270 overlay or an IBM 5250 overlay. These keyboards have 101 keyboard functions, including a numeric keypad. Please refer to Appendix A, “Key Maps”, for keypress combinations. ESC CTRL SHIFT 2ND CAPS BREAK R/S F1 F2 F3 @ ! | E ; \ A ALT $ # W % T F G F6 & ^ R : Z C X V O . N P PgUp ? K _ B F9 ) I J ~ SP ( * , H F8 F7 U Y ‘ D S BKLT F5 F4 L Home PgDn CAPS / 2nd = F10 INS BKSP ENTER [ < END M 7 { 4 ] 1 0 8 5 2 + } > 9 6 3 DEL . Figure 2-23 QWERTY Keyboard Standard IBM 3270 Overlay PA1 ESC 2ND PA3 PA2 CAPS BREAK R/S F1 F2 F3 BKLT F5 F4 F6 @ ! Attn SHIFT | $ # W E ; \ % R ^ T & : ‘ D S , G F O P Z 2nd = 7 8 + 9 INS BKSP { 4 5 } 6 K L ENTER [ ] 1 2 > 3 NL C X PgUp ? J H _ ~ SP ) I . Clr ALT / E-Inp ( * U Y CAPS F10 Del SysReq A F9 Ins Rst CTRL F8 F7 V B N Home PgDn < END M 0 DEL . Figure 2-24 QWERTY Keyboard with IBM 3270 Overlay IBM 5252 Overlay ESC 2ND CAPS BREAK R/S F1 F2 F3 BKLT F5 F4 F6 Dup CTRL @ ! Attn SHIFT | E ; S % R ^ T & : D ‘ F G H SP . J X C V B N / 2nd = 7 8 + 9 P INS BKSP Field Exit PgUp L ENTER [ { 4 ] 1 5 2 } > 6 3 Fld- _ ~ Z ) O ? K NL Clr ALT I Fld+ , CAPS F10 E-Inp ( * U Y F9 Ins Del SysReq \ A $ # W F8 F7 Home M PgDn END < 0 DEL . Figure 2-25 QWERTY Keyboard with IBM 5250 Overlay Note: VX6 Reference Guide Press the + keys to initiate the IBM 5250 Field Exit Function. E-EQ-VX6RG-J The QWERTY Keyboard 53 Key Maps The keyboard supports all 101 keyboard functions. However, because the keyboard only has 60 keys, all functions are not visible (or printed on the keyboard). Therefore the VX6 keyboard supports what is called hidden keys -- keys that are accessible but not visible on the keyboard. The hidden keys supported by the VX6 are listed in Appendix A, “Key Maps”. Custom Key Maps A key or combination of keys can be remapped to provide a single keypress, a string of keypresses or to execute an application or command. All key remapping is done using the KeyPad option in the Control Panel. Please see KeyPad in Chapter 3, System Configuration, for details. NumLock and the VX6 The keyboard does not have a NumLock indicator or key. NumLock is always On. Keyboard Backlight The LXE keyboard keys are backlit. The keyboard backlight and the display share the same timer, which is configured in the Windows CE Control Panel. When the display is On, the keyboard backlight is also On. Please refer to “Power Management” later in this document for information on configuring the timeout. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 54 The QWERTY Keyboard Keyboard LEDs The VX6 keyboard has two (2) LED indicators. KLT CAPS F10 INS BKSP 2nd ENTER / = [ < END 7 4 1 1. CapsLock Mode LED Indicator 2. Secondary Mode LED Indicator 0 Figure 2-26 Keyboard LEDs CAPS LED This LED indicates the state of the keyboard CapsLock mode. If CapsLock is enabled this LED is illuminated green. When CapsLock is off, the LED is dark. D CAPS F1 B Figure 2-27 The CapsLock Key Press <2nd> then to toggle CapsLock On and Off. The default value of CapsLock is “Off”. For information on preserving CapsLock configuration after a reboot, please see “Configuring CapsLock Behavior” in Chapter 3, “System Configuration”. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J The QWERTY Keyboard 55 Secondary Keys LED The VX6 keyboard is equipped with several secondary keys. These keys are identified by the superscripted text found on the keyboard keys. The secondary keys are accessible by using two (2) keystrokes: the <2nd> key followed by the superscripted key. C 2ND C Figure 2-28 The Secondary Key Once the <2nd> state is enabled (by pressing the <2nd> key) the Secondary Mode LED is illuminated and the <2nd> state is enabled until another key is pressed. The <2nd> key is toggled on with a <2nd> keypress and then immediately off with another <2nd> keypress. For example: Press <2nd> and to turn CapsLock on and off. Press <2nd> and <↑> to initiate the PgUp command. Press <2nd> and to type the “!” key. Press <2nd> andto enter the Insert (Ins) mode. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 56 The QWERTY Keyboard Control Keys The VX6 keyboard has several control keys, some of which are not used on the VX6. Note: The 2nd functions of the and keys are not used as the display brightness is adjusted via the buttons on the control panel. The 2nd functions of the , and keys are not used as the VX6 has TFT LCD screen with no provision for contrast adjustments. The 2nd functions of the and keys are not used as the sound volume on the VX6 is controlled with the Volume and Sounds icon in the Microsoft Windows CE Control Panel. The 2nd function of the key is not used as the display backlight timer also controls the keyboard backlight. 1. Display Brightness Control Keys (Not used) BKLT R/S F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 2. Display Contrast Control Keys (Not used) 3. Speaker Volume Control Keys (Not used) 4. Backlight Control Key (See above) Figure 2-29 The VMT Keyboard Display Controls VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J The QWERTY Keyboard 57 General Windows CE Keyboard Shortcuts Use the keyboard shortcuts in the chart below to navigate with the VX6 keyboard. These are standard keyboard shortcuts for Windows CE applications. Press these keys … To … CTRL + C Copy CTRL + X Cut CTRL + V Paste CTRL + Z Undo DELETE Delete SHIFT with any of the arrow keys Select more than one item in a window or on the desktop, or select text within a document. CTRL+A Select all. ALT+ESC Cycle through items in the order they were opened. CTRL+ESC Display the Start menu. ALT+Underlined letter in a menu name Display the corresponding menu. Underlined letter in a command name on an open menu Carry out the corresponding command. ESC Cancel the current task. The touchscreen provides equivalent functionality to a mouse: • A touch on the touchscreen is equivalent to a left mouse click. • Many items can be moved by the “drag and drop” method, touching the desired item, moving the stylus across the screen and releasing the stylus in the desired location. • A double stylus tap is equivalent to a double click. • A touch and hold is equivalent to a right mouse click. Note: Some applications may not support this right click method. Please review documentation for the application to see if it provides for right mouse click configuration. USB Keyboard/Mouse A standard USB mouse can be attached to the VX6 using the appropriate dongle cable. A standard USB keyboard can be attached to Platform 2 VX6’s using the appropriate dongle cable. The dongle cable attaches to the VX6 and provides a USB connector. Please refer to documentation provided with the USB keyboard and mouse for more information on their operation. P E-EQ-VX6RG-J To identify your VX6 platform type, please see “Identifying Your VX6”, earlier in this chapter. VX6 Reference Guide 58 The QWERTY Keyboard Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard) The Input Panel may be enabled via the Input Panel icon in the Control panel. The Input Panel can be displayed as a large or small keyboard. Figure 2-30 Small and Large Virtual Keyboards Virtual keyboards display the actual character a keypress results in. For example, pressing the key on the virtual keyboard toggles the characters displayed on the keys between upper and lower case. The <áü> key toggles the keys between standard and international symbols. The and <áü> keys can be used in combination for capitalized international characters. Note: VX6 Reference Guide When the virtual keyboard is displayed, the physical keyboard is still active. Therefore it is possible to input data from both keyboards. E-EQ-VX6RG-J The QWERTY Keyboard 59 Enabling the Input Panel The Input Panel is disabled by default. To enable the Input Panel, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Input Panel icon. Make sure the “Allow applications to change the input panel state” checkbox is checked and warmboot the VX6. Figure 2-31 Input Panel Properties E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 60 The Display The Display The VX6 Display is a thin-film transistor display capable of supporting half screen SVGA+ graphics modes. Display size is 800 x 320 pixels. The display covering is designed to resist stains. The touchscreen allows signature capture and touch input. The display supports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion. Please see “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable” earlier in this chapter and “Screen Blanking” in Chapter 3, System Configuration” for details. Cleaning the Display Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the display. If the glass becomes soiled or smudged, clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex® without vinegar or use Isopropyl Alcohol. Do not use paper towels or harsh-chemical-based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the glass surface. Use a clean, damp, lint-free cloth. Do not scrub optical surfaces. If possible, clean only those areas which are soiled. Lint/particulates can be removed with clean, filtered canned air. Touchscreen The touchscreen is a Resistive Panel with a scratch resistant finish that can detect touches by a stylus, and translate them into computer commands. In effect, it simulates a computer mouse. Only Delrin or plastic styluses should be used. A right mouse click is simulated by touching and holding the screen for the appropriate time interval. Note: Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display. Never use an actual pen, pencil or sharp object to write on the touchscreen. An extra or replacement stylus may be ordered from LXE. See the “Accessories” section for the stylus part number. Please refer to Chapter 3, “System Configuration” for more information on: • Calibrating the touchscreen • Disabling the touchscreen. LXE offers a replaceable touchscreen protective film to protect the touchscreen when the VX6 is used in an abrasive environment. For information on installing or removing the protective film, please refer to the “VX6 User’s Guide”. Touchscreen Heater Extended temperature versions of the VX6 contain a touchscreen heater. The touchscreen heater can be disabled on Platform 2 VX6’s when not needed. Please see “MX3-VXC Options” in Chapter 3, “System Configuration”. P VX6 Reference Guide To identify your VX6 platform type, please see “Identifying Your VX6”, earlier in this chapter. E-EQ-VX6RG-J PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots 61 PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots The VX6 has two PCMCIA slots, one Compact Flash slot and one Secure Digital slot. The PCMCIA slots are stacked on top of each other and located on the right hand side of the opening. The PCMCIA slots support the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA) 2.1 standards. The upper slot is designated as Slot A and the lower slot is designated as Slot B. Slot A accepts Type I or II PCMCIA cards. If a radio card is used, it must be installed in Slot A to prevent damage to the internal radio cables. LXE supports only Type II radios. Slot B accepts Type I or II PCMCIA cards. The PCMCIA slots may be disabled by the user. To enable or disable a PCMCIA slot, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PCMCIA icon. The center slot is a Compact Flash slot, containing the CF ATA hard drive. This drive contains the operating system and settings. The left slot is used for Secure Digital (SD) memory cards. SD CF ATA PCMCIA A PCMCIA B 4 1. SD Card Slot 2. Compact Flash Hard Drive 1 2 3 3. PCMCIA Slots Figure 2-32 The PCMCIA and ATA Slots PCMCIA Slots Slot A and B PCMCIA Card Management is handled by the Microsoft Windows CE operating system. The PCMCIA cards are Plug and Play devices and can be “hot swapped”. For more details, refer to the Windows CE help screens or refer to the documentation delivered with the PCMCIA card. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J Although cards in the PCMCIA slot may be hot swapped, the VX6 is not environmentally sealed while the access panel cover is removed to hot swap PCMCIA cards. VX6 Reference Guide 62 PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots PCMCIA Pinout Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 VX6 Reference Guide Signal GND D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 -CE1 A10 -OE A11 A9 A8 A13 A14 -WE RDY/-IREQ SLOT_VCC SLOT-VPP A16 A15 A12 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 D0 D1 D2 WP/A_-IOIS16 GND Pin 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Signal 12V_RF_POWER -CDI D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 -CE2 n.c. or VS1# -IORD -IOWR A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 SLOT_VCC SLOT_VPP A22 A23 A24 A25 n.c. or VS2# RESET -WAIT -INPACK -REG BVD2/-SPKR BDV1/-STSCHG D8 D9 D10 -CD2 GND E-EQ-VX6RG-J PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots 63 Install PCMCIA Cards Equipment Needed: Phillips No. 1 screwdriver and a Torque wrench capable of measuring to 9±1 inch pounds (1.016±.11 N/m). Note: The example below details installing a wireless radio card. PCMCIA cards is similar, except there is no antenna. Installation of other The radio card is installed in slot A (the upper slot). When a second PCMCIA card is present, such as a Bluetooth CF card via a PCMCIA adapter, the second card is installed in Slot B (the lower slot). Install the Type II PCMCIA Radio The LXE Model VX6 Vehicle Mount Computer is specifically for use with LXE Model 6726, 6816, 4830 and 4831 Type II PCMCIA radios. Substitution of other PCMCIA radios will void the FCC, Industry Canada and other international radio certifications for the Model VX6 Vehicle Mount Computer and is strictly prohibited. Caution ! 1. Turn the VX6 off and detach the power cable. 2. Loosen the three (3) Phillips head screws securing the access panel cover so the cover can be removed. The screws are a captive part of the cover and cannot be removed. Partially insert the Type II PCMCIA Radio into Slot A (the upper right slot). Caution Slot A MUST BE used for the radio card. Installing a radio card in Slot B can result in pinching or other damage to the internal antenna cable. ! SD CF ATA PCMCIA A PCMCIA B Radio Card Figure 2-33 Inserting the Type II PCMCIA Radio Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above. VX6 Reference Guide 64 PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots 3. Before completely inserting the radio, connect the Antenna Cable(s) to the radio, using the port(s) indicated below. Note: Radio cards for single antenna units may have the unused antenna port covered with tape. The internal antenna is a dual (diversity) antenna. Summit CF 802.11a/b/g Radio Card The Summit 802.11a/b/g radio has four antenna ports, two ports are for the “a” portion (5.0GHz) of the radio and two ports are for the “b/g” portion (2.4 GHz) of the radio. CF radio is installed on a PCMCIA adapter. Hold the radio card with the antenna ports facing down. Connect the antenna cable(s) as follows: • • • Single antenna – Connect antenna cable to Main a port or the Main b/g port depending on antenna type. Auxiliary port is not used. Dual a antennas – Connect antenna cables to both Main a and Auxiliary a ports. Dual antennas, one a antenna and one b/g antenna – Connect the a antenna cable to the Main a port and connect the b/g antenna cable to the Main b/g port. Auxiliary a Port Main b/g Port Auxiliary b/g Port Main a Port Figure 2-34 Summit 802.11 a/b/g Antenna Cable Connections VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots 65 Summit CF Radio Card The Summit 802.11b/g radio has two antenna ports. The Summit CF radio is installed on a PCMCIA adapter. Hold the radio card with the antenna ports facing down. Connect the antenna cable(s) as follows: • • Summit radio with single antenna – Connect antenna cable to Main port. Auxiliary port is not used. Summit radio with dual antennas – Connect antenna cables to both Main and Auxiliary ports. Main Port Auxiliary Port Figure 2-35 Summit 802.11b/g Antenna Cable Connections Cisco Radio Card Hold the radio card with the Cisco logo label facing up. Connect the antenna cable(s) as follows: • Single antenna – Connect antenna cable to right port, as shown below. • Dual antennas – Connect antenna cables to both ports. CISCO SYSTEMS CISCO AIRONET 350 SERIES WIRELESS LAN ADAPTER Left Port Right Port Figure 2-36 Cisco Antenna Cable Connections E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 66 PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots Symbol 11Mb Radio Card Hold the radio card with the Symbol logo label facing up. Connect the antenna cable(s) as follows: • Single antenna – Connect antenna cable to Port A (left port), as shown below. • Dual antennas – Connect antenna cables to both ports. Spectrum24® High Rate 11 Mbps Wireless LAN Adapter IEEE 802.11b Port A Port B Figure 2-37 Symbol 11Mb Antenna Cable Connections 4. Now complete the insertion of the Type II PCMCIA Radio into the slot. Note: When this process is complete, reattach the access cover screws using a torque wrench capable of measuring to 9±1 inch pounds (1.016±.11 N/m). The screws must be fastened to 9 inch pounds each. The screws require a Phillips size 1 driver head. 5. Re-connect the power cord/cable and turn the VX6 on. 6. For VX6’s with a Summit radio, review RX Diversity and TX Diversity on the Global Settings tab of the Summit Client Utility to ensure these settings correspond to the VX6’s antenna configuration. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots 67 CF Card Slot This slot contains the Compact Flash (CF) hard drive. ! The operating system and settings are stored on the CF card. The VX6 cannot operate without this card. Cards in this slot CANNOT be hot swapped. Replace a CF Card 1. Turn the VX6 off and detach the power cable. 2. Loosen the three (3) Phillips head screws securing the access panel cover so the cover can be removed. The screws are a captive part of the cover and cannot be removed. 3. Remove the card currently installed present in the CF slot and replace it with the new CF card. The replacement CF card must contain the operating system in order for the VX6 to operate. SD CF ATA PCMCIA A PCMCIA B CF Card Figure 2-38 Inserting the CF ATA Card 4. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Note: The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above. Note: When this process is complete, reattach the access cover screws using a torque wrench capable of measuring to 9±1 inch pounds (1.016±.11 N/m). The screws must be fastened to 9 inch pounds each. The screws require a Phillips size 1 driver head. Re-connect the power cord/cable and turn the VX6 on. VX6 Reference Guide 68 PCMCIA, CF and SD Slots SD Card Slot The slot accepts a Secure Digital (SD) memory card. The card in this slot can be hot swapped. Note: Although cards in the SD slot may be hot swapped, the VX6 is not environmentally sealed while the access panel cover is removed to hot swap cards. Install an SD Card 1. Turn the VX6 off and detach the power cable. 2. Loosen the three (3) Phillips head screws securing the access panel cover so the cover can be removed. The screws are a captive part of the cover and cannot be removed. 3. Insert the card into the ATA SD. This slot accepts an SD memory card only. SD CF ATA PCMCIA A PCMCIA B SD Card Figure 2-39 Inserting the SD ATA Card 4. VX6 Reference Guide Note: The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above. Note: When this process is complete, reattach the access cover screws using a torque wrench capable of measuring to 9±1 inch pounds (1.016±.11 N/m). The screws must be fastened to 9 inch pounds each. The screws require a Phillips size 1 driver head. Re-connect the power cord/cable and turn the VX6 on. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Power Supply 69 Power Supply AC to DC power input for the VX6 is delivered via an optional external power supply. See “External Power Supply”. Vehicle power input for the VX6 is 12V to 80V DC nominal and is accepted without the need to perform any manual operation within the VX6. See “Vehicle 12-80VDC Direct Connection”. An optional uninterruptible power supply (UPS) battery can be used with the vehicle DC power supply. Power input is fused for protection and the fuse is externally accessible on the VX6. External Power Supply 1 2 1. AC Input Cable (US only) 2. DC Output Cable Figure 2-40 Optional Power Supply Cable In North America, this unit is intended for use with a UL Listed ITE power supply with output rated 12 – 80 VDC, minimum 75 W. Outside North America, this unit is intended for use with an IEC certified ITE power supply with output rated 12 – 80 VDC, minimum 75 W. The external power supply may be connected to either a 120V, 60Hz supply or, outside North America, to a 230V, 50Hz supply, using the appropriate detachable cordset. In all cases, connect the external AC supply to a properly grounded source of supply provided with maximum 15 Amp overcurrent protection (10 Amp for 230V circuits). Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J Instructions for using this configuration are contained in “VX6 User’s Guide” section titled “Installation”. VX6 Reference Guide 70 Power Supply Specifications Feature Specification Dimensions 3.40” x 5.87” x 2.00” Weight <3.0 pounds Input Power Switch None Power “ON” Indicator None Input Fusing None Input Voltage 90VAC min - 264VAC max Input Frequency 47 - 63 Hz Input Surge Current 50 Amps max @ 264VAC input Input Connector Standard IEC input power cord (included with US units only) Output Connector 3 pin female connector Output Voltage +24VDC Output Voltage Tolerance +/- 8%, measured at the end of the output power cable Output Current 0 Amps min, 1.87 Amps max Safety and Emissions Compliance FCC, Part 15, Radio Frequency Devices, Class B. EN 55022 UL1950 and IEC 950 Environmental Specifications The AC to DC adapter will withstand the following environmental characteristics: VX6 Reference Guide Feature Specification Operating Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Storage Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Humidity Operates in a relative humidity of: 5 – 95% (non-condensing) ESD Immunity Per IEC 801-1 E-EQ-VX6RG-J Power Supply 71 Vehicle 12-80VDC Direct Connection Note: Instructions for using this configuration are contained in “VX6 User’s Guide” section titled “Installation”. 1. To Vehicle Battery 1 + GND 2. To Vehicle Mounted Device or UPS Battery Pack 2 3 3. White (DC+) 6 4 4. Black (DC-) 5 5. Green (GND) 6. 12 – 80 VDC Figure 2-41 Direct Vehicle Power Connection Cable (12 Ft.) 1. Vehicle Electrical System 2. 10 Amp Slow Blow Fuse 1 2 3 3. DC + 6 4. DC - 7 4 5. Vehicle Chassis 8 5 6. Red / White 7. Red /Black 8. Green Figure 2-42 Connecting the Power Cable to the Vehicle Note: Correct electrical polarity is required for safe and proper installation. Connecting the cable to the VX6 with the polarity reversed will cause the VX6’s fuse to be blown. See the following table for wire color-coding specifics. Wiring color codes for LXE supplied DC input power cabling: Vehicle Supply Wire Color +12 - 80VDC (DC +) Red with White Stripe Return (DC -) Red with Black Stripe Vehicle Chassis (GND) Green Figure 2-43 Vehicle Connection Wiring Color Codes E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 72 Power Supply VX6 Input Power Specifications Feature Specification DC Input Voltage 12 - 80 VDC Input Current 3.5 Amps Input Fuse 10A Time Delay Input Power Switch SPST 6 Amp 125VDC Power Adapter Cable LXE offers an adapter cable (part no. 9000A077CBLPWRADPTR) to adapt certain VX1, VX2 or VX4 DC power supplies to the VX6. Please read and follow all cautions in the “VX6 User’s Guide” to determine if your present power supply can be used with the VX6. 1. VX6 Connector 2. VX1/2/4 Power Supply Connector 1 2 Figure 2-44 Power Adapter Cable, VX1/2/4 to VX6 Caution: ! Caution: ! Caution: ! VX6 Reference Guide For use only with VX1/2/4 DC power cables with yellow colored cable containing 18AWG wires. Do not use this cable with VX1/2/4 DC power cables with gray colored cable containing 22AWG wires. These power cables must be replaced with a VX5/6/7 power cable. When a DC power cable that is eight feet or longer is in a 12V application, there may be an excessive voltage drop over the longer cable. If this occurs, a new power cable is required. Do not use this adapter with AC power supplies originally designed for the 1380, 1390, VX1, VX2 or VX4. These power supplies do not have sufficient power for the VX6. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Power Supply 73 CMOS Battery The LXE VX6 has a permanent 190 mAh Lithium battery installed to maintain time, date and CMOS setup information. The lithium battery is not user serviceable and should last five years with normal use before it requires replacement. Fuse The VX6 uses a 100V, 10A time delay (slow blow), high current interrupting rating fuse that is externally accessible and user replaceable. Should it need replacement, replace with same size, rating and type of fuse – Littlefuse 0234010 or Optifuse MSC-10A (5x20mm). THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS: (1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE UNDESIRED OPERATION. This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICE-003. Cet appareil numérique de la Classe A est confirme là norme NMB-003 du Canada TENT 5862393 CAUTION: For continues protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse. ATTENTION: Pour ne pas compromette la preotection contre les risques d'incendie, remplacer par un fusible de mmes ê types de mmes ê caractristques é nominales. 1. Fuse AUDIO INPUT: 12-80VDC 6A 72W ETHERNET / USB 2. Twist in this direction to remove T10A, 125V 1 2 3. Twist in this direction to insert 3 Figure 2-45 Fuse Replacement Caution: Fuse has voltage on it even when power is off. Always disconnect input power before changing fuse. ! E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 74 VX6 Reference Guide Power Supply E-EQ-VX6RG-J Chapter 3 System Configuration Introduction There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the VX6. Many of the setup and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and software installed on the unit. The examples found in this chapter are to be used as examples only, the configuration of your specific VX6 computer may vary. The following sections provide a general reference for the configuration of the VX6 and some of its optional features. Your VX6 operating system may be Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0. The VX6 operating system is displayed on the Desktop as Windows CE .NET or Windows CE. This is the factory default value for the Desktop Display Background. This chapter presents information and procedures for Windows CE 5.0 only. Windows CE .NET 4.2 information and procedures are contained in Appendix C, “VX6 CE .NET 4.2”. Windows CE Operating System For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE user’s guides or the Windows CE on-line Help application installed with the VX6. This chapter’s contents assume the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows computers. Therefore, the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the VX6 and its Windows CE environment. Wireless Network Configuration All radio configuration is included in Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration”. Warmboot A warmboot reboots the computer without erasing any registry data. However, any applications installed to RAM are lost, as is all data in RAM. This happens because the operating system is stored on the flash drive, but must be loaded into RAM to run. All registry configurations are automatically preserved. Any applications stored as .CAB files in the System directory and configured in the registry to persist are reinstalled on boot up by the Launch utility. Coldboot A coldboot reboots the computer, erases all registry data and returns the computer to factory default settings. In order to be preserved, applications and data must be stored in the System folder. Registry information is not preserved. Only factory default applications and drivers stored as .CAB files in the System directory are loaded by Launch. A cold boot is initiated by running the Coldboot application in the \Windows directory. This application automatically cold boots the VX6, erasing any customer applied registry changes and returning the VX6 to its factory settings. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 76 Installed Software Installed Software When you order a VX6 you receive the software files required by the separate programs needed for operation and radio communication. The files are loaded by LXE and stored in subdirectories in the VX6. This section lists the contents of the subdirectories and the general function of the files. Files installed in each VX6 are specific to the intended function of the VX6. Files installed in each VX6 configured for an RF environment contain PCMCIA card radio specific drivers – the drivers for each type of radio are specific to the manufacturer (e.g. Summit, Cisco, Symbol) for the radios installed in the RF environment and are not interchangeable. Software Load The software loaded on the mobile computer consists of Windows CE 5.0 OS, hardware-specific OEM Adaptation Layer, device drivers, Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows CE browser and utilities. The software supported is summarized below: Operating System • Full Operating System License: Includes all operating system components, including Windows CE 5.0 kernel, file system, communications, connectivity (for remote APIs), device drivers, events and messaging, graphics, keyboard and touchscreen input, window management, and common controls. Network and Device Drivers Bluetooth (Optional) Wavelink Avalanche (Optional) LXE AppLock Java (Optional) • Java executables and browser components are handled by the Java option (when installed). Terminal Emulation (Optional) • RFTerm (VT220, TN5250, TN3270). Runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot (if installed). LXE API Routines (see “Accessories” for the LXE SDK Kit part number) Note: Please contact your LXE representative for software updates and CAB files as they are released by LXE. Software Applications The following applications are included: VX6 Reference Guide • WordPad (was PocketWord in previous versions of Windows CE) • Word Viewer • Excel Viewer • PDF Viewer E-EQ-VX6RG-J Installed Software 77 • Image Viewer • Scanner Wedge (LXE developed) • ActiveSync • Transcriber • Media Player • Internet Explorer Note that the viewer applications allow viewing documents, but not editing them. Java (Optional) Installed by LXE. Files can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | JEM-CE. Doubletap the EVM icon to open the EVM Console. A folder of Java examples and Plug-ins is also installed with the Java option. LXE does not support Java applications running on the mobile device. LXE RFTerm (Optional) Installed by LXE. The application can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | RFTerm. Please refer to “Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters” earlier in this guide for RFTerm quick start instruction. Refer to the “RFTerm Reference Guide” on the LXE Manuals CD for complete information and instruction. AppLock Installed by LXE. Application is setup by the Administrator by tapping Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration. Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device end-user. AppLock is password protected by the Administrator. End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application or applications. The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes. The administrator-specified application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up. See Also: Chapter 6 “AppLock” for instruction. Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Optional) The following features are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in conjunction with the Avalanche Molility Center (MC) Console. After configuration, Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset. Network parameter configuration is supported for: • IP address: DHCP or static IP • RF network SSID • DNS hosts (primary, secondary, tertiary) • Subnet mask • Enabler update Related Manual: “Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers”. The VX6 has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded, but not installed, on the mobile device when it is shipped from LXE. The installation files are located in the System folder on CE devices. The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 78 Installed Software After the installation application is manually run, a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance. Following this reboot, the Enabler will by default be an auto-launch application. This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface. The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager is LXE_VXC. LXE CE devices manufactured before October 2006 must have their drivers and system files upgraded before they can use the Avalanche Enabler functions. Please contact an LXE representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline. If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device, the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device(s). VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Desktop 79 Desktop For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE user’s guides or the Windows on-line Help application installed in the mobile device. The VX6 Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP. At a minimum, it has the following icons that can be double tapped with the stylus to access My Computer, Internet Explorer, and the Recycle Bin. At the bottom of the screen is the Start button. Clicking the Start Button causes the Start Menu to pop up. It contains the standard Windows menu options: Programs, Favorites, Documents, Settings, Help, and Run. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Desktop Icon Function My Device Access files and programs. Recycle Bin Storage for files that are to be deleted. Internet Explorer Connect to the Internet/intranet (requires radio card and Internet Service Provider – ISP enrollment is not available from LXE). Wireless Configuration Icon Used for accessing the appropriate wireless configuration utility, either the SCU (Summit Client Utility) or ACU (Cisco Aironet Client Utility). Bluetooth Discover and then pair with nearby discoverable Bluetooth devices. My Documents Storage for downloaded files / applications. Start Access programs, select from the Favorites listing, documents last worked on, change/view settings for the control panel or taskbar, on-line help or run programs. VX6 Reference Guide 80 Desktop Folders Copies at Startup The following folders are copied on startup: System\Desktop => Windows\Desktop System\Favorites => Windows\Favorites System\Fonts => Windows\Fonts System\Help => Windows\Help System\Programs => Windows\Programs This function copies only the directory contents, no sub-folders. The following folders are NOT copied on startup: Windows\AppMgr Windows\Recent Windows\Startup Because copying these has no effect on the system or an incorrect effect. Files in the Startup folder are executed, but only from System\Startup. Windows\Startup is parsed too early in the boot process so it has no effect. Executables in System\Startup must be the actual executable, not a shortcut, because shortcuts are not parsed by launch. My Device Folders Folder Description Preserved upon Reboot? Application Data Data saved by running applications No My Documents Storage for downloaded files / applications No Network Mounted network drive No Program Files Applications No System Internal SD Flash Card (CAB file storage) Yes Temp Location for temporary files No Windows Operating System in Secure Storage No VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Start Menu Program Options 81 Start Menu Program Options The following options represent the factory default program installation. Your system may be different based on the software and hardware options purchased. Access: Start | Programs Cisco Set Cisco radio / network parameters (Please see Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for details) Communication Stores Network communication options ActiveSync Transfer files between a VX6 and a desktop computer Connect Run this command after setting up a connection Start FTP Server Begin connection to FTP server Stop FTP Server End connection to FTP server Microsoft File Viewers View downloaded files (see Note) Excel Viewer View Excel 97 and newer documents Image Viewer View BMP, JPEG and PNG images PDF Viewer View Adobe Acrobat documents Word Viewer View Word 97 and newer documents and RTF files Summit Set Summit radio / network parameters (Please see Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for details) Command Prompt The command line interface in a separate window Internet Explorer Access web pages on the world wide Internet Java Option LXE RFTerm Option. Terminal emulation application. Media Player Music management program Microsoft WordPad Opens an ASCII notepad Remote Desktop Connection Log on to a Windows Terminal Server Transcriber Enter data using the stylus on the touchscreen Avalanche Option. Remote management for networked devices Windows Explorer File management program Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J The Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected. VX6 Reference Guide 82 Start Menu Program Options Communication Access: Start | Programs | Communication ActiveSync Once a relationship (partnership) has been established with Connect, ActiveSync will synchronize using the radio link on the VX6. See also: Chapter 1 “Introduction”, section “ActiveSync – Initial Setup”. Requirement: ActiveSync version 3.7 (or higher) must be resident on the host (desktop/laptop) computer. ActiveSync is available from the Microsoft website. Follow their instructions to locate, download and install ActiveSync on your desktop computer. For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer, open ActiveSync, then open ActiveSync Help. See also section titled “Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync” for more ActiveSync information. Synchronizing from the VX6 using a USB ActiveSync connection: You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device. 1. To initiate synchronization from your device, connect the USB cable to the PC and to the dongle cable on the VX6. The VX6 connects automatically. 2. Click the Sync Now button to synchronize with the PC. 3. Click the Disconnect button or remove the cable to disconnect. 4. To modify the Synchronization settings, see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on the desktop PC. Synchronizing from the VX6 using Serial or RF connection: You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device. 1. To initiate synchronization from your device, tap Start | Programs | Communication | ActiveSync to begin the process. 2. Click the Connect button. 3. Tap the Sync Now button to synchronize with the PC. 4. Tap the Disconnect button to disconnect. 5. To modify the Synchronization settings, see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on the desktop PC. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Start Menu Program Options 83 Connect Connect is used to initiate a hardwired connection to a host. Several pre-defined connect setups are included in the factory setup: • COM1 direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud • COM3 2 direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud • USB direct connect The default connect setup is USB direct connect. After a connect setup is selected, Start | Programs | Communication | Connect will start to connect to a host. After this connection is made and an ActiveSync relationship established, the ActiveSync menu item can be used to establish the connection over the radio link. See Also: “Important Information – Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection” Start FTP Server / Stop FTP Server These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server. The server defaults to Off (for security) unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu. 2 E-EQ-VX6RG-J The COM3 port is labeled “COM2/3”. VX6 Reference Guide 84 Start Menu Program Options Command Prompt Access: Start | Programs | Command Prompt Figure 3-1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands. Exit the Command Prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or select File | Close. Internet Explorer Access: Start | Programs | Internet Explorer This option requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider. There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options. Click the “?” button to access Internet Explorer Help. Media Player Access: Start | Programs | Media Player There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options. Click the “?” button to access Media Player Help. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Start Menu Program Options 85 Remote Desktop Connection Access: Start | Programs | Remote Desktop Connection There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Remote Desktop Connection as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection options. Select a computer from the drop down list or enter a host name and tap the Connect button. Tap the Options >> button to access the General, Display, Local Resources, Programs and Experience tabs. Click the “?” button to access Remote Desktop Connection Help. Note: VX6 and Custom Key Maps: before connecting to a host using Remote Desktop Connection, go to Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard and select Preload or 0409 (depending on system software revision) from the keymap popup. Click OK. Transcriber Access: Start | Programs | Transcriber Select Transcriber on the Start | Programs menu. To make changes to the Transcriber application, enable or disable the current Transcriber session, etc., click the “hand with a pen” icon in the toolbar. Click the “?” button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help. Windows Explorer Access: Start | Programs | Windows Explorer There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Explorer options. Click the “?” button to access Windows Explorer Help. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 86 Start Menu Program Options Taskbar Access: Start | Settings | Taskbar and Start Menu Factory Default Settings Always on Top Enabled Auto hide Disabled Show Clock Enabled There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Taskbar options. When the taskbar is auto hidden, press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button appear. Figure 3-2 Taskbar Properties Advanced Tab Expand Control Panel Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the Settings | Control Panel menu option. Clear Contents of Document Folder Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Document folder. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 87 Control Panel Options Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel or My Computer | Control Panel Getting Help Please click the “?” box to get Help when changing Control Panel options. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Option Function About Displays hardware and software details. Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard, display or mouse functions. Administrator Control AppLock configuration. (See Chapter 6, “AppLock”.) Aironet Client Utility Set the parameters for a Cisco radio. (See section “Start Menu Program Options”, only present if Cisco radio software installed.) Bluetooth Discover and manage Bluetooth devices. Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication. Date/Time Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings. Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by LXE). Display Set background graphic, color scheme appearance, and power scheme properties. Input Panel Select the current key / data input method. Internet Options Set General, Connection, Security, Privacy, Advanced and Popups options for Internet connectivity. Keyboard Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate. KeyPad Remap keys to a single keypress, combination of keypresses or to launch an application or command. Mixer Adjust the volume, record gain, and sidetone for microphone input. Mouse Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen. MX3X-VXC Options Set various device specific configuration options. Network and Dial Up Options Set network driver properties and network access properties. Owner Set VX6 owner details. Password Set VX6 access password properties. PC Connection Control the connection between the VX6 and a local desktop or laptop computer. PCMCIA Manage PCMCIA cards. Power Displays the status of all power managed devices. VX6 Reference Guide 88 Control Panel Options Option Function Regional Settings Set appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional and language settings. Remove Programs Remove user installed programs in their entirety. Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports. (See Chapter 4, “Scanner”.) Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel. System Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage and Program memory settings. Volume and Sounds Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE events. Wi-Fi Set the parameters for a Summit radio. See Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for details on the SCU. About Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | About Displays hardware and software details. Tab Title Contents Software GUID, Windows Windows CE version, OAL Version, Bootloader Version, Compile Version, FPGA Version and Language Hardware CPU Type, Codec Type, FPGA Version, Scanner type, Display, Flash memory, and DRAM memory Versions LXE Utilities, LXE Drivers, LXE Image, LXE API, and Internet Explorer Network IP Current network connection IP and MAC address. User application version information can be shown in the Version window. Version window information is taken from the registry. Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor (see section titled “VX6 Utilities”). LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made. The registry settings for the Version window are under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ LXE \ Version in the registry. Create a new string value under this key. The string name should be the Application name to appear in the Version window. The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 89 Language and Fonts The Software tab displays any fonts built into the OS image. Figure 3-3 About Properties, Software The fonts built into the OS image are noted in the Language section of this tab: • English only – No additional fonts are built into the OS • Japanese • Simplified Chinese • Traditional Chinese • Korean The above listed Asian fonts are ordered separately and built-in to the VX6 OS image. Built-in fonts are added to registry entries and are available immediately upon startup. Thai, Hebrew, Arabic and Cyrillic Russian fonts are available in the (English only) default (extended) fonts. When an Asian font is copied into the fonts folder on the /System folder; the font works for Asian web pages, the font works with RFTerm, the font does not work for Asian options in Regional Settings control panel, the font does not work for naming desktop icons with Asian names, the font does not work for third-party .NET applications, the font does not work for some third-party MFC applications. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 90 Control Panel Options Identifying Software Versions The “Versions” tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed. Not all installed software installed on the VX6 is included in this list and the list varies depending on the applications loaded on the VX6. The LXE Image line displays the revision of the system software installed. Please refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level (i.e.: in the example below, the revision level is 2BT). Figure 3-4 About Properties, Versions Radio MAC Address The “Network IP” tab displays the MAC address of the radio card. Figure 3-5 About Properties, Network IP VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 91 Accessibility Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard, sound, display, mouse, automatic reset and notification sound function. There is no change from general desktop Accessibility options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Figure 3-6 Accessibility Properties, Keyboard Note: The StickyKeys option SHOULD NOT be used on the VX6. It does not work for the integrated VX6 keyboard. If the ToggleKeys option is selected, please note that Scroll Lock key does not produce a sound as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do. This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system. . Figure 3-7 Accessibility Properties, Sound If the SoundSentry option is selected, please note that Scroll Lock does not produce a visual warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do. This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 92 Control Panel Options Administrator Control Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection Use this option to set parameters for computers intended to be used as dedicated, single (or multi) application devices. In other words, only the application(s) or feature(s) specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the user. LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password, thus when the device is first booted, the user has full access to the device and no password prompt is displayed. After the administrator specifies an application to lock, a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed, the device switches to end-user mode. AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters as specified by the Administrator. To set the AppLock parameters, please see Chapter 6, “AppLock” for details. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 93 Bluetooth Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth Discover and manage pairing with nearby Bluetooth devices. Factory Default Settings Discovered Devices Settings Turn Off Bluetooth Report when connection lost Report when connected Report failure to reconnect Computer is connectable Computer is discoverable Prompt if devices request to pair Continuous search None Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Bluetooth taskbar Icon state and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered, pair, connect and disconnect. There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices re-connect with the mobile device. • The default Bluetooth setting is On and all options on the Settings Panel are enabled. • The VX6 cannot be discovered by other Bluetooth devices when the Computer is discoverable option is disabled (unchecked) on the Settings panel. • Other Bluetooth devices cannot be discovered if they have been set up to be NonDiscoverable or Invisible. • The mobile device can pair with one Bluetooth scanner and one Bluetooth printer. • It is not necessary to disconnect a paired scanner and printer before a different scanner or printer is paired with the VX6. • The Bluetooth device should be as close as possible (line of sight) to the mobile device during the pairing process. Assumption: The System Administrator has Discovered and Paired targeted Bluetooth devices for the VX6. The VX6 operating system has been upgraded to the revision level required for Bluetooth client operation. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 94 Control Panel Options Discover Figure 3-8 Control Panel - Bluetooth Tap the Discover button to locate all discoverable Bluetooth devices in the vicinity. Discovery process also queries for the unique identifier for each device discovered. The Figure 3-9 Discover Bluetooth Devices Tap Stop at any time to end the Discover and Query for Unique Identifier functions. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 95 Bluetooth Devices A device previously discovered and paired with the VX6 is shown in the Bluetooth Devices panel. Figure 3-10 Bluetooth Devices Panel Note: When an active paired device enters Suspend Mode, is turned Off or leaves the VX6 Bluetooth scanning range, the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the VX6 is lost. There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the VX6. The discovered paired devices may or may not be identified with an icon. Discovered devices without an icon can be paired as printers or scanners; the Bluetooth panel will assign an icon to the device name. An icon with a red background indicates the device Bluetooth connection is inactive. An icon with a white background indicates the device is connected to the VX6 and the device Bluetooth connection is active. Doubletap a device in the list to open the device properties menu. The targeted device does not need to be active. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 96 Control Panel Options Figure 3-11 Bluetooth Device Disconnect / Delete Tap Pair as Scanner to set up the VX6 to receive data from the scanner. Tap Pair as Printer to set up the VX6 to send data to the printer. Tap Disconnect to stop the connection between the VX6 and a paired Bluetooth device. Tap Delete to remove an unpaired device from the Bluetooth device list. The device name and identifier is removed from the VX6 Bluetooth Devices panel after the user taps OK. Bluetooth Device Properties Figure 3-12 Bluetooth Device Properties Menu Data on the Bluetooth Properties panel cannot be changed by the user. The data displayed is the result of the device Query performed during the Discovery process. The Status dialog box reflects the current state of the highlighted device. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 97 Settings Figure 3-13 Bluetooth Device Settings Panel Turn Off Bluetooth Button Tap the button to toggle Bluetooth hardware On or Off. The default value is Bluetooth On. Options Option Default Information Report when connection lost Enabled There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired, active device is lost. A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display. Tap the X button or OK button to close the dialog box. Report when reconnected Disabled There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired, active device is re-connected. A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display. Tap the X button or OK button to close the dialog box. Report failure to reconnect Enabled The time delay is 30 minutes. This value cannot be changed by the user. There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired, active device is re-connected. A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display. Tap the X button or OK button to close the dialog box. Possible reasons for failure to reconnect: Timeout expired without reconnecting; attempted to pair with a device that is currently paired with another device; attempted to pair with a known device that moved out of range or was turned off; attempted to pair with a known device but the reason why reconnect failed is unknown. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 98 Control Panel Options Option Default Information Computer is connectable Enabled Disable this option to inhibit VX6 connection with all Bluetooth devices. Computer is discoverable Disabled Enable this option to ensure other devices can discover the VX6. Prompt if devices request to pair Disabled When enabled, a dialog box is placed on the display. Tap the X button, OK button or No button to close the dialog box. Continuous Search Disabled When enabled, the VX6 never stops searching for paired Bluetooth devices that have lost connection. When disabled, the VX6 stops searching after ½ hour. Computer Friendly Name Empty The name, or identifier, entered in this space by the System Administrator is used exclusively by Bluetooth devices and during Bluetooth communication. Note: The Device Name listed in Start | Settings | Control Panel | System | Device Name is not used during Bluetooth operation. Owner Identification name listed in Start | Settings | Control Panel | Owner | Identification is not used during Bluetooth operation. About Figure 3-14 Bluetooth About Panel This panel lists the assigned Computer Friendly Name (that other devices may discover during their Discovery and Query process), the Bluetooth MAC address, and software version levels. The data cannot be edited by the user. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 99 Easy Pairing and Auto-Reconnect The Bluetooth module can establish relationships with new devices after the end-user taps the Discover button. It can auto-reconnect to devices previously known but which have gone out of and then returned within range. Pairing supports SPP devices only. Up to two Bluetooth devices can be connected to the VX6 at a time; LXE supports one scanner and one printer (see Accessories). Taskbar Icon Legend Bluetooth is ready to connect or Bluetooth module is connected to one or more of the targeted Bluetooth device(s). VX6 is not connected to another Bluetooth device or VX6 is out of range of all targeted Bluetooth device(s). Connection is inactive. Note: Configuration elements are persistent and stored in the registry. Setup the Bluetooth module to establish how the user is notified by easy pairing and autoreconnect events. AppLock, if installed, does not stop the end-user from using the Bluetooth application, nor does it stop other Bluetooth-enabled devices from pairing with the VX6 while AppLock is in control. See Chapter 6 – AppLock for more information. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 100 Control Panel Options Certificates Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication. Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the VX6 user. These values may change based on the type of radio security resident in the client, access point or the host system. Date/Time Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Date/Time Icon Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings. Factory Default Settings Current Time Midnight Time Zone GMT-05:00 Daylight Savings Disabled Figure 3-15 Date/Time Properties There is little change from general desktop PC Date/Time Properties options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Double tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes this display to appear. If an Internet connection is available, click the Sync button to synchronize time with a time server. The VX6 includes a GrabTime utility: VX6 Reference Guide • GrabTime can be executed manually at any time by clicking the Sync button on this control panel. • GrabTime can be configured to synchronize the time at boot up. Please see “Enabling GrabTime”, later in this chapter, for details. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 101 Dialing Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Dialing Figure 3-16 Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by LXE). Tap the “?” and follow the instructions in Help. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 102 Control Panel Options Display Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display Icon Set background graphic, color scheme appearance, and power scheme properties. Factory Default Settings Background Tile Appearance Scheme: Backlight Battery Auto Turn Off Idle Time External Auto Turn Off Idle Time Windowsce Disable Windows Standard Enabled 30 seconds Enabled 2 minutes Background There is no change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Background options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Appearance No change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Appearance options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. The default is Windows Standard. Backlight Figure 3-17 Display Properties / Backlight Tab Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. When the backlight timer expires, the display, display backlight and keyboard backlight are all turned off. Note: VX6 Reference Guide The display can also be configured to turn off when the vehicle to which the VX6 is mounted is in motion. This feature required a serial cable connection and is enabled using the Scanner control panel. Please see “Screen Blanking” in Chapter 4 “Scanner”, for details. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 103 Input Panel Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Input Panel Select the current key / data input method. Factory Default Settings Input Method Allow applications to change input panel state Keys Use gestures Keyboard Disabled Small keys Disabled Figure 3-18 Input Panel Properties Use this option to make the Soft Keyboard or the keypad primarily available when entering data. Selecting Keyboard enables both. The Input Panel is disabled by default. To enable the input panel, make sure the checkbox for “Allow applications to change input panel state” is checked and warmboot the VX6. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 104 Control Panel Options Internet Options Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Internet Options settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Set General, Connection, Security, Privacy, Advanced and Popups options for Internet connectivity. Factory Default Settings General Start Page Search Page Cache Size User Agent Connection Use LAN Autodial Name Proxy Server Bypass Proxy Security Allow cookies Allow TLS 1.0 security Allow SSL 2.0 security Allow SSL 3.0 security Warn when switching Privacy First party cookies Third party cookies Session cookies Advanced Stylesheets Theming Support Multimedia Security Popups Block popups Display notification Use same window http://www.lxe.com/ http://www.google.com 512 Kb Windows CE Disabled Blank Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Accept Prompt Always allow Enable Enable All options enabled All options enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Select a tab. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 105 Keyboard Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard Icon Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate. Factory Default Settings Repeat Enable Delay Short Rate Slow Key Map Default There is no change from general desktop PC Keyboard Properties options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. When new key maps are added to the registry, they will appear in the Key Map dropdown list on the Keyboard Panel. These values do not affect virtual keyboard taps. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 106 Control Panel Options KeyPad Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel: KeyPad Icon Use this option to assign key functions to mappable keys and specify application launch or run command key sequences. Factory Default Settings KeyMap Modifier Mode None Key F1 Remapped Key F1 Key Sequence Null LaunchApp App1-App4 Null App/Opt exe RunCmd Cmd1-Cmd4 Null File/Parm file KeyMap Tap the OK button to save changes. Tap the X button to ignore changes and return to the Control Panel. Figure 3-19 KeyPad Properties / KeyMap Tab Modifier Mode Available modifier keys are None, Shift and 2nd + Shift. The default value is None. Key The key to be remapped, valid keys alone or with a modifier key: F1 through F10 Scan Key Left Scan Key Right Enter . (Decimal) Remapped Key A key can be remapped to: any single key in the drop down list, VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 107 a Key Sequence (string of keys) an application (LaunchApp) a command (RunCmd). Key Sequence The Key Sequence textbox displays the results of the keypress if a Key Sequence, LaunchApp or RunCmd is mapped to the keypress. For more information, please see the How To sections later in this chapter. LaunchApp The default for all text boxes is Null. The text boxes accept string values only. Click the exe radio button to enter the name of the application to launch. Click the opt radio button to enter any options for the application launch. Figure 3-20 KeyMap Properties / LaunchApp Tab For more information, please see How To: Remap an Application Launch, later in this section. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J The executable file and options are not checked for accuracy. If the launch fails, the device emits a single beep VX6 Reference Guide 108 Control Panel Options RunCmd The default for all text boxes is Null. The text boxes accept string values only. Click the file radio button to enter the name of the command to launch. Click the parm radio button to specify parameters for the command. Figure 3-21 KeyMap Properties / RunCmd Tab For more information, please see How To: Remap an Application Launch, later in this section. How To: Remap a Single Key 1. On the KeyMap tab, select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options. 2. Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list. 3. Select the value from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list. 4. Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control. How To: Remap a Key Sequence 1. On the KeyMap tab, select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options. 2. Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list. 3. Select Key Sequence from the Remapped Key pulldown list. 4. Select the first key of the string from the pulldown list. Press the Add button to add the key to the string shown in the Key Sequence box. Repeat this step until all keys desired have been added to the key sequence. If necessary, use the Clear button to erase all entries in the Key Sequence box. 5. Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control. How To: Remap an Application Launch 1. On the KeyMap tab, select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options. 2. Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list. 3. Select Launch App1-4 from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list. 4. Click on the LaunchApp tab. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 109 5. Make sure the EXE radio button is selected. 6. In the text box (App1-4) corresponding to the number selected for Launch App1-4, enter the application to launch. 7. If any parameters are needed for the application, click on the OPT radio button. This clears the text box (though the application name is saved). Enter the desired parameters in the appropriate text box. 8. Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control. 9. If the KeyMap tab is accessed again, the application (plus any specified parameters) is displayed in the Key Sequence text box when the remapped key is again selected. How To: Remap a Command 1. On the KeyMap tab, select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options. 2. Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list. 3. Select RunCmd 1-4 from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list. 4. Click on the RunCmd tab. 5. Make sure the FILE radio button is selected. 6. In the text box (Cmd1-4) corresponding to the number selected for RunCmd1-4, enter the desired command. 7. If any parameters are needed for the command, click on the PARM radio button. This clears the text box (though the command is saved). Enter the desired parameters in the appropriate text box. 8. Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control. 9. If the KeyMap tab is accessed again, the command (plus any specified parameters) is displayed in the Key Sequence text box when the remapped key is again selected. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 110 Control Panel Options Mixer Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mixer Icon Adjust the volume, record gain, and sidetone for microphone input. Factory Default Settings Master Volume 0dB Record Gain 22.5dB Sidetone 12.0dB Input None Input Boost Disabled Figure 3-22 Mixer Select the Input for the mixer. Move the sliders to adjust the decibel level. Tap OK to save the settings. The following options are available for Input • None – No microphone. Use this setting when stereo headphones are attached to the device. • Mic1 – Use this setting when a mono headset with microphone is attached to the device. • Bluetooth – Reserved for future use. When checked, (enabled) Input Boost provides increased sensitivity of the microphone by 20 dB. Input Boost can only be enabled after an Input type other than None is selected. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 111 Mouse Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mouse Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen. MX3X-VXC Options Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | MX3X-VXC Options Set options such as IP V6, time sync, touchscreen enable and CapsLock. It may be necessary to warmboot the VX6 after making desired changes. A pop up window indicates if a warmboot is required. Communication Options on this tab configure communication options for the VX6. Figure 3-23 MX3X-VXC Options Properties / Communication Tab Enable TCP/IP Version 6 By default, IPv6 is disabled on the LXE device. Check this checkbox to enable IPv6. Allow Remote Desktop Autologon By default, Remote Desktop Autologon is disabled. Check this checkbox to enable Remote Desktop Autologon. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J The .RDP file must be saved in the \System folder. When prompted, use the Save As button to save the .RDP file is the \System directory. If the .RDP file is saved in the default root folder location, the .RDP file will not persist across a warmboot. VX6 Reference Guide 112 Control Panel Options Autolaunch TimeSync By default, TimeSync does not automatically run on the VX6. To enable TimeSync to run automatically on the VX6, check this checkbox. Synchronize with a Local Time Server By default, GrabTime synchronizes via an Internet connection. To synchronize with a local time server: 1. Use ActiveSync to copy GrabTime.ini from the My Device | Windows folder on the mobile device to the host PC. 2. Edit the copy of GrabTime.ini on the host PC. Add the local time server’s domain name to the beginning of the list of servers. You can optionally delete the remainder of the list. 3. Copy the modified GrabTime.ini file to the My Device | System folder on the mobile device. The System/GrabTime.ini file takes precedence over the Windows/GrabTime.ini file. System/Grabtime.ini also persists after a coldboot; Windows/Grabtime.ini does not persist. Misc Options on this tab configure device specific options. Note that options not available on the VX6 are grayed out. Figure 3-24 MX3X-VXC Options Properties / Misc Tab CapsLock By default, CapsLock is disabled after a warmboot. To enable CapsLock after a warmboot, check this checkbox. Touch Screen Disable By default, the VX6 touchscreen is enabled. To disable the touchscreen after a warmboot, check this checkbox. Touch Screen Heater Disable By default, the VX6 touchscreen heater is enabled. To disable the touchscreen after a warmboot, check this checkbox. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 113 Network and Dialup Connections Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections Create a dialup, direct, or VPN connection on the VX6. To configure the VX6 to use DHCP or a fixed IP address, select the desired connection. The default is to obtain an IP address via DHCP. A static IP address can be assigned by clicking the Specify an IP address radio button and entering the desired IP address, subnet mask and gateway. Figure 3-25 Network Connection Properties E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 114 Control Panel Options Owner Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Owner Icon Set VX6 owner details. Factory Default Settings Identification Blank Notes Blank There is no change from general desktop PC Owner Properties display. Enter the information and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Figure 3-26 Owner Properties VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 115 Password Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Password Icon Set VX6 access/power up password properties. Factory Default Settings Password Blank At Power On Disabled Note: Once a password is assigned, the Owner and Password Control Panel options require the password to be entered before the Control Panel option can be accessed. If you forget the password, it cannot be restored without performing a cold boot on the unit (which erases all memory). Enter the password, then type it again to confirm it and click the OK box to save the changes. The password is immediately in effect. Tap the Power On checkbox to set whether the user types a password at Power On. Tap the Screen Saver checkbox to set whether the user types a password to clear the screensaver. If there is no screensaver chosen, this checkbox is ignored. Note: Screensaver option only works with Remote Desktop screensavers. Figure 3-27 Password Properties E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 116 Control Panel Options PC Connection Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection Control the connection between the VX6 and a nearby desktop/laptop computer. Factory Default Settings Allow Connection Enabled Connect Using ‘USB Client’ Tap the Change button to adjust the settings and click the OK button to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Unchecking the “Allow connection with …..” disables ActiveSync. Change …. Clicking Change lists configured ActiveSync connections. In addition, there is a checkbox for Automatic Connect. This option applies to USB connection only. If this checkbox is checked, when the USB cable is connected, the VX6 will automatically try to start ActiveSync over the USB port. Note that this interferes with processes on the configured port at the same time. Figure 3-28 Communication / PC Connection Tab Please refer to the “Backup VX6 Files” section later in this chapter for parameter setting recommendations. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 117 PCMCIA Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | PCMCIA Enable or disable the PCMCIA slots. Information on the card currently in the PCMCIA slots and the Compact Flash slot is provided. Factory Default Settings Disable slot now Unchecked The Slot 0 and Slot 1 Tabs contain the same parameters. If a card is present in the slot, a description of the card is displayed. To disable a slot, check the Disable slot now checkbox and tap OK. The change takes effect immediately. Slot 0 is the lower slot, labeled “PCMCIA B”. Slot 1 is the upper slot, labeled “PCMCIA A”. Figure 3-29 PCMCIA Control Tab, Slot 0 and Slot 1 The Slot 2 Tab provides information on the internal Compact Flash ATA drive. There are no user configurable options. Figure 3-30 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab, Slot 2 E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 118 Control Panel Options Power Depending on the Software Revision, some devices may have a Schemes tab. Factory Default Settings Switch state to User Idle Switch state to System Idle Switch state to Suspen Never Never Never The Schemes tab can be used to control the display backlight and shut the VX6 Off. The mode timers are cumulative. The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired. For example, if the User Idle timer is set to Never, the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle, System Idle or Suspend modes. For a VX6, the User Idle state turns off the display backlight. There is no System Idle mode so the VX6 remains in User Idle mode until the Suspend timer expires or a primary even occurs. Please see “Power Modes” in Chapter 2, “Physical Description and Layout”. IMPORTANT: There is no Suspend mode on the VX6. If the Suspend timer is enabled, the VX6 will shut down when the Suspend timer expires. Figure 3-31 Power Properties The Device Status tab displays the status of power managed devices. Note that since the VX6 does not support power management, all devices show the “high” power level. There are no user options on this screen. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 119 Regional Settings Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Regional Settings Set the appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional and language settings. No change from general desktop PC Regional Settings Properties options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Options (and defaults) for the regional settings depend on the fonts included in the OS image. Please refer to the section on the About control panel earlier in this chapter for more details. A language must be installed before it can be selected. After selecting a language to use, and after all changes are made, tap OK to save your changes then warmboot the device. Factory Default Settings Regional Settings Your Locale Number Currency Time Date User Interface Language User Interface Language Input Language Input Language Installed Input Languages English (United States) 123,456,789.00 / -123,456,789.00 neg $123,456,789.00 pos / ($123,456,789.00) neg h:mm:ss tt (tt=AM or PM) M/d/yy short / dddd,MMMM,dd,yyyy long Dimmed (default is Your Locale setting) Dimmed (default is Your Locale setting) English (US) Tap the Customize button to set Number, Currency, Time and Date format for the selected Locale. User Interface Language determines the language used for the menus, dialogs and alerts. Select the Default Input Language to use when the device is rebooted. Remove Programs Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Remove Programs No change from general desktop Remove Programs options. Select a program and click Remove. Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user-installed only programs. The change takes effect immediately. Scanner Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports. To set the Scanner parameters, please see Chapter 4, “Scanner” for details. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 120 Control Panel Options Stylus Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel. Double Tap Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Calibration Figure 3-32 Stylus Properties / Recalibration Start Figure 3-33 Stylus Properties / Recalibration VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 121 System Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | System Icon Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage and Program memory settings. Factory Default Settings General N/A Memory 1/3 storage, 2/3 program memory Device Name VXC0001 Device LXE_VXC Description Copyrights N/A General Figure 3-34 System / General tab System: This screen is presented for information only. The System parameters cannot be changed by the user. Computer: The processor type is listed. The type cannot be changed by the user. The name of the installed radio card is listed in the dropdown list. Total computer memory and the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user. Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system. Hence, a system with 64 MB may only report 35 MB memory, since 29 MB is used up by the Windows CE operating system. This is actual DRAM memory, and does not include internal flash or the internal ATA card used for storage. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 122 Control Panel Options Memory Figure 3-35 System / Memory Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage. If there isn’t enough space for a file, increase the amount of storage memory. If the VX6 is running slowly, try increasing the amount of program memory. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Device Name Figure 3-36 System / Device Name The device name and description can be changed. Enter the name and description using either the keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Copyrights This screen is presented for information only. The Copyrights information cannot be changed by the user. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 123 Terminal Server Client Licenses Select a server client license from a drop down list Not available at this release. Volume and Sounds Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Volume & Sounds Icon Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE events. Factory Default Settings Volume Events Enabled Application Enabled Notifications Enabled Volume Middle of Bar Key click Loud Screen tap Loud Sounds Scheme LOUD! Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Figure 3-37 Volume and Sounds Wi-Fi Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Wi-Fi Provides access to the Summit Client Utility (SCU). For details on the SCU, please see Chapter 5, Wireless Network Configuration. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J This Control Panel icon is not present with some versions of the SCU. VX6 Reference Guide 124 CF Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs CF Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs The Flash card, located under the main battery pack, is intended to protect the user from losing the LXE drivers and configuration information in the event of a cold boot. Also, on any boot, the contents of any registered CAB files are automatically unpacked. Access Files on the Flash Card Tap the My Device icon on the Desktop then tap the System icon. Files A flash card is used for permanent storage of the LXE drivers and utilities. It is also used for registry content back up. The flash card is located in the socket under the main battery pack. CAB files, when executed, are not deleted. SUMMIT.CAB Summit Client files needed for network card operation. The following CAB files are optional and may or may not be present: BLUETOOTH.CAB Bluetooth Client files needed for LXEZ Pairing operation. LXE_VX3C_ENABLER.CAB Wavelink Avalanche Enabler. RFTERM.CAB RFTerm terminal emulation application. JAVA.CAB Java application. APPLOCK.CAB AppLock program. See Chapter 6 “AppLock”. Note: VX6 Reference Guide Always perform a warm reset (Start / Run / Warmboot) when exchanging one flash card for another. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync 125 Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync Using Microsoft ActiveSync version 3.7 or higher, you can synchronize information on your desktop computer with the VX6 and vice versa. Synchronization compares the data on your VX6 with your desktop computer and updates both with the most recent data. For example, you can: • Back up and restore your device data. • Copy (rather than synchronize) files between your device and desktop computer. • Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode. For example, you can synchronize continually while connected to your desktop computer or only when you choose the synchronize command. If the VX6 is connected to a PC by a RS-232 or USB cable, disconnect the cable from the VX6 and reconnect. Check that the correct connection is selected (Serial or USB “Client”). Note: By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information. Use ActiveSync Options to specify the types of information you want to synchronize. The synchronization process makes the data (in the information types you select) identical on both your desktop computer and your device. When installation of ActiveSync is complete on your desktop computer, the ActiveSync Setup Wizard begins and starts the following processes: • connect your device to your desktop computer, • set up a partnership so you can synchronize information between your device and your desktop computer, and • customize your synchronization settings. Because ActiveSync is already installed on your device, your first synchronization process begins automatically when you finish setting up your desktop computer in the ActiveSync wizard. Prerequisites VX6 and ActiveSync Partnership A partnership between the VX6 and ActiveSync has been established. See section “ActiveSync – Initial Setup” in Chapter 1 “Introduction”, “Getting Started”. Serial Port Transfer E-EQ-VX6RG-J • A desktop or laptop PC with an available serial port and a VX6 with a serial port. The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 95, 98, NT, 2000 or XP. • Null modem cable with all control lines connected. LXE recommends using the null modem cable part number listed in Chapter 1 “Introduction”, subsection “Accessories”. VX6 Reference Guide 126 Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync USB Transfer • A desktop or laptop PC with an available USB port and a VX6 with a USB port. The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 98 SR2, 2000 or XP. • A standard USB cable with a type A plug on one end, and a type B plug on the other. Connect Connect the modem cable to the PC (the host) and the VX6 (the client). Select “Connect” from the Start Menu on the VX6 (Start | Programs | Communications | Connect). Note: Run “Connect” when the “Get Connected” wizard on the host PC is checking COM ports to establish a connection for the first time. Note: USB will start automatically when the cable is connected, not requiring you to select “Connect” from the Start menu. Explore From the ActiveSync Dialog on the Desktop PC, click on the Explore button, which allows you to explore the VX6 from the PC side, with some limitations. You can copy files to or from the VX6 by drag-and-drop. You will not be allowed to delete files or copy files out of the \Windows directory on the VX6. (Technically, the only files you cannot delete or copy are ones marked as system files in the original build of the Windows CE image. This, however, includes most of the files in the \Windows directory). VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync 127 Disconnect Serial Connection • • Disconnect the cable from the VX6. Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then click the Disconnect button. • • Disconnect the cable from the VX6. Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then click the Disconnect button. • Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar. Then click the Disconnect button. USB Connection Radio Connection Important Information – Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection ActiveSync assigns a partnership between a client and a host computer. A partnership is defined by two objects -- a unique computer name and a random number generated when the partnership is first created. An ActiveSync partnership between a unique client can be established to two hosts. If the VX6 is cold booted, the random number is deleted – and the partnership with the last one of the two hosts is also deleted. The host retains the random numbers and unique names of all devices having a partnership with it. Two clients cannot have a partnership with the same host if they have the same name. (Control Panel | System | Device Name) If the cold booted VX6 tries to reestablish the partnership with the same host PC, a new random number is generated for the VX6 and ActiveSync will insist the unique name of the VX6 be changed. If the VX6 is associated with a second host, changing the name will destroy that partnership as well. This can cause some confusion when re-establishing partnerships with hosts. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 128 Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync Troubleshooting ActiveSync on the host says that a device is trying to connect, but it cannot identify it. One or more control lines are not connected. This is usually a cable problem, but on a laptop or other device, it may indicate a bad serial port. ActiveSync indicator on the host (disc in the toolbar tray) turns green and spins as soon as you connect the cable, before clicking the Connect icon (or REPLLOG.EXE in the Windows directory). One or more control lines are tied together incorrectly. This is usually a cable problem, but on a laptop or other device, it may indicate a bad serial port. ActiveSync indicator on the host turns green and spins, but connection never occurs Baud rate of connection is not supported or detected by host. Try forcing ActiveSync on the desktop PC to use a specific baud rate and set the VX6 to use the same baud rate. -orIncorrect or broken data lines in cable. ActiveSync indicator on the host remains gray The host doesn’t know you are trying to connect. May mean a bad cable, with no control lines connected, or an incompatible baud rate. Try the connection again, with a known-good cable. Testing connection with a terminal emulator program, or a serial port monitor You can use HyperTerminal or some other terminal emulator program to do a rough test of ActiveSync. Set the terminal emulator to 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bits, and the same baud rate as the connection on the CE device. After double-clicking REPLLOG.EXE on the CE device, the word “CLIENT” appears on the display in ASCII format. When using a serial port monitor, you see the host echo “CLIENT”, followed by “SERVER”. After this point, the data stream becomes straight (binary) PPP. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync 129 Create a Communication Option 1. On the VX6, select Start | Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections. A window is displayed showing the existing connections. 2. Assuming the one you want does not exist, double-click Make New Connection. 3. Give the new connection an appropriate name. Click the Direct Connection radio button. Click the Next button. 4. From the popup menu, choose the port you want to connect to. Only the available ports are shown. 5. Click the Configure... button. 6. Under the Port Settings tab, choose the appropriate baud rate. Data bits, parity, and stop bits remain at 8, none, and 1, respectively. 7. Under the Call Options tab, be sure to turn off Wait for dial tone, since a direct connection will not have a dial tone. Set the timeout parameter (default is 90 seconds). Click OK. 8. TCP/IP Settings should not need to change from defaults. Click the Finish button to create the new connection. 9. Close the Remote Networking window. 10. To activate the new connection select Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection and click the Change button. 11. Select the new connection. Click OK twice. 12. Close the Control Panel window. 13. Connect the desktop PC to the VX6 with the appropriate cable. 14. Click the desktop Connect icon to test the new connection. You can activate the connection by double-clicking on the specific connection icon in the Remote Networking window, but this will only start an RAS (Remote Access Services) session, and does not start ActiveSync properly. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 130 Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync Technical Specifications – Connection Cable The exact serial cable is crucial. Many commercial null modem cables will not work. LXE recommends the following cable: Serial cable: 9000A054CBL6D9D9 5 9 1 6 Pinout: DB9 female DB9 female 1 7 2 3 3 2 4 6, 8 5 5 6, 8 4 7 1 9 no connection Figure 3-38 Pinout – Serial Cable for Synchronization Some laptop devices do not properly implement all control lines on the serial port – the laptop connection will not work. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Utilities 131 VX6 Utilities The following files are pre-loaded by LXE. LAUNCH.EXE All applications to be installed into persistent memory are normally in the form of Windows CE CAB files. These CAB files exist as separate files from the main installation image, and need to be copied to the mobile device using an internal ATA card or from a PC using ActiveSync. The CAB files are loaded into the folder System, which is the internal ATA drive. Then, information is added to the registry, if desired, to make the CAB file auto-launch at startup. The CAB file can update the registry as desired and cause the unpacked file(s) to be placed in the appropriate location. The registry information needed is under the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ SOFTWARE \ LXE \ Persist, as follows. The main subkey is any text, and is a description of the file. Then 3 values are added: FileName is the name of the CAB file, with the path (usually \System) Installed is a DWORD value of 0, which changes to 1 once auto-launch installs the file FileCheck is the name of a file to look for to determine if the CAB file is installed. The value in FileCheck is the name of one of the files (with path) installed by the CAB file. Since the CAB file installs into DRAM, when memory is lost this file is lost, and the CAB file must be reinstalled. Three optional fields are also added: Order, Delay, and PCMCIA. These are all DWORD fields, described below. The auto-launch process goes as follows. The launch utility opens the registry database and reads the list of CAB files to auto-launch. First it looks for FileName to see if the CAB file is present. If not, the registry entry is ignored. If it is present, and the Installed flag is not set, auto-launch makes a copy of the CAB file (since it gets deleted by installation), and runs the Microsoft utility WCELOAD to install it. If the Installed flag is set, auto-launch looks for the FileCheck file. If it is present, the CAB file is installed, and that registry entry is complete. If the FileCheck file is not present, memory has been lost, and the utility calls WCELOAD to reinstall the CAB file. Then, the whole process repeats for the next entry in the registry, until all registry entries are analyzed. To force execution every time (for example, for AUTOEXEC.BAT), use a FileCheck of “dummy”, which will never be found, forcing the item to execute. For persist keys specifying .EXE or .BAT files, the executing process will be started, and then Launch will continue, leaving the loading process to run independently. For other persist keys (including .CAB files), Launch will wait for the loading process to complete before continuing. This is important, for example, to ensure that a .CAB file is installed before the .EXE files from the .CAB file are run. The Order field is used to force a sequence of events; Order=0 is first, and Order=99 is last. Two items which have the same order will be installed in the same pass, but not in a predictable sequence. Note: If the order of loading is not critical, it may be easier to use the \System\Startup folder instead; see below. The Delay field is used to add a delay after the item is loaded, before the next is loaded. The delay is given in seconds, and defaults to 0 if not specified. If the install fails (or the file to be installed is not found), the delay does not occur. The PCMCIA field is used to indicate that the file (usually a CAB file) being loaded is a wireless client driver, and the PCMCIA slots should be started after this file is loaded. By default, the E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 132 VX6 Utilities PCMCIA slots are off on powerup, to prevent the “Unidentified PCMCIA Slot” dialog from appearing. Once the drivers are loaded, the slot can be turned on. The value in the PCMCIA field is a DWORD, representing the number of seconds to wait after installing the CAB file, but before activating the slot (a latency to allow the thread loading the driver to finish installation). The default value of 0 means the slot is not powered on. The default values for the default wireless client drivers (listed below) is 1, meaning one second elapses between the CAB file loading and the slot powering up. Note that the auto-launch process can also launch batch files (*.BAT), executable files (*.EXE), registry setting files (*.REG), or sound files (*.WAV). The mechanism is the same as listed above, but the appropriate CE application is called, depending on file type. Registry information is already in the default image for the following: ;; ------- autoexec batch file - for users convenience [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\AUTOEXEC] "FileName"="\\System\\Autoexec.bat" "Installed"=dword:0 "FileCheck"="ALWAYSEXEC" "Order"=dword:50 ;; The file name “ALWAYSEXEC” or “dummy” does not really matter as long as there is ;; no file of that name in the directory. You can use any name that you want for this entry ;; as long as it is a non existent file name. The purpose of this value is that if someone ;; wants to only execute this file one time then you would replace the value of FileCheck ;; with the name of a file that would exist the next time a warm boot occurs. ;; ------- RFTerm support [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\LXE TE] "FileName"="\\System\\RFTERM.CAB" "Installed"=dword:0 "FileCheck"="\\WINDOWS\\LXE\\RFTERM.EXE" "Order"=dword:11 ;; run the app after it has loaded and client device is ready [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\RFTERM] "FileName"="\\WINDOWS\\LXE\\RFTERM.EXE" "Installed"=dword:0 "FileCheck"="ALWAYSEXEC" "Order"=dword:40 "Delay"=dword:1 When you are installing your custom CAB file to the mobile device’s operating sytem, refer to the default image segments that are commented with “… RFTERM …” to see the expected Registry format. One special key is included to force the system folders (Desktop, Fonts, Programs, etc.) to copy from the internal ATA card (\System) to the \Windows directory. This is implemented as a persist key so the sequence of startup events can be controlled (especially for AppLock). The filename is a special internal trigger for the Launch utility, to activate the CopyFolders function. DO NOT EDIT OR ALTER THIS KEY, OR IT MAY NO LONGER FUNCTION. You may however change the Order or Delay values if necessary for a particular startup sequence. [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\LXE\Persist\COPYFOLDERS] “FileName”=”COPYFOLDERS” “FileCheck”=”” “Order”=dword:0F To have files (CAB, EXE, REG, or WAV files) loaded on startup, when sequence of execution is not important, you can put these files in the \System\Startup folder (on the internal ATA card). This is parsed by the Launch utility, and these programs are started or executed. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Utilities 133 REGEDIT.EXE Registry Editor – LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made. REGLOAD.EXE Double-tapping a registry settings file (e.g. REG) causes RegLoad to open the file and make the indicated settings in the registry. This is similar to how RegEdit works on a desktop PC. The .REG file format is the same as on the desktop PC. REGDUMP.EXE Registry dump – Saves a copy of the registry as a text file. The file, REG.TXT, is located in the root folder. Note: The REG.TXT file is not saved in persistent storage. To use the REG.TXT file as a reference in the even of a coldboot, LXE recommends copying the file to the \SYSTEM directory on the VX6 or storing a copy of the file on a PC. WARMBOOT.EXE Double click this file to warm boot the computer (i.e., all RAM is preserved). It automatically saves the registry before rebooting which means configuration changes are not lost. WAVPLAY.EXE Double tapping a sound file (e.g. WAV) causes WavPlay to open the file and run it in the background. VX6 Command-line Utilites Command line utilities can be executed by Start | Run | [program name]. COLDBOOT.EXE Command line utility which performs a cold boot (all RAM is erased). Passwords are lost upon cold boot. If a password is set, that password must be entered to begin the cold boot power cycle process. PrtScrn.EXE Command line utility which performs a screen print and saves the file in .BMP format in the \System folder. Click Start | Run and type prtscrn and click OK, or press Enter. There is a 10 second delay before the screen print is made. The device beeps and screen captured file (scrnnnnn.bmp) is placed in the \System folder. The numeric filename is incremented by 1 each time the PrtScrn function is activated. The command is not case-sensitive. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 134 API Calls API Calls See Also: LXE CE API Programming Guide E-SW-WINAPIPG The LXE CE API Programming Guide documents only the LXE-specific API calls for the VX6. It is intended as an addition to the standard Microsoft Windows CE API documentation. Details of many of the calls in the LXE guide may be found in Microsoft’s documentation. The APIs documented in the programming guide are included in the file LXEAPI.DLL, which is in the standard Windows CE image on the VX6. For ease of software development, the files LXEAPI.H and LXEAPI.LIB are available on the accessories CD, which are the C/C++ include files and the link library for the DLL, respectively. A full SDK is now included for Microsoft Embedded Visual C++ 4.0 (which is available free on the Microsoft website). VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Reflash the VX6 135 Reflash the VX6 Note: When reflashing, LXE recommends using a Compact Flash (CF) card that is greater than 64MB. Files to be loaded on the CF card are: NK.BIN, EBOOT.NB0, XSCALE.BIT Requirements: • A screwdriver (not supplied by LXE) • PCMCIA to CF card adapter Preparation • LXE recommends that installation of the CF card be performed on a clean, well-lit surface. • Loosen the captive screws securing the user access panel cover. The cover is tethered to the VX6. Caution ! Make sure the VX6 has an uninterrupted power connection before beginning the reflash procedure. Loss of power during the reflash process can result in corrupted files. IMPORTANT – Please contact LXE Customer Support for information on upgrading Windows CE .NET to Windows CE 5.0. These instructions are only valid for upgrading to a newer revision of the same operating system. How To: Reflash using Keypress Method 1. Place the PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card with new image files on it in the PCMCIA slot next to the radio. 2. Double-click My Computer, then Storage Card folder. 3. Select NK.BIN, EBOOT.NB0, XSCALE.BIT. Select Edit | Copy. 4. Tap Back Arrow. Doubleclick \System folder. 5. Select Edit | Paste. When asked “Overwrite ?”, click Yes to All. 6. When the copy process finishes, remove the PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card. 7. Select Start | Run and type Coldboot. Click OK. 8. Before the splash screen appears, press and hold down the key. Continue to hold it down until the displays shows “Writing to boot flash” Note: 9. If you do not press and hold the key quickly enough, the display shows “Loading OS Image”. Reboot and press and hold the key again. The VX6 automatically reboots after flashing the bootloader. “Loading OS Image” is displayed on the screen and when the new OS finishes loading, all software upgrades are complete 10. Secure the user access cover using the captive screws. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 136 Reflash the VX6 How To: Reflash using TAG file Method S This method requires software revision 2BT or greater. To identify the software revision, please click on the “About” icon in the Windows CE Control Panel. 1. Place the PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card with new image files on it in the PCMCIA slot next to the radio. 2. Double-click My Computer, then Storage Card folder. 3. Select NK.BIN, EBOOT.NB0, XSCALE.BIT. Select Edit | Copy. 4. Tap Back Arrow. Doubleclick \System folder. 5. Select Edit | Paste. When asked “Overwrite ?”, click Yes to All. 6. Additionally a REFLASH.TAG file is needed to trigger the reflash. This file can be created on the VX6 or copied to it along with the system files. The contents of the file are unimportant; but the file must be named REFLASH.TAG and it must be in the \System folder with the new system load. 7. When the copy process finishes, remove the he PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card. 8. Select Start | Run and type Coldboot. Click OK. 9. When booting, the VX6 looks for a file named REFLASH.TAG in the \System folder. When this file is encountered, the VX6 loads a new bootloader image (eboot.nb0) into the boot flash. The tag file is deleted and the VX6 is rebooted to begin using the new boot loader. If there is no .nb0 file it does not re-flash and deletes the REFLASH.TAG. 10. The VX6 automatically reboots after flashing the bootloader. “Loading OS Image” is displayed on the screen and when the new OS finishes loading, all software upgrades are complete 11. Secure the user access cover using the captive screws. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Clearing Persistent Storage 137 Clearing Persistent Storage The coldboot utility sets all registry settings back to LXE factory defaults. No other clearing is available or necessary. Network Configuration There are two networking options available for the VX6: • Wireless radios • Ethernet (RJ-45) connector. Wireless Radios Please refer Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for information on configuring the Summit, Cisco or Symbol radio. Ethernet Connector When the VX6 is networked using the Ethernet connector, the VX6’s networking options are set via the Microsoft Windows CE Control Panel. For more information on configuring the Microsoft Windows CE network settings, please refer to the Windows CE Help feature or commercially available Windows networking literature. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 138 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration A VX6 device manufactured before October 2006 must have drivers and system files upgraded before it can use the Avalanche Enabler functions. Please contact an LXE representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline. If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device, the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device. Briefly . . . The Wavelink Avalanche Enabler installation file is loaded on the mobile device by LXE; however, the device is not configured to launch the installation file automatically. The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used. After the installation application is manually run, a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance. Following this reboot, the Enabler will by default be an auto-launch application. This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface. Enabler Install Process Enabler Install Process • Doubletap the LXE_VXC_ENABLER.CAB file in the System folder. • Warm boot the mobile device. Because the VX6 has two possible network adapters (the internal adapter for a cabled network connection and the wireless network card), the Enabler uses the first network adapter it discovers. In order to assure the Enabler uses the wireless connection, perform one of the following actions: • Select the Adapters tab in the Enabler setup (See “Enabler Configuration”, later in this chapter) and make sure the wireless adapter is selected for Current Adapter. • To disable the internal network adapter, create a file in the \system directory named NoEther.tag. The contents of the file are unimportant; but the file must be named NoEhter.tag and it must be in the \system directory. (If the \system directory contains a file named Ether.tag, you can rename this file to NoEther.tag instead of creating a new file). After creating the file, coldboot the VX6. After the VX6 finishes booting, the internal Ethernet adapter is disabled. The restore the adapter, delete the NoEther.tag file and coldboot and the VX6. Enabler Uninstall Process To remove the LXE Avalanche Enabler from a Windows CE mobile device: • Delete the Avalanche folder located in the System folder. • Warm boot the mobile device. The Avalanche folder cannot be deleted while the Enabler is running. See Stop the Enabler Service. If sharing errors occur while attempting to delete the Avalanche folder, warm boot the mobile device, immediately delete the Avalanche folder, and then perform another warm boot. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 139 Stop the Enabler Service To stop the Enabler from monitoring for updates from the Management MC Console: 1. Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop. 2. Select File | Settings. Enter the password. 3. Select the Startup/Shutdown tab. 4. Select the “Do not monitor or launch Enabler” parameter to prevent automatic monitoring upon startup. 5. Select Stop Monitoring for an immediate shutdown of all enabler update functionality upon exiting the user interface. 6. Click the OK button to save the changes. 7. Reboot the device if necessary. Update Monitoring Overview There are three methods by which the Enabler on an LXE device can communicate with the Mobile Device Server running on the host machine. • Wired via a serial cable between the Mobile Device Server and the LXE device. • Wired via a USB connection, using ActiveSync, between the Mobile Device Server and the mobile device. • Wirelessly via the radio and an access point After installing the Enabler on the mobile unit, a reboot is required for the Enabler to begin normal functionality. Following a mobile device reboot, the Enabler searches for an Mobile Device Server, first by polling all available serial ports and then over the wireless network. The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche Mobility Center Manager is LXE_VXC. The Enabler running on LXE Windows CE devices will attempt to access COM1, COM2, and COM3. “Agent not found” will be reported if the Mobile Device Server is not located or a serial port is not present or available (COM port settings can be verified using the LXE scanner applet in the Control Panel). The wireless connection is made using the default radio interface on the mobile device therefore the device must be actively communicating with the network for this method to succeed. If a Mobile Device Server is found, the Enabler will automatically attempt to apply all wireless and network settings from the active profile. The Enabler will also automatically download and process all available packages. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 140 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings Once the connection to the Mobile Device Server is established, the Enabler will attempt to apply all network and wireless settings contained in the active profile. The success of the application of settings is dependent upon the local configuration of control parameters for the Enabler. These local parameters cannot be overridden from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console. The default Enabler adapter control setting are: • Manage network settings – enabled • Use Avalanche network profile – enabled • Manage wireless settings – disabled for Windows CE Units To configure the Avalanche Enabler management of the network and wireless settings: 1. Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop. 2. Select File | Settings. Enter the password. 3. Select the Adapters tab. 4. Choose settings for the “Use Manual Settings” parameter. 5. Choose settings for “Manage Network Settings”, “Manage Wireless Settings” and “Use Avalanche Network Profile”. 6. Click the OK button to save the changes. 7. Reboot the device. The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager is LXE_VXC. See Also: “Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers”. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 141 Enabler Configuration The Enabler user interface application is launched by clicking: Avalanche Icon either the Avalanche icon on the desktop or Taskbar or selecting Avalanche from the Programs menu. The opening screen presents the user with the connection status and a navigation menu. Figure 3-39 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen Some parameters and features described in this section may not be available if you are not running the latest version of the Enabler. Please contact your LXE representative for details. E-EQ-VX6RG-J File View Help Connect Abort Settings Scan Config Exit Updates Programs Icons List Details Launchable All Packages Time on Taskbar Device Status Adapter Info About VX6 Reference Guide 142 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration File Menu Options Connect The Connect option under the File menu allows the user to initiate a manual connection to the Mobile Device Server. The connection methods, by default, are wireless and COM connections. Any updates available will be applied to the mobile device immediately upon a successful connection. Abort Stop transmission. Settings The Settings option under the File menu allows the user to access the control panel to locally configure the Enabler settings. The Enabler control panel is, by default, password protected. The default password is system. The password is not case-sensitive. Scan Config Note: LXE does not support the Scan Configuration feature on Windows CE devices. The Scan Config option under the File menu allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special barcode that can be created using the Avalanche Mobility Center Console utilities. Refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User’s Guide for details. Exit The Exit option is password protected. The default password is leave. The password is not case-sensitive. If changes were made on the Startup/Shutdown tab screen, then after entering the password, tap OK and the following screen is displayed: Change the option if desired. Tap the X button to cancel Exit. Tap the OK button to exit the Avalanche applet. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 143 Avalanche Update Settings Access: Start | Avalanche | File | Settings Use these menu options to setup the Avalanche Enabler on the mobile device. LXE recommends changing and then saving the changes (reboot) before connecting to the network. Alternatively, the Mobile Device Server on the Wavelink Avalanche Management Console can be disabled until needed (refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User’s Guide for details). Menu Options E-EQ-VX6RG-J Settings Tab Function Connection Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server portion of the Avalanche Management Console. Set the order in which serial ports or RF are used to check for the presence of the Mobile Device Server. Execution Unavailable in this release. LXE recommends using AppLock, which is resident on each Windows mobile device. Server Contact Setup synchronization, scheduled Mobile Device Server contact, suspend and reboot settings. Startup/Shutdown Set options for Enabler program startup or shutdown. Scan Config This option allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special barcode that is created by the Avalanche Mobility Center Console. Not currently supported by LXE. Display Set up the Windows display at startup, on connect and during normal mode. The settings can be adjusted by the user. Shortcuts Add, delete and update shortcuts to user-allowable applications. Adapters Enable or disable network and wireless settings. Select an adapter and switch between the Avalanche Network Profile and manual settings. Status View the current adapter signal strength and quality, IP address, MAC address, SSID, BSSID and Link speed. The user cannot edit this information. VX6 Reference Guide 144 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Connection Figure 3-40 Connection Options Avalanche Server Address Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server assigned to the mobile device Check Serial Connection Indicates whether the Enabler should first check for serial port connection to the Mobile Device Server before checking for a wireless connection to the Mobile Device Server. Disable ActiveSync Disable ActiveSync connection with the Mobile Device Server. Restrict Adapter Link Speed VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 145 Execution Note the dimmed options on this panel. This menu option is designed to manage downloaded applications for automatic execution upon startup. Figure 3-41 Execution Options (Dimmed) E-EQ-VX6RG-J Auto-Execute Selection An application that has been installed with the Avalanche Mobility Center Console can be run automatically following each boot. Select Auto-Execute App The drop-down box provides a list of applications that have been installed by the Avalanche Mobility Center Console. Delay before execution Time delay before launching Auto-Execute application. VX6 Reference Guide 146 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Server Contact Figure 3-42 Server Contact Options Sync Clock Reset the time on the mobile computer based on the time on the Mobile Device Server. Contact On Startup – Connect to the Mobile Device Server when the Enabler is accessed. On Resume – Connect to the Mobile Device Server when resuming from Suspend mode. On Ext. Power – Initiate connection to the Mobile Device Server when the device is connected to an external power source, such as based on a docking event. Allows the administrator to configure the Enabler to contact the Mobile Device Server and query for updates at a regular interval beginning at a specific time. Wakeup device if suspended If the time interval for periodic contact with the Mobile Device Server occurs, a mobile device that is in Suspend Mode can ‘wakeup’ and process updates. Reboot before attempt Reboot mobile device before attempting to contact Mobile Device Server. Require external power Only connect when the device has external power. Use relative offset VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 147 Startup/Shutdown LXE recommends using LXE AppLock to manage the taskbar. AppLock is resident on each mobile device with a Windows OS. AppLock configuration instructions are located in Chapter 6. Figure 3-43 Startup / Shutdown Options E-EQ-VX6RG-J Do not monitor or launch Enabler When the device boots, do not launch the Enabler application and do not attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server. Monitor for updates Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available. Do not launch the Enabler application. Monitor and launch Enabler Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available. Launch the Enabler application. Manage Taskbar (Lock or Hide) Note the dimmed options. The Enabler can restrict user access to other applications when the user interface is accessed by either locking or hiding the taskbar. Program Shutdown (Continue or Stop monitoring) The system administrator can control whether the Enabler continues to monitor the Mobile Device Server for updates once the Enabler application is exited. VX6 Reference Guide 148 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Scan Config Note: Scan Config functionality is a standard option of the Wavelink Avalanche System but is not currently supported by LXE on Windows CE. Figure 3-44 Scan Config Option Display Figure 3-45 Window Display Options Update Window Display The user interface for the Enabler can be configured to dynamically change based on the status of the connection with the Mobile Device Server. At startup Half screen, Hidden or Full screen. Default is Half screen. On connect As is, Half screen, full screen, Locked full screen. Default is As is. Normal Half screen, Hidden or As is. Default is As is. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 149 Shortcuts LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function. AppLock is resident on each mobile device with a Windows OS. AppLock configuration instructions are located in Chapter 6. Figure 3-46 Application Shortcuts Configure shortcuts to other applications on the mobile device. Shortcuts are viewed and activated in the Programs panel. This limits the user’s access to certain applications when the Enabler is controlling the mobile device display. LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function. See Chapter 6 “AppLock” for instruction. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 150 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Adapters Note: LXE recommends the user review the network settings configuration utilities and the default values in Chapter 5 before setting All Adapters to Enable in the Adapters applet. Figure 3-47 Adapter Options – Network Manage Network Setting When enabled, the Enabler will control the network settings. This parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and is enabled by default. Manage Wireless Settings When enabled, the Enabler will control the wireless settings. This parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and is disabled by default. This parameter setting does not apply to Summit Clients only. Current Adapter Lists all network adapters currently installed on the mobile device. Primary Adapter Indicates if the Enabler is to attempt to configure the primary adapter (active only if there are multiple network adapters). Icon on taskbar Places the Avalanche icon in the Avalanche taskbar that may, optionally, override the standard Windows taskbar. Use Avalanche Network Profile The Enabler will apply all network settings sent to it by the Avalanche Mobility Center Console. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Avalanche Icon 151 Selecting the Avalanche Icon will access the Avalanche Network Profile tab which will display current network settings. Figure 3-48 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed Use Manual Settings When enabled, the Enabler will ignore any network or wireless settings coming from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and use only the network settings on the mobile device. Properties Icon Selecting the Properties icon displays the Manual Settings Properties dialog applet. From here, the user can configure Network, DNS and Wireless parameters using the displays shown below: Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J A reboot may be required after enabling or disabling these options. VX6 Reference Guide 152 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Network DNS Wireless Figure 3-49 Manual Settings Properties Panels VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 153 For descriptions of these Enabler parameters, refer to Chapter 5 “Wireless Network Configuration”. LXE does not recommend enabling “Manage Wireless Settings” for Summit Client devices. When you download a profile that is configured to manage network and wireless settings, the Enabler will not apply the manage network and wireless settings to the adapter unless the global Manage wireless settings and Manage network settings options are enabled on the Adapters panel (see Figure titled Adapters Options – Network). Until these options are enabled, the network and wireless settings are controlled by the third-party software associated with these settings. Status The Status panel displays the current status of the mobile device network adapter selected in the drop down box. Note the availability of the Windows standard Refresh button. When tapped, the signal strength, signal quality and link speed are refreshed for the currently selected adapter. It also searches for new adapters and may cause a slight delay to refresh the contents of the dropdown menu. Figure 3-50 Status Display Link speed indicates the speed at which the signal is being sent from the adapter to the mobile device. Speed is dependent on signal strength. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 154 eXpress Scan eXpress Scan eXpress Scan may be used for the initial network configuration of the mobile device. Available configuration parameters can include wireless network settings and the Avalanche Mobile Device Server Address. Barcodes are created with the eXpress Config utility. Please refer to Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers, available on the LXE manuals CD, for information on eXPress Config. Depending on the barcode length and the number of parameters selected, eXpress Config generates one or more barcodes for device configuration. To use eXpress Scan to configure an LXE device: 1. Start eXpress Scan on the LXE device by double clicking the eXpress Scan icon on the desktop. Figure 3-51 eXpress Scan Desktop Icon 2. Enter the barcode password used when the barcode was created, if any. Figure 3-52 eXpress Scan Password Input Click Start. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J eXpress Scan 155 3. Barcode 1 must be scanned first. The scanned data is displayed in the “Data” text box. The password, if any, entered above is compared to the password entered when the barcodes were created. Figure 3-53 Scan Barcode 1 4. If the passwords match, the barcode data is processed and the screen is updated to reflect the number of barcodes included in the set. Figure 3-54 Scan Remaining Barcodes The remaining barcodes may be scanned in any order. After a barcode is scanned, that barcode is removed from the “Remaining:” list and placed in the “Scanned:” list. 5. If the passwords do not match, an error message is displayed. The current screen can be closed using the X in the upper right corner. The password can be re-entered and Barcode 1 scanned again. 6. Once the first barcode is scanned, the remaining barcodes may be scanned in any order. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 156 eXpress Scan 7. After the last barcode is scanned, the settings are automatically applied. Figure 2-55 Configuring Settings 8. Once configured, the device is warmbooted and the new settings are active. 9. If Wavelink Avalanche is deployed and the appropriate network settings are configured, the device connects to the Mobile Device Server and any software updates and additional configuration data are downloaded. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Chapter 4 Scanner Introduction Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge parameters, enable or disable symbologies from being scanned, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports. Barcode Processing Overview Note: Steps 1-6 describe the barcode manipulation. Steps 7-11 describe how the manipulated data is built. Step 12 describes how the manipulated data is output. The complete sequence of barcode processing is as follows: 1 Scanned barcode is tested for a code ID and matching length (Min/Max). If it matches, it is processed per the rules in place for that symbology. If the scan does not meet the criteria for that symbology, it will be processed based on the settings for All. If a code ID is not found, the barcode data will be processed based on the settings for All. 2 If symbology is disabled, the scan is rejected. 3 Strip leading data bytes unconditionally. 4 Strip trailing data bytes unconditionally. 5 Parse for, and strip if found, Barcode Data strings. 6 Replace any control characters with string, as configured. 7 Add prefix string to output buffer. 8 If Code ID is *not* stripped, add saved code ID from above to output buffer. 9 Add processed barcode string from above to output buffer. 10 Add suffix string to output buffer. 11 Add a terminating NUL to the output buffer, in case the data is processed as a string. 12 If key output is enabled, start the process to output keys. If control characters are encountered: • If Translate All is set, key is translated to CTRL + char, and output. • If Translate All is not set, and key has a valid VK code, key is output. • Otherwise, key is ignored (not output). The data is ready to be read by applications. See “Barcode Processing Examples” at the end of the “Barcode Manipulation” section. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 158 Barcode Manipulation Barcode Manipulation Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner If your scanner applet has an “Advanced” tab instead of a “Barcode” tab, please see section titled “Advanced” at the end of this chapter. Factory Default Settings Main Port 1 Port 2 Power Port 1 while asleep Enable Internal Scanner Sound Send Key Messages (WEDGE) COM Ports (COM1 – COM3 3) Baud Rate Parity Stop Bits Data Bits Power on Pin 9 (+5v) Barcode Enable Code ID Symbology Settings AIM (ID) Symbol (ID) Custom Control Character Translate All Character/Replacement Custom Identifiers Name ID Code Disabled COM1 Disabled Enabled Enabled 9600 None 1 8 Enabled (COM1) Disabled (COM3) None Enable Dimmed / Min – 1 to Max – all Enable Dimmed Enable Dimmed Null Disabled Disabled NULl / Ignore(drop) Blank Blank Notes: 3 • ActiveSync will not work over a COM port if that COM port is assigned to Port 1 or Port 2 in the Scanner applet as a scanner input. For example, if COM3 is being used by the scanner, COM3 can’t be used by any other program. • After scanning a Reset All or equivalent barcode for your specific external scanner, the next step is to select Start | Control Panel | Scanner. Click the OK button and close the scanner control panel. This action synchronizes all scanner formats. • The scanner wedge does not configure an external scanner. Supported symbologies must be enabled for external scanner (see the documentation provided with the external scanner). Enabling or disabling a symbology in the scanner wedge only affects processing of the barcode data. It does not enable or disable the external scanner’s ability to scan the symbology. • LXE 8300 Tethered Scanners and Symbology Settings (AIM ID) – Before manipulating data received from an 8300 series scanner, and symbology settings are desired, the user must configure and append the Symbology ID as a prefix. See the documentation provided with the scanner for details. COM3 port is labeled “COM2/3”. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Barcode Manipulation 159 Main Tab Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Main Figure 4-1 Scanner Control / Main Tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. When Power Port 1 while asleep is checked, whichever serial port is enabled as Port 1 will remain powered while the device is in Suspend. This allows a tethered scanner to wake the device by pressing the trigger on the scanner. When Send Key Messages (WEDGE) is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the active window. When this box is not checked, the application will need to use the set of LXE Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver. Note that this latter method is significantly faster than using “Wedge”. Even if Send Key Messages is enabled (“key mode”), the data is still available using the scanner APIs (“block mode”). When using the scanner APIs, refer to the “CE API Programming Guide” and the ClearBuf setting. When two applications are reading the data using block mode, ClearBuf must be off so that the data is not erased when read. Note: The user can also open the WDG: device and perform standard OS read functions to retrieve the data without using the LXE APIs. When Enable Internal Scanner Sound is checked, it does not affect any beeps emitted by a Bluetooth or tethered scanner. In some cases, the scan of data by the external scanner triggers a good scan beep from the scanner, and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the processing routine causes a bad scan beep from the VX6 on the same data. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 160 Barcode Manipulation COM Port Tabs Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | COM1 or COM3 Do not connect a tethered scanner to the USB labeled ports: COM1 and COM3 Panel Options are Identical. Figure 4-2 Scanner Control / COM Port Tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. The COM 1 tab contains the same parameters as the COM 3 Tab. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Barcode Manipulation 161 Barcode Tab Access: Note: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner | Barcode The Barcode tab replaces the Advanced tab used in previous software revisions and adds several new features. Please contact your LXE support representative for details. The Scanner application (Wedge) can only enable or disable the processing of a barcode inside the Wedge software. The Scanner application enables or disables the Code ID that may be scanned. Enabling or disabling a specific barcode symbology is done manually using the configuration barcode in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide (available on the LXE Manuals CD and the LXE ServicePass website). Choose an option in the Enable Code ID drop-down box: None, AIM ID, Symbol ID, or Custom ID. Figure 4-3 Scanner Control / Barcode tab Buttons Symbology Settings Individually enable or disable a barcode from being scanned, set the minimum and maximum size barcode to accept, strip Code ID, strip data from the beginning or end of a barcode, or (based on configurable Barcode Data) add a prefix or suffix to a barcode before transmission. Ctrl Char Mapping Define the operations the LXE Wedge performs on control characters (values less than 0x20) embedded in barcodes. Custom Identifiers Defines an identifier that is at the beginning of barcode data which acts as a Code ID. After a Custom Identifier is defined, Symbology Settings can be defined for the identifier just like standard Code IDs. See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 162 Barcode Manipulation Enable Code ID This parameter determines the type of barcode identifier being processed. Note: Since the VX6 does not contain an internal scanner, this feature requires that the external scanner be manually configured to include the Code ID as part of the incoming barcode data. Please refer to the scanner documentation to enable the Code ID. Transmission of the Code ID is enabled at the scanner for all barcode symbologies, not for an individual symbology. Code ID is sent from the scanner so the scanner driver can discriminate between symbologies. Options None The only entry in the Symbology list is All. The barcode data is received but it is not checked for a Code ID. AIM The Symbology list is loaded with the known AIM ID symbologies for that platform, plus any configured Custom code IDs. Symbol The Symbology list is loaded with the known Symbol ID symbologies for that platform, plus any configured Custom Code IDs. Custom Does not change the scanner’s Code ID transmission setting. The Symbology list is loaded with any configured Custom Code IDs. Notes • When Strip: Code ID (see Symbology panel) is not enabled, the code ID is sent as part of the barcode data to an application. • When Strip: Code ID (see Symbology panel) is enabled, the entire custom code ID string is stripped (i.e. treated as a Code ID). • UPC/EAN Codes only: The code id for supplemental barcodes is not stripped. • When Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol, Custom Code IDs appear at the end of the list of standard Code IDs. • When Enable Code ID is set to Custom, Custom Code IDs replace the list of standard Code IDs. • When Enable Code ID is set to Custom, AIM or Symbol Code IDs must be added to the end of the Custom Code ID. For example, if a Custom Code ID ‘AAA’ is created to be read in combination with an AIM ID for Code 39 ‘]A1’, the Custom Code ID must be entered with the AIM ID code first then the Custom Code ID : ]A1AAA. • When Enable Code ID is set to None, Custom Code IDs are ignored. • Custom symbologies appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog. They are processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver. This allows custom IDs, based on actual code IDs, to be processed before the Code ID. • The tethered scanner operation cannot be controlled by the VX6 scanner application; therefore, a ‘good’ beep may be sounded from the tethered scanner even if a barcode from a tethered scanner is rejected because of the configuration specified. The VX6 emits a bad scan beep, to indicate the barcode has been rejected. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Barcode Manipulation 163 Barcode – Symbology Settings The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured. The features available on the Symbology Settings dialog include the ability to individually enable or disable a barcode from scanning, set the minimum and maximum size barcode to accept, strip Code ID, strip data from the beginning or end of a barcode, or (based on configurable Barcode Data) add a prefix or suffix to a barcode. The Symbology drop-down list contains all symbologies supported on the VX6. An asterisk appears in front of symbologies that have already been configured or have been modified from the default value. Each time a Symbology is changed, the settings are saved as soon as the OK button is tapped. Settings are also saved when a new Symbology is selected from the Symbology drop-down list. Figure 4-4 Barcode Tab – Symbology Settings Clear This button will erase any programmed overrides, returning to the default settings for the selected symbology. If Clear is pressed when All is selected as the symbology, a confirmation dialog appears, then all symbologies are reset to their factory defaults, and all star (*) indications are removed from the list of Symbologies. The order in which these settings are processed are: • Code ID • Leading / Trailing • Barcode Data Note: When Enable Code ID is set to None on the Barcode tab and when All is selected in the Symbology field, Enable and Strip Code ID on the Symbology panel are grayed and the user is not allowed to change them, to prevent deactivating the scanner completely. When All is selected in the Symbology field and the settings are changed, the settings in this dialog become the defaults, used unless overwritten by the settings for individual symbologies. This is also true for Custom IDs, where the code IDs to be stripped are specified by the user. Note: In Custom mode on the Barcode tab, any Code IDs not specified by the user will not be stripped, because they will not be recognized as code IDs. If a specific symbology’s settings have been configured, a star (*) will appear next to it in the Symbology drop-down box, so the user can tell which symbologies have been modified from their defaults. If a particular symbology has been configured, the entire set of parameters from that symbologies screen are in effect for that symbology. In other words, either the settings for the configured symbology will be used, or the default settings are used, not a combination of the two. If a symbology has not been configured (does not have an * next to it) the settings for “All” are E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 164 Barcode Manipulation used which are not necessarily the defaults. Parameters Enable This checkbox enables (checked) or disables (unchecked) the symbology field. The scanner driver searches the beginning of the barcode data for the type of ID specified in the Barcode tab – Enable Code ID field (AIM or Symbol) plus any custom identifiers. When a code ID match is found as the scanner driver processes incoming barcode data, if the symbology is disabled, the barcode is rejected. Otherwise, the other settings in the dialog are applied and the barcode is processed. If the symbology is disabled, all other fields on this dialog are grayed. When there are no customized settings, and the Enable checkbox is unchecked (All is selected and no other settings are customized) a confirmation dialog is presented to the user “You are about to disable all scan input – Is this what you want to do?”. Tap the Yes button or the No button. Tap the X button to close the dialog without making a decision. If there are customized settings, uncheck the Enable checkbox for the All symbology. This results in disabling all symbologies except the customized ones. Min This field specifies the minimum length that the barcode data (not including Code ID) must meet to be processed. Any barcode scanned that is less than the number of characters specified in the Min field is rejected. The default for this field is 1. Max This field specifies the maximum length that the barcode data (not including Code ID) can be to be processed. Any barcode scanned that has more characters than specified in the Max field is rejected. The default for this field is All. If the value entered is greater than the maximum value allowed for that symbology, the maximum valid length will be used instead. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Barcode Manipulation 165 Strip Leading/Trailing Control This group of controls determines what data is removed from the barcode before the data is buffered for the application. If all values are set, Code ID takes precedence over Leading and Trailing; Barcode Data stripping is performed last. Stripping occurs before the Prefix and Suffix are added, so does not affect them. See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter. Figure 4-5 Strip Leading/Trailing Controls If the total number being stripped is greater than the number of characters in the barcode data, it becomes a zero byte data string. If, in addition, Strip Code ID is enabled, and no prefix or suffix is configured, the processing will return a zero-byte data packet, which will be rejected. The operation of each type of stripping is defined below: Leading This strips the number of characters specified from the beginning of the barcode data (not including Code ID). The data is stripped unconditionally. This is disabled by default. Trailing This strips the number of characters specified from the end of the barcode data (not including Code ID). The data is stripped unconditionally. This is disabled by default. Code ID Strips the Code ID based on the type code id specified in the Enable Code ID field in the Barcode tab. Programmed custom identifiers are always checked (in the order they are entered) and stripped, regardless of Enable Code ID setting. By default, Code ID stripping is enabled for all symbologies (meaning code IDs will be stripped, unless specifically configured otherwise). E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 166 Barcode Manipulation Barcode Data Match List Barcode Data This panel is used to strip data that matches the entry in the Match list from the barcode. Enter the data to be stripped in the text box and tap the Insert or Add button. The entry is added to the Match list. To remove an entry from the Match list, highlight the entry in the list and tap the Remove button. Tap the OK button to store any additions, deletions or changes. Figure 4-6 Barcode Data Match List Barcode Data Edit Buttons Add Entering data into the text entry box enables the Add button. Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list. Insert Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list. The Add button changes to Insert. Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button. The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list. Edit Double tap on the item to edit. Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing. The Add button changes to Replace. When Replace is tapped, the values for the current item in the list are updated. Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected, tapping the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written (and not yet added or inserted) in the Name and ID Code text boxes. Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is selected. Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it. Line items are Removed one at a time. Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time. Notes • Prefix and Suffix data is always added on after stripping is complete, and is not affected by any stripping settings. • If the stripping configuration results in a 0 length barcode, a ‘good’ beep will still be sounded, since barcode data was read from the scanner. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Barcode Manipulation 167 Match List Rules The data in the list is processed by the rules listed below: • Strings in the list will be searched in the order they appear in the list. If the list contains ABC and AB, in that order, incoming data with ABC will match first, and the AB will have no effect. • When a match between the first characters of the barcode and a string from the list is found, that string is stripped from the barcode data. • Processing the list terminates when a match is found or when the end of the list is reached. • If the wildcard * is not specified, the string is assumed to strip from the beginning of the barcode data. The string ABC* strips off the prefix ABC. The string *XYZ will strip off the suffix XYZ. The string ABC*XYZ will strip both prefix and suffix together. More than one * in a configuration string is not allowed. (The user interface will not prevent it, but results would not be as expected, as only the first * is used in parsing to match the string.) • The question mark wildcard ? may be used to match any single character in the incoming data. For example, the data AB?D will match ABCD, ABcD, or AB0D, but not ABDE. It is valid to have more than one ? in a string to match multiple characters. • The Barcode Data is saved per symbology configured. The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured. • Note that the Code ID (if any are configured) is ignored by this dialog, regardless of the setting of Strip: Code ID in the Symbologies dialog. If Strip Code ID is disabled, then the barcode data to match must include the Code ID. If Strip Code ID is enabled, the data should not include the Code ID since it has already been stripped. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 168 Barcode Manipulation Add Prefix/Suffix Control See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter. Figure 4-7 Add Prefix/Suffix Controls Use this option to specify a string of text, hex values or hat encoded values to be added to the beginning (prefix) or the end (suffix) of the barcode data. Up to 19 characters can be included in the string. The string can include any character from the keyboard plus characters specified by hex equivalent or entering in hat encoding. Please see the “Hat Encoding” section in Appendix B for a list of characters with their hex and hat-encoded values. Using the Escape function allows entering of literal hex and hat values. Add Prefix To enable a prefix, check the Prefix checkbox and enter the desired string in the textbox. The default is disabled (unchecked) with a blank text string. When barcode data is processed, the Prefix string is sent to the output buffer before any other data. Because all stripping operations have already occurred, stripping settings do not affect the prefix. The prefix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pulldown list. If ‘All’ is selected, the prefix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured. Add Suffix To enable a suffix, check the Suffix checkbox and enter the desired string in the textbox. The default is disabled (unchecked) with a blank text string. When barcode data is processed, the Suffix string is sent to the output buffer after the barcode data. Because all stripping operations have already occurred, stripping settings do not affect the suffix. The suffix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pulldown list. If ‘All’ is selected, the suffix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured. See “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” in Appendix B “Technical Specifications”. Note: VX6 Reference Guide Non-ASCII equivalent keys in Key Message mode are unavailable in this option. NonASCII equivalent keys include the function keys (e.g. ), arrow keys, Page up, Page down, Home, and End. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Barcode Manipulation 169 Barcode – Ctrl Char Mapping See Also: Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter. The Ctrl Char Mapping button activates a dialog to define the operations the LXE Wedge performs on control characters (values less than 0x20) embedded in barcodes. Control characters can be replaced with user-defined text which can include hat encoded or hex encoded values. In key message mode, control characters can also be translated to their control code equivalent key sequences. Figure 4-8 Barcode Tab – Ctrl Char Mapping See “Hat Encoding” and “Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart” at the end of Appendix B “Technical Specifications”. Translate All When Translate All is checked, unprintable ASCII characters (characters below 20H) in scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are sent in Character mode. The wedge provides a one-to-one mapping of control characters to their equivalent control+character sequence of keystrokes. If control characters are translated, the translation is performed on the barcode data, prefix, and suffix before the keystrokes are simulated. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Translate All This option is grayed unless the user has Key Message mode (on the Main tab) selected. In Key Message mode, when this option is enabled, control characters embedded in a scanned barcode are translated to their equivalent ‘control’ key keystroke sequence (13 [0x0d] is translated to Control+M keystrokes as if the user pressed the CTRL, SHIFT, and m keys on the keypad). Additionally, when Translate All is disabled, any control code which has a keystroke equivalent (enter, tab, escape, backspace, etc.) is output as a keystroke. Any control code without a keystroke equivalent is dropped. Character This is a drop down combo box that contains the control character name. Refer to the Character drop down box for the list of control characters and their names. When a character name is selected from the drop down box, the default text Ignore (drop) is shown and highlighted in the Replacement edit control. Ignore (drop) is highlighted so the user can type a replacement if the control character is not being ignored. Once the user types any character into the Replacement edit control, reselecting the character from the Character drop down box redisplays the default Ignore (drop) in the Replacement edit control. VX6 Reference Guide 170 Barcode Manipulation Replacement The edit control where the user types the characters to be assigned as the replacement of the control character. Replacements for a control character are assigned by selecting the appropriate character from the Character drop down box, typing the replacement in the Replacement edit control (according to the formats defined above) and then selecting Assign. The assigned replacement is then added to the list box above the Assign button. For example, if ‘Carriage Return’ is replaced by Line Feed (by specifying ‘^J’ or ‘0x0A’) in the configuration, the value 0x0d received in any scanned barcode (or defined in the prefix or suffix) will be replaced with the value 0x0a. The Wedge then sends Ctrl+J to the receiving application, rather than Ctrl+M. List Box The list box shows all user-defined control characters and their assigned replacements. All replacements are enclosed in single quotes to delimit white space that has been assigned. Delete This button is grayed unless an entry in the list box is highlighted. When an entry (or entries) is highlighted, and Delete is selected, the highlighted material is deleted from the list box. Barcode – Custom Identifiers Code IDs can be defined by the user. This allows processing parameters to be configured for barcodes that do not use the standard AIM or Symbol IDs or for barcodes that have data embedded at the beginning of the data that acts like a Code ID. These are called “custom” Code IDs and are included in the Symbology drop down box in the Symbology dialog, unless Enable Code ID is set to None. When the custom Code ID is found in a barcode, the configuration specified for the custom Code ID is applied to the barcode data. The dialog below allows the custom Code IDs to be configured. It is intended that custom code IDs are used to supplement the list of standard code IDs (if Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol), or to replace the list of standard code IDs (if Enable Code ID is set to Custom). When Enable Code ID is set to None, custom code IDs are ignored. Note: Custom symbologies will appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog, and are processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver itself. This allows custom IDs based on actual code IDs to be processed before the code ID itself. Note: When Strip: Code ID is enabled, the entire custom Code ID string is stripped (i.e., treated as a Code ID). VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Barcode Manipulation 171 Figure 4-9 Barcode Tab – Custom Identifiers After adding, changing and removing items from the Custom IDs list, tap the OK button to save changes and return to the Barcode panel. Parameters Name text box Name is the descriptor that is used to identify the custom Code ID. Names must be unique from each other; however, the Name and ID Code may have the same value. Name is used in the Symbology drop down box to identify the custom Code ID in a user-friendly manner. Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list. ID Code text box ID Code defines the data at the beginning of a barcode that acts as an identifier (the actual Code ID). Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list. Buttons Add Entering data into both the Name and ID Code fields enables the Add button. Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custon ID list. Insert Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list. The Add button changes to Insert. Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button. The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list. Edit Double tap on the item to edit. Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing. The Add button changes to Replace. When Replace is tapped, the values for the current item in the list are updated. Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected, tapping the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written (and not yet added or inserted) in the Name and ID Code text boxes. Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is selected. Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it. Line items are Removed one at a time. Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 172 Barcode Manipulation Control Code Replacement Examples Configuration data Ignore(drop) Printable text Hat-encoded text Escaped hatencoded text Hex-encoded text Escaped hexencoded text VX6 Reference Guide Translation The control character is discarded from the barcode data, prefix and suffix Text is substituted for Control Character. The hat-encoded text is translated to the equivalent hex value. The hatencoding to pass thru to the application. The hexencoded text is translated to the equivalent hex value. The hexencoding to pass thru to the application. Example Control Character ESCape ‘Ignore (drop)’ 0x1B in the barcode is discarded. Start of TeXt ‘STX’ Carriage Return ‘^M’ Horizontal Tab ‘\^I’ Carriage Return ‘0x0A’ 0x02 in a barcode is converted to the text ‘STX’. Value 0x0d in a barcode is converted to the value 0x0d. Value 0x09 in a barcode is converted to the text ‘^I’. Value 0x0D in a barcode is converted to a value 0x0A. Vertical Tab ‘\0x0A’ or ‘0\x0A’ Example configuration Translated data Value 0x0C is a barcode is converted to text ‘0x0A’ E-EQ-VX6RG-J Barcode Manipulation 173 Barcode Processing Examples The following table shows examples of stripping and prefix/suffix configurations. The examples assume that the scanner is configured to transmit an AIM identifier. Symbology All EAN-128 (]C1) EAN-13 (]E0) Intrlv 2 of 5 (]IO) Code93 Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Min length 1 4 1 1 Max length all all all 10 Strip Code ID Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Strip Leading 3 0 3 3 ‘*123’ ‘1*’ ‘456’ 0 0 3 3 Prefix ‘aaa’ ‘bbb’ ‘ccc’ ‘ddd’ Suffix ‘www’ ‘xxx’ ‘yyy’ ‘zzz’ Enable Strip Barcode Data Strip Trailing Provided that the wedge is configured with the above table, below are examples of scanned barcode data and results of these manipulations. Barcode Symbology Raw Scanner Data Resulting Data EAN-128 ]C11234567890123 bbb1234567890xxx EAN-128 ]C111234567890123 bbb11234567890xxx EAN-128 ]C1123 EAN-13 ]E01234567890987 ccc]E04567890yyy EAN-13 ]E01231234567890987 ccc]E0234567890yyy EAN-13 ]E01234 ccc]E0yyy I2/5 ]I04444567890987654321 I2/5 ]I04444567890123 ddd7890zzz I2/5 ]I0444 dddzzz I2/5 ]I022245622 ddd45zzz Code-93 ]G0123456 < rejected > (disabled) Code-93 ]G0444444 < rejected > (disabled) Code-39 ]A01234567890 aaa4567890www Code-39 full ASCII ]A41231234567890 aaa1234567890www Code-39 ]A4 < rejected > (too short) < rejected > (too long) < rejected > (too short) Rejected barcodes generate a bad scan beep. In some cases, the receipt of data from the scanner triggers a good scan beep (from the external scanner), and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the processing causes a bad scan beep on the same data. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 174 Length Based Barcode Stripping Length Based Barcode Stripping Use this procedure to create symbology rules for two barcodes with the same symbology but with different discrete lengths. This procedure is not applicable for barcodes with variable lengths (falling between a maximum value and a minimum value). Example 1: • A normal AIM or Symbol symbology role can be created for the desired barcode ID. • Next, a custom barcode symbology must be created using the same Code ID as the original AIM or Symbol ID rule and each rule would have unique length settings. Example 2: For the purposes of this example, the following sample barcode parameters will be used – EAN128 and Code128 barcodes. Some of the barcodes start with ‘00’ and some start with ‘01’. The barcodes are different lengths. • 34 character length with first two characters = “01” (strip first 2 and last 18) • 26 character length with first two characters = “01” (strip first 2 and last 10) • 24 character length with first two characters = “01” (strip first 2 and last 8). This 24 character barcode is CODE128. • 20 character length with first two characters = “00” (strip first 0 (no characters) and last 4) On the Barcode tab, set Enable Code ID to AIM. Create four custom IDs, using 1 for EAN128 barcode and 0 for Code128 barcode. • • • • c1 = Code = ‘]C1’ c2 = Code = ‘]C1’ c3 = Code = ‘]C0’ (24 character barcode is CODE128) c4 = Code = ‘]C1’ Figure 4-10 AIM Custom IDs AIM custom symbology setup is assigned in the following manner: • c1 min length = 34, max length = 34, strip leading 2, strip trailing 18, Code ID enabled, Barcode Data = “01” • c2 min length = 26, max length = 26, strip leading 2, strip trailing 10, Code ID enabled, Barcode Data = “01” VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Length Based Barcode Stripping 175 • c3 min length = 24, max length = 24, strip leading 2, strip trailing 8, Code ID enabled, Barcode Data = “01” • c4 min length = 20, max length = 20, strip leading 0, strip trailing 4, Code ID enabled, Barcode Data = “00” Add the AIM custom symbologies. Refer to the previous section Barcode – Symbology Settings for instruction. Figure 4-11 AIM Custom Setup for C1 Click the Barcode Data button. Click the Add button. Add the data for the match codes. Figure 4-12 Barcode Match Data for C1 Refer to the previous section BarcodeData Match List for instruction. Scan a barcode and examine the result. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 176 Screen Blanking Screen Blanking The VX6 can be configured to blank the display when the vehicle to which it is mounted is moving, eliminating a possible distraction for the driver. When configured properly, the screen blanking feature provides a tamper resistant method to blank the vehicle screen. The screen blanking feature consists of Scanner Control Panel Options and a customer supplied cable connected to one of the COM ports on the VX6. Properly configured, the display is visible only when the cable provides a signal that the vehicle has stopped. The customer must supply their own cable. The cable specifications are detail in “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable” in Chapter 2, Physical Description and Layout”. The cable can be hooked to either the COM1 or COM3 port. The COM port used must be selected in the Scanner control panel. Screen blanking is configured on the Main tab of the Scanner control panel. Figure 4-13 Enable Screen Blanking S Warning ! If the COM1/COM3 screen blanking and On Delay choices are not shown, the system load must be updated. Do not select COM1 ScrCtl or COM3 ScrCtl unless you have already attached the cable described in “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable” in Chapter 2, Physical Description and Layout”. Failure to attach the cable before selecting a screen blanking option will cause the screen to go blank (and remain blank) until an appropriate cable is attached to the specified COM port. Set the desired COM port (COM1 ScrCtl or COM3 ScrCtl) and On Delay. Press OK. The On Delay can be used to specify the time (in milliseconds) before the display turns on. For example, use the On Delay if the switch end of the cable is attached to the vehicle’s accelerator pedal. Release of the accelerator may mean the truck is coasting to a stop rather than stationary. Configure the delay to allow time for the vehicle to coast to a stop. To disable screen blanking, select COM1 or COM3 to return the selected COM port to normal operation. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Screen Blanking 177 Operation To prevent a general user from disabling the screen blanking feature, at least one of the two following actions must be taken: • Password protection can be set via the Password icon in the Windows Control Panel. Without this password, general users are unable to access the Control Panel to disable the screen blanking feature. For more information on the Password feature, please refer “Password”, earlier in this chapter. • AppLock can be used to restrict the general user’s access to only certain programs. Since the user under AppLock cannot access the Control Panel, the user cannot disable the screen blanking feature. For more information on AppLock, please refer to Chapter 6, “AppLock”. Operation of the VX6 is unchanged except for the blank display. The keypad and touchscreen are still enabled, however any input from they keypad, touchscreen or other device DOES NOT wake up the display. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 178 Screen Blanking VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Introduction The VX6 computer may have a Summit, Cisco or Symbol radio. The Summit radio is either an 802.11b/g radio or an 802.11a/b/g radio. The Cisco and Symbol radios are 802.11b radios. The radio can be configured for no encryption, WEP encryption or WPA security (N/A with Symbol radio). Certificates are necessary for many of the WPA authentications. Please refer to the “Certificates” section at the end of this chapter for more information on generating and installing certificates. Please refer to the table below for the security options supported for each radio type. Security Options Supported Radio Type Summit 802.11b/g Summit 802.11a/b/g Cisco Symbol None Yes Yes Yes Yes WEP Yes Yes Yes Yes LEAP Yes Yes Yes Yes WPA-PSK Yes Yes Yes No WPA/LEAP Yes Yes Yes No PEAP-MSCHAP Yes Yes Yes No PEAP-GTC Yes Yes Yes No EAP-TLS Yes Yes No No EAP-FAST Yes Yes No No Radio Availability The Summit 802.11a/b/g radio is available only with Windows CE 5.0. The Summit 802.11b/g radio is available with Windows CE .NET or CE 5.0. The Cisco radio is available only with Windows CE .NET. The Symbol radio is available only with Windows CE .NET. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J The Cisco and Summit radios are obsolete. Information on these radios is provided as a courtesy to LXE’s customer. VX6 Reference Guide 180 Summit Radio Summit Radio The Summit radio requires software revision 2BT or greater. All VX6’s with a Summit radio ship with this software revision or greater. To identify the software revision, please click on the “About” icon in the Windows CE Control Panel. S Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for VX6 communication. It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. It may be necessary to upgrade radio drivers to in order to use certain Summit Client Utility (SCU) features described in this chapter. Please contact your LXE representative for details. ! There are two Summit radios offered in the VX6: • an 802.11g radio, capable of both 802.11b and 802.11g data rates. • an 802.11a radio, capable of 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g data rates These radios support no encryption, WEP, LEAP or WPA (PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC, WPA/LEAP, EAP-TLS, EAP-FAST and WPA-PSK). ! VX6 Reference Guide When using the 802.11a radio, the U-NII 1 band is the preferred band for indoor operation. For regulatory domains in which the U-NII 3 band is allowed, the following channels are supported: 149, 157 and 161. The AP must be configured accordingly. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 181 Summit Client Utility Note: When making changes to profile or global parameters, the VX6 should be warmbooted afterwards. Access: Start | Programs | Summit | SCU or Summit Icon on Desktop or Summit Tray Icon (if present) or Wi-Fi icon in the Windows CE Control Panel (if present) Figure 5-1 Summit Client Utility The Main tab provides information, admin login and active profile selection. Profile specific parameters are found on the Profile tab. The parameters on this tab can be set to unique values for each profile. This tab was labeled Config in early versions of the SCU. The Status tab contains information on the current connection. The Diags tab provides utilities to troubleshoot the radio. Global parameters are found on the Global tab. The values for these parameters apply to all profiles. This tab was labeled Global Settings in early versions of the SCU. Help Help is available by clicking the ? icon in the title bar on most SCU screens. The SCU help may also be accessed by selecting Start | Help and tapping the Summit Client Utility link. The SCU does not have to be accessed to view the help information using this option. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 182 Summit Radio Summit Tray Icon The Summit tray icon provides access to the SCU and a visual indicator of radio status. The Summit tray icon is displayed when: • The Summit radio is installed and active • The Windows Zero Config utility is not active • The Tray Icon setting is On Click the icon to launch the SCU. Use the tray icon to view the radio status: The radio is not currently associated or authenticated to an Access Point The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is -80 dBm or weaker The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is stronger than -80dBm but not stronger than -60 dBm The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is stronger than -60 dBm but not stronger than -40 dBm The signal strength for the currently associated/authenticated Access Point is stronger than -40 dBm Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Radio • The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them, indicating that Wireless Zero Config application is enabled but the connection is inactive at this time (the VX6 is not connected to a network). • You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network. LXE recommends using the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network. The Wireless Zero Configuration Utility cannot control the complete set of security features of the radio. Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Profile drop down list as the active profile. Warmboot the VX6. The Summit Client Utility passes control to Wireless Zero Config and the WZC Wireless Information control panel. Using the options in the Wireless Zero Config panels, setup radio and security settings. To switch back to the SCU, select any other profile in the SCU Active Config drop down list, except ThirdPartyConfig. Warmboot the VX6. Radio control is passed to the SCU. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 183 Main Tab Figure 5-2 SCU – Main Tab The Main tab displays information about the radio including: • Active Profile – Select from the profiles created using the Config tab. • Status of the radio (Down, Associated, Authenticated, etc). • Radio Type (BG is 802.11b/g radio, ABG is 802.11a/b/g radio) • Auto Profile option • Regulatory Domain • Driver version • SCU (Summit Client Utility) version • Copyright Info may be accessed by clicking the About SCU button The Disable Radio button can be used to disable the radio card. Once disabled, the button label changes to Enable Radio. By default, the radio is enabled. The Admin Login button provides access to editing radio parameters as well as adding, renaming and deleting profiles. Profile and Global parameters may only be edited after entering the Admin Login password. The Active Config may be changed without logging in. Once logged in, the button label changes to Admin Logout. The admin is also automatically logged out when the SCU is exited. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 184 Summit Radio Admin Login To login to Admin mode, click the Admin login button. Figure 5-3 Admin Password Entry Enter the Admin password and press OK. If the password is incorrect, an error message is displayed. The default password is SUMMIT. Note: The password is case sensitive! The Admin password can be changed on the Global tab. The end user can: • Turn radio On/Off on the Main tab • Select active Profile on the Main tab • View the current parameter settings for the profiles on the Profile tab • View the global parameter settings on the Global tab. • View the current connection details on the Status tab • View the radio status, software versions and regulatory domain on the Main tab • Access additional troubleshooting features on the Diags tab. After Admin login, the use can also: VX6 Reference Guide • Create, edit, rename and delete profiles on the Profile tab • Edit global parameters on the Global tab. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 185 Auto Profile Auto Profile allows the user to configure a list of profiles that the SCU can search when a radio connection is lost. After using the Profile tab to create any desired profiles, return to the Main tab. To specify which profiles are to be included in Auto Profile, click the List button. Figure 5-4 Select Profiles for Auto Profile The Auto Profile selection screen displays all currently configured profiles. Click on the checkbox for any profiles that are to be included in Auto Profile selection then click OK to save. To enable Auto Profile, click the On button on the Main tab. When Auto Profile is On, if the radio goes out of range from the currently selected profile, the radio then begins to attempt to connect to the profiles listed under Auto Profile. The search continues until: E-EQ-VX6RG-J • the SCU connects to and, if necessary, authenticates with, one of the specified profiles or • until the Off button is clicked to turn off Auto Profile. VX6 Reference Guide 186 Summit Radio Profile Tab Notes: If the Admin password is not entered, the user can view the Profile parameter settings but cannot make any changes. The buttons on this tab are grayed out if the user is not logged in. The Profile tab was previously labeled Config. Figure 5-5 SCU – Profile Tab When logged in as an Admin (see the Main tab), use the Profile tab to manage profiles: • Rename – Gives the profile a new, unique name. If the new name is not unique, an error message is displayed and the profile is not renamed. • Delete – Deletes the profile. The current active profile cannot be deleted. In that case, an error message is displayed and the profile is not deleted. • New – Creates a new profile with the default settings (see the list below) and prompts for a name. The name must be unique. If not, an error message is displayed and the profile is not created. • Scan – Scans for and displays a list of available APs. Can be used to create a profile from the APs listed. • Commit – Ensures that the profile settings made on this screen are saved in the profile. When not logged in, the parameters can be viewed, but cannot be changed. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 187 Using the Scan Feature Clicking the Scan button opens a pop up window displaying any APs found during the scan. Figure 5-6 Scan The scan displays information on the available APs: • SSID – Lists the SSID of the network • RSSI – Displays the Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) of the AP. • Secure – Displays True if the data encryption is used by the AP, false is data encryption is not used. Notes: The APs can be sorted by clicking on any of the column headings. If there is more than one AP with the same SSID, the listing displays the AP with the strongest signal and least security. If you are logged in as an administrator, you can use the Connect button to create a new profile. The button is grayed out is an administrator is not logged in. • Highlight the desired network in the listing and click the Connect button. • The new profile is named based on the SSID of the selected AP. If a profile already exists with that name, the new profile name contains an incremental number to avoid duplicate names. • The SSID parameter is assigned the value of the SSID of the AP. Other profile entries must be completed manually. Click the Refresh button to update the display. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 188 Summit Radio Parameters IMPORTANT – Remember to click the Commit button after making changes to ensure the changes are saved. Newer versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt it made to close or browse away from the Config tab if there are unsaved changes. Config A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters, name of the Profile Default: Default SSID A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters, the Service Set Identifier (SSID) of the WLAN to which the radio connects Default: Blank Client Name A string of up to 16 characters – Name assigned to the radio and the device using the radio. The client name may be passed to networking radio devices, e.g. Access Points. Default: Blank Power Save Power save mode. Options: CAM = Constantly Awake Mode, power save off Maximum = Maximum power saving mode Fast = Fast power saving mode Default: Fast Tx Power Desired transmit power. Options: Maximum = Max power for current regulatory domain 50, 30, 20, 10, 5 or 1 mW Default: Maximum Bit Rate Options: Auto = Rate negotiated automatically with the AP 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 or 54 Mbit Default: Auto VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 189 Radio Mode Specify 802.11a, 802.11b and/or 802.11g rates when communicating with AP. The options displayed for this parameter depend on the type of radio (802.11b/g or 802.11a/b/g) installed in the mobile device. Options: B rates only (1, 2, 5.5 and 11 Mbps) BG Rates Full (All B and G rates) G rates only (6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps) BG optimized or BG subset (1, 2, 5.5, 6, 11, 24, 36 and 54 Mbps)) A rates only (6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48 and 54 Mbps) ABG Rates Full (All A rates and all B and G rates with A rates preferred) BGA Rates Full (All B and G rates and all A rates with B and G rates preferred) Ad Hoc Default: BG Rates Full (for 802.11b/g radio) BGA Rates Full (for 802.11a/b/g radio) Note: For the802.11 b/g radio, some SCU versions may have the default set as BG Optimized rather than BG Rates Full. It is important this parameter correspond to the AP to which the device is to connect. For example, if this parameter is set to G rates only the LXE device may only connect to APs set for G rates and not those set for B and G rates. The options for this parameter should be set as follows: Antenna Configuration Radio Mode A Main and BG Main ABG Rates Full BGA Rates Full A Main and A Aux A Rates Only BG Main and BG Aux B Rates Only G Rates Only BG Rates Full BG Subset A Main only A Rates Only BG Main only B Rates Only G Rates Only BG Rates Full BG Rates Subset Please contact your LXE representative if you have questions about the antenna(s) installed on your VX6. Infrastructure Mode vs. Ad Hoc Mode E-EQ-VX6RG-J • When any of the options except Ad Hoc are selected, the radio is in Infrastructure Mode, meaning the radio attempts to associate with an AP. • When Ad Hoc mode is selected, the radio attempts to connect to another client radio. Both client radios must be in Ad Hoc mode and have the same SSID specified. VX6 Reference Guide 190 Summit Radio Auth Type 802.11 authentication type used when associating with AP Options: Open Shared key LEAP Default: Open Note: Set the Auth Type radio parameter is set to “Open” for all configurations unless using LEAP (not WPA) and the AP is configured for network EAP only. In this case, set the Auth Type radio parameter to “LEAP”. EAP Type Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) type used for 802.1x authentication to AP Options: None LEAP EAP-FAST PEAP-MSCHAP PEAP-GTC EAP-TLS Default: None Note: The EAP type chosen determines if the Credentials button is active. Available entries on the Credentials pop up window vary by EAP type chosen. Security Type of encryption used to protect transmitted data. This parameter was labeled as Encryption in some versions of the SCU. Options: None Manual WEP Auto WEP WPA PSK WPA TKIP WPA2 PSK WPA2 AES CCKM TKIP CKIP Manual CKIP Auto Default: None Note: The Encryption type chosen determines if the WEP/PSK Keys button is active. Available entries on the pop up window vary by encryption type chosen. IMPORTANT – The settings for Auth Type, EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security type chosen. Please refer to “Summit Wireless Security”, later in this chapter, to determine the proper settings for the security type implemented on the wireless LAN. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 191 Status Tab Figure 5-7 SCU – Status Tab This screen provides information on the radio: • The profile being used • The status of the radio card (down, associated, authenticated, etc.) • Client information including device name, IP address and MAC address. • Information about the Access Point (AP) maintaining the connection to the network including AP name, IP address and MAC address. • Channel currently being used for wireless traffic • Bit rate in Mbit. • Current transmit power in mW • Beacon period – the time between AP beacons in kilomircoseconds. (one kilomicrosecond = 1,024 microseconds) • DTIM interval – A multiple of the beacon period that specifies how often the beacon contains a delivery traffic indication message (DTIM). The DTIM tells power saving devices a packet is waiting for them. For example, if DTIM = 3, then every third beacon contains a DTIM. • Signal strength (RSSI) displayed in dBm and graphically • Signal quality, a measure of the clarity of the signal displayed in percentage and graphically. There are no user entries on this screen. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J After completing radio configuration, it is a good idea to review this screen to verify the radio has associated (no encryption, WEP) or authenticated (LEAP, any WPA), as indicated above. VX6 Reference Guide 192 Summit Radio Diags Tab Figure 5-8 SCU – Diags Tab The Diags screen can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and radio connectivity issues. VX6 Reference Guide • (Re)connect – Use this button to apply (or reapply) the current profile and attempt to associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN. All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box on the lower part of the screen. • Release/Renew – Obtain a new IP address through release and renew. All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box. If a fixed IP address has been assigned to the radio, this is also noted in the Diagnostic Output box. Note that the current IP address is displayed above this button. • Start Ping – Start a continuous ping to the IP address specified in the text box to the right of this button. Once the button is clicked, the ping begins and the button label changes to Stop Ping. Clicking the button ends the ping. The ping also ends when any other button on this screen is clicked or the user browses away from the Diags tab. The results of the ping are displayed in the Diagnostic Output box. • Diagnostics – Also attempts to (re)connect to the wireless LAN. However, this option provides more data in the Diagnostic Output box than the (Re)connect option. This data dump includes radio state, profile settings, global settings, and a list of broadcast SSID APs. • Save To… – Use this save the results of the diagnostics to a text file. Use the explorer window to specify the name and location for the diagnostic file. The text file can viewed using an application such as WordPad. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 193 Global Tab Note: The Global tab was previously labeled Global Settings. The parameters on the global settings tab can be changed when an Admin is logged on. Without the admin login, the current values for the parameters can be viewed, but they cannot be edited. Figure 5-9 SCU – Global Tab Parameters IMPORTANT – Remember to click the Commit button after making changes to ensure the changes are saved. Many versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt it made to close or browse away from the Global tab if there are unsaved changes. Note: Custom parameter options: Some parameters contain an option for custom. The parameter’s value is displayed as “Custom” when the operating system registry has been used to set the parameter to a value not available from the Global settings parameter options. Selecting Custom for a parameter has no effect as the parameter value returns to the previously selected value when you press Commit. Roam Trigger If signal strength is less than this trigger value, the radio looks for a different AP with a stronger signal. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Options: -50, -55, -60, -65, -70, -75 dBm, Custom (see Note above) Default: -65 dBm VX6 Reference Guide 194 Summit Radio Roam Delta Amount by which the new AP’s signal strength must exceed the current AP’s signal strength before roaming is attempted. Options: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 dBm, Custom (see Note above) Default: 10 dBm (for 802.11b/g radio) 5 dBm (for 802.11a/b/g radio) Roam Period The amount of time, after association or a roam scan with no roam, that the radio collects Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) scan data before a roaming decision is made. Options: 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60 sec, Custom (see Note above) Default: 10 seconds (for 802.11b/g radio) 5 seconds (for 802.11a/b/g radio) BG Channel Set Defines the 2.4GHz channels to be scanned for an AP when the radio is contemplating roaming. By specifying the channels to search roaming time may be reduced over scanning all channels. Options: Full (all channels) 1, 6, 11 (the most commonly used channels) 1, 7, 13 (For ETSI and TELEC radios only) Custom (see Note above) Default: Full DFS Channels Not currently supported. Support for 5GHz 802.11a channels where support for DFS is required. Options: On, Off Default: Off Aggressive Scan When set to On and the current connection to an AP becomes weak, the radio scans for available APs more aggressively. Aggressive scanning work with standard scanning (set through Roam Trigger, Roam Delta and Roam Period). Aggressive scanning should b set to On unless there is significant co-channel interference because of overlapping APs on the same channel. Options: On, Off Default: On VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 195 CCX Features Use of Cisco Compatible Extensions (CCX) radio management and AP specified maximum transmit power features. Options: Full or On (Use Cisco IE and CCX version number, support all CCX features) Optimized (Use Cisco IE and CCX version number, support all CCX features except AP assisted roaming, AP specified max. transmit power and radio management) Off (Do not use Cisco IE and CCX version) Default: Off (for 802.11b/g radio) Optimized (for 802.11a/b/g radio) WMM Use of Wi-Fi Multimedia extensions. Options: On, Off Default: Off Auth Server Specifies the type of authentication server. Options: Type 1 (ACS server) Type 2 (non-ACS server) Default: Type 1 TX Diversity How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to AP. Options: Main only = Main antenna only Aux only = Aux antenna only On = Use diversity Default: On (for 802.11b/g radio) Main Only (for 802.11a/b/g radio) The value for this parameter should be set as follows: Antenna Configuration TX Diversity A Main and BG Main Main Only A Main and A Aux On BG Main and BG Aux On A Main only Main Only BG Main only Main Only Please contact your LXE representative if you have questions about the antenna(s) installed on your VX6. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 196 Summit Radio RX Diversity How to handle antennas diversity when receiving packets from AP. Options: Main Only = use main antenna only Aux Only = use aux. antenna only On-start on Main = On startup use main antenna On-start on Aux = On startup use aux antenna Default: On-start on Main (for 802.11b/g radio) Main only (for 802.11a/b/g radio) The value for this parameter should be set as follows: Antenna Configuration RX Diversity A Main and BG Main Main Only A Main and A Aux On Start On Main BG Main and BG Aux On Start On Main A Main only Main Only BG Main only Main Only Please contact your LXE representative if you have questions about the antenna(s) installed on your VX6. Frag Thresh If the packet size (in bytes) exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the fragment threshold, the packet is fragmented (sent as several pieces instead of as one block). Use a low setting in areas where communication is poor or where there is a great deal of radio interference. Options: 256 to 2346 Default: 2346 RTS Thresh If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the Request to Send (RTS) threshold, an RTS is sent before sending the packet. A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in areas where many client devices are associating with the Access Point. Options: 0 to 2347 Default: 2347 LED The LED on the radio card is not visible to the user when the radio card is installed in a sealed mobile device. Options: On, Off Default: Off VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 197 Tray Icon Determines if the Summit icon is displayed in the system tray. Options: On, Off Default: On Hide Password If On, the Summit Client Utility masks passwords as they are typed and when they are viewed. Options: On, Off Default: Depends on SCU revision Admin Password A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must be entered when the Admin Login button is tapped. If Hide Password is On, the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry text box. The password is Case Sensitive. Default: Note: SUMMIT Password is case sensitive. Auth Timeout Specifies the number of seconds the Summit software waits for an EAP authentication request to succeed or fail. If the authentication credentials are stored in the active profile and the authentication times out, the association fails. No error message or prompting for corrected credentials is displayed. If the authentication credentials are not stored in the active profile and the authentication times out, the user is again prompted to enter the credentials. Options: An integer from 3 to 60 Default: 8 Certs Path A valid directory path, of up to 64 characters, where Root CA certificates for EAP authentication (PEAP/MSCHAP, PEAP/GTC, EAP-TLS) and manual PACs for EAP-TLS are stored. The Windows certificate store can also be used to store Root CA certificates. User certificates (EAP-TLS) must be stored in the Windows certificate store. LXE suggests ensuring the directory path currently exists before assigning the path in this parameter. For example, if the certificate is stored in My Computer/System/mycertificate.cer, enter System in the Certs Path text box as the directory path. Default: System Ping Payload Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Options: 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024 bytes Default: 32 VX6 Reference Guide 198 Summit Radio Ping Timeout ms The amount of time, in milliseconds, that a device will be continuously pinged. The Stop Ping button can be tapped to end the ping process ahead of the ping timeout. Options: 0 to 30,000 ms Default: 5000 Ping Delay ms The amount of time, specified in milliseconds, between each ping. Options: 0 to 30,000 ms Default: 1000 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 199 Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials When using wireless security that requires a user name and password to be entered, the Summit Client Utility offers two choices: • The Username and Password may be entered on the Credentials screen. If this method is selected, anyone using the device can access the network. • The Username and Password are left blank on the Credentials screen. When the device attempts to connect to the network, a sign on screen is displayed. The user must enter the Username and Password at that time to authenticate. How to: Use Stored Credentials 1. After completing the other entries in the profile, click on the Credentials button. 2. Enter the Username and Password on the Credentials screen and click the OK button. 3. Click the Commit button. 4. For LEAP and WPA/LEAP, configuration is complete. 5. For PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC and EAP-TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. 6. For EAP-TLS, also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store. 7. Access the Credentials screen again. Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked. 8. The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate. Alternatively, use the Browse button next to the CA Cert (CA Certificate Filename) on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate. 9. For EAP-TLS, also enter the User Cert (User Certificate filename) on the credentials screen by using the Browse button. 10. Click the OK button then the Commit button. 11. Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is property configured, the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used. Notes: More details are provided in the appropriate Summit Wireless Security section following in this chapter. If invalid credentials are entered into the stored credentials, the authentication will fail. No error message is displayed and the user is not prompted to enter valid credentials. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 200 Summit Radio How to: Use Sign On Screen 1. After completing the other entries in the profile, click on the Credentials button. Leave the Username and Password blank. No entries are necessary on the Credentials screen for LEAP or WPA/LEAP. 2. For PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC and EAP-TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. 3. For EAP-TLS, also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store. 4. Access the Credentials screen again. Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked. 5. The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate. Alternatively, use the Browse button next to the CA Cert (CA Certificate Filename) on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate. 6. For EAP-TLS, also enter the User Cert (User Certificate filename) on the credentials screen by using the Browse button. 7. Click the OK button then the Commit button. 8. When the device attempts to connect to the network, a sign-on screen is displayed. 9. Enter the Username and Password. Click the OK button. Figure 5-10 Sign-On Screen 10. Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab. When the device is property configured, the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used. 11. The sign-on screen is displayed after a reboot for each of the listed protocols. Note: Complete details are provided in the appropriate Summit Wireless Security section following in this chapter. If a user enters invalid credentials and clicks OK, the device associates but does not authenticate. The user is again prompted to enter credentials. If the user clicks the Cancel button, the device does not associate. The user is not prompted again for credentials until the device is rebooted, the radio is disabled then enabled, the Reconnect button on the Diags tag is clicked or the profile is modified and the Commit button is clicked. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 201 Windows Certificate Store vs. Certs Path User Certificates EAP-TLS authentication requires a user certificate. The user certificate must be stored in the Windows certificate store. • To generate the user certificate, follow the instructions in “Generating a User Certificate for the Mobile Device”, later in this chapter. • Import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store by following the instructions in “Installing a User Certificate on the Mobile Device”, later in this chapter. • A Root CA certificate is also needed for EAP-TLS. Refer to the section below. Root CA Certificates Root CA certificates are required for PEAP/MSCHAP, PEAP/GTC, and EAP-TLS. Two options are offered for storing these certificates. They may be imported into the Windows certificate store or copied into the Certs Path directory. How To: Use the Certs Path 1. Follow the instructions later in this chapter for “Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC”. 2. Copy the certificate to specified directory on the mobile device. The default location for Certs Path is \System. A different location may be specified by using the Certs Path global variable. Please note the location chosen for certificate storage should persist after warmboot. 3. When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication, do not check the Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox. 4. Enter the certificate name in the CA Cert textbox. 5. Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 202 Summit Radio How To: Use Windows Certificate Store 1. Follow the instructions later in this chapter for “Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC”. 2. To import the certificate into the Windows store, follow the instructions for “Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device” later in this chapter. 3. When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication, be sure to check the Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox. 4. The default is to use all certificates in the store. If this is OK, skip to Step #8. 5. Otherwise, to select a specific certificate click on the Browse (…) button. Figure 5-11 Choose Certificate 6. Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. 7. Select the desired certificate and click the Select button to return the selected certificate to the CA Cert textbox. 8. Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 203 Summit Wireless Security Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Profile tab according to the type of wireless security used by the network. The instructions that follow are the minimum required to successfully connect to a network. Your system may require more parameters than are listed in these instructions. Please see your system administrator for complete information about your network and its wireless security requirements. To begin the configuration process: • On the Main tab, click the Admin Login button and enter the password. • LXE recommends editing the default profile with the parameters for your network. Select the Default profile from the pull down menu. Figure 5-12 Default Profile • Make any desired parameter changes as described in the applicable following section determined by network security type and click the Commit button to save the changes. Be sure to click the Commit button after all changes have been made. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 204 Summit Radio No Security To connect to a wireless network with no security, make sure the following profile options are used: • Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile • Set EAP Type to None • Set Encryption to None • Set Auth Type to Open Figure 5-13 No Security Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 205 WEP To connect using WEP, make sure the following profile options are used. • Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile • Set EAP Type to None • Set Encryption to Manual WEP • Set Auth Type to Open Figure 5-14 WEP Encryption Click the WEP keys/PSKs button. Figure 5-15 WEP Keys Valid keys are 10 (for 40 bit encryption) or 26 (for 128 bit encryption) hexadecimal characters. Enter the key(s) and click OK. Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 206 Summit Radio LEAP without WPA Authentication To use LEAP (without WPA) make sure the following profile options are used: • Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile • Set EAP Type to LEAP • Set Encryption to Auto WEP • Set Auth Type as follows: o If the Cisco/CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication, set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open. o If the AP is configured for network EAP only, set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP. Please see “WPA/LEAP” later in this section to configure the radio for WPA LEAP. Figure 5-16 LEAP Configuration Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials”, earlier in this chapter. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 207 To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. Figure 5-17 LEAP Credentials Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password and click OK. Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 208 Summit Radio PEAP/MSCHAP To use PEAP/MSCHAP, make sure the following profile options are used. • Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile • Set EAP Type to PEAP-MSCHAP • Set Encryption to WPA TKIP • Set Auth Type to Open Figure 5-18 PEAP/MSCHAP Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials” earlier in this chapter. Click the Credentials button. • No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network. • For Stored Credentials, User, Password and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered. Enter these items as directed below. Figure 5-19 PEAP/MSCHAP Credentials VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 209 Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now. Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active profile is selected on the Main tab. Please review “Windows Certificates Store vs. Certs Path” earlier in this chapter. Once successfully authenticated, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox. Figure 5-20 PEAP/MSCHAP Certificate Filename If using the Windows certificate store: • Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. • To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. • Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. • Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. If using the Certs Path option: • Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. • Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox. Click OK then click Commit. The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/MSCHAP for the user authentication. For information on generating a Root CA certificate, please see “Root CA Certificate” later in this chapter. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate. VX6 Reference Guide 210 Summit Radio PEAP/GTC To use PEAP/GTC, make sure the following profile options are used. • Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile • Set EAP Type to PEAP-GTC • Set Encryption to WPA TKIP • Set Auth Type to Open Figure 5-21 PEAP/GTC Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials”, earlier in this chapter. Click the Credentials button. • No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network. Enter these items as directed below. Figure 5-22 PEAP/GTC Credentials Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 211 Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now. Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab. Please review “Windows Certificates Store vs. Certs Path” earlier in this chapter. Once successfully authenticated, import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store. Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox. Figure 5-23 PEAP/GTC Certificate Filename If using the Windows certificate store: • Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. • To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. • Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. • Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. If using the Certs Path option: • Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. • Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox. Click OK then click Commit. The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP/MSCHAP for the user authentication. For information on generating a Root CA certificate, please see “Root CA Certificate” later in this chapter. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate. VX6 Reference Guide 212 Summit Radio WPA/LEAP To use WPA/LEAP, make sure the following profile options are used. • Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile • Set EAP Type to LEAP • Set Encryption to WPA TKIP • Set Auth Type to Open Please see “LEAP” earlier in this section to configure the radio for LEAP without WPA. Figure 5-24 WPA/LEAP Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials”, earlier in this chapter. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 213 To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. Figure 5-25 WPA/LEAP Credentials Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username. Enter the password. Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 214 Summit Radio EAP-FAST To use EAP-FAST, make sure the following profile options are used. • Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile • Set EAP Type to EAP-FAST • Set Encryption to WPA TKIP • Set Auth Type to Open The SCU supports EAP-FAST with automatic or manual PAC provisioning. With automatic PAC provisioning, the user credentials, whether entered on the saved credentials screen or the sign on screen, are sent to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server must have auto provisioning enabled to send the PAC provisioning credentials to the client device. Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” for more information on the RADIUS server configuration. Figure 5-26 EAP-FAST Configuration For automatic PAC provisioning, once a username/password is authenticated, the PAC information is stored on the computer. The same username/password must be used to authenticate each time. See the note on the next page for more details. For manual PAC provisioning, the PAC filename and Password must be entered. Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials”, earlier in this chapter. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 215 The entries on the Credentials screen are determined by the type of credentials (stored or sign on) and the type of PAC provisioning (automatic or manual). Click on the Credentials button. To use Stored Credentials, click on the Credentials button. No entries are necessary for Sign-On Credentials with automatic PAC provisioning as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. Figure 5-27 EAP-FAST Credentials To use Sign-On credentials: • Do not enter a User and Password as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network. To use Stored Credentials: • Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username. • Enter the password. To use Automatic PAC Provisioning: • No additional entries are required. To use manual PAC Provisioning: • Enter the PAC Filename and PAC Password. • The PAC file must be copied to the directory specified in the Certs Path global variable. The PAC file must not be read only. Tap OK then tap Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J When using Automatic PAC Provisioning, once authenticated, there is a file stored in the \System directory with the PAC credentials. If the username is changed, that file must be deleted. The filename is autoP.00.pac. VX6 Reference Guide 216 Summit Radio EAP-TLS To use EAP-TLS, make sure the following profile options are used. • Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile • Set EAP Type to EAP-TLS • Set Encryption to WPA TKIP • Set Auth Type to Open Figure 5-28 EAP-TLS Please review “Sign-On vs. Stored Credentials”, earlier in this chapter. Click the Credentials button. • No entries except the User Certificate Filename and the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign-On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network. • For Stored Credentials, User, Password and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered. Enter these items as directed below. Figure 5-29 EAP-TLS Credentials VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Summit Radio 217 Enter the Domain\Username (if the Doman is required), otherwise enter the Username. Leave the certificate file name entries blank for now. Click OK then click Commit. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab. Once successfully authenticated, import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store. Return to the Credentials screen. Use the Browse button to locate the User Cert from the certificate store. Highlight the desired certificate and press the Select button. The name of the certificate is displayed in the User Cert box. Enter the password for the user certificate in the User Cert pwd box. Please review “Windows Certificates Store vs. Certs Path” earlier in this chapter. Check the Validate server a checkbox. Figure 5-30 EAP-TLS Credentials If using the Windows certificate store: • Check the Use MS store checkbox. The default is to use the Full Trusted Store. • To select an individual certificate, click on the Browse button. • Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox. • Select the desired certificate and click Select. You are returned to the Credentials screen. If using the Certs Path option: • Leave the Use MS store box unchecked. • Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox. Click OK then click Commit. The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using EAP-TLS for the user authentication. For information on generating a Root CA certificate, please see “Root CA Certificate” later in this chapter. For more information on generating a User certificate, see “User Certificate” later in this chapter. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate. VX6 Reference Guide 218 Summit Radio WPA PSK To connect using WPA/PSK, make sure the following profile options are used: • Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile • Set EAP Type to None • Set Encryption to WPA PSK • Set Auth Type to Open Figure 5-31 WPA/PSK Encryption Click WEP keys/PSKs button. Figure 5-32 PSK Entry This value can be 64 hex characters or an 8 to 63 byte ASCII value. Enter the key and click OK. Once configured, click the Commit button. Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot. The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 219 Cisco Radio The Cisco radio is a 2.4GHz 802.11b radio. This radio supports no encryption, WEP, LEAP or WPA (PEAP-MSCHAP, PEAP-GTC, EAP-TLS, WPA/LEAP and WPA-PSK).Configuring without WPA Cisco – Aironet Client Utility (ACU) Note: When making changes to profile parameters, the VX6 should be warmbooted afterwards. Access: Start | Programs | Cisco ACU or ACU Icon on Desktop Figure 5-33 Cisco Aironet Client Utility Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J To configure WPA, please see “Configuring for WPA”, later in this section. VX6 Reference Guide 220 Cisco Radio Profiles Tab Use this option to manage profiles and review firmware information, status, statistics and wireless radio survey data. Profile Parameter SSID Client Name Infrastructure Mode Power Save Mode Network Security Type WEP Authentication Types LEAP Mixed Mode World Mode Data Rates Transmit Power Offline Channel Scan Default Blank Blank Yes Fast PSP None No WEP Open Disabled Disabled Disabled Auto MAX Enabled Select an active profile to manage. Figure 5-34 Cisco Profile Properties Screen No Security Create a new profile or edit an exiting profile. • If no security is used, the only entry necessary on the Profile Properties screen may be the SSID. If the SSID is left blank, the radio can associate to any available network. • Network security must be set to None. • WEP must be set to No WEP. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 221 WEP To use WEP, create a new profile or select an exiting profile. • WEP must be set to either Static WEP keys or Dynamic WEP keys. When one of the WEP methods is selected, the WEP Keys button is active. • Authentication must be set to Open • The appropriate WEP keys must be entered: o 40-bit WEP keys consist of 10 hexadecimal characters of 5 ASCII characters o 128 bit WEP keys consist of 26 hexadecimal or 13 ASCII characters. o After a WEP key is entered, it will be hidden from view if you return to the screen. However, the “Already Set” indicates if a key has previously been entered. Tap the WEP Keys button to enter WEP information. If a key is already entered, the Already set? Checkbox is checked. The previously entered key value is not displayed for security. Figure 5-35 Cisco Profile WEP Keys LEAP Note: The instructions in this section are for LEAP without WPA. Please see WPA/LEAP later in this chapter for instructions on using LEAP with WPA. Create a new profile or edit an exiting profile. • Network security must be set to LEAP. • The following parameters are accessible when LEAP is selected. Please enter the appropriate information. E-EQ-VX6RG-J o User Name o User Password o User Domain (optional) VX6 Reference Guide 222 Cisco Radio Firmware Tab Displays the current firmware version and allows you to load new firmware. Tap the Browse button to locate the new firmware file. Status Tab Immediately runs status on : signal strength and signal quality. Statistics Tab Select the Receive Stats or Transmit Stats. The data is displayed on the screen. Survey Tab Immediately runs signal strength and quality and link speed. An option is available to Setup parameters for Active Mode reporting. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 223 Configuring for WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is only available on VX6’s equipped with the updated Cisco radio driver (release 2.60 or later). WPA requires software revision 1ED or greater. To identify the software revision, please click on the “About” icon in the Windows CE Control Panel. S Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for VX6 communication. It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. System Requirements To support Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA), the VX6 must be equipped as follows: • Cisco 350 radio card with driver release 2.60 (or later). The LXE VX6 supports WPA and all authentications. The Microsoft supplicant and Cisco supplicants are used separately or together to provide support for the different authentications. Most of the configuration is done with the Microsoft Wireless Configuration tool WPA/LEAP requires the Cisco supplicant and configuration tool. Installing Radio drivers Which version of the Cisco driver should be installed depends on what authentication protocol is to be configured. • Cisco PEAP should not be installed if using PEAP/MSCHAP. • Cisco PEAP must be installed if using PEAP/GTC. • For all other authentications (LEAP, EAP-TLS, WPA-PSK) it does not matter if Cisco PEAP is installed or not. To determine if Cisco PEAP is installed or to change the installation, follow the instructions below. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 224 Cisco Radio Checking for the Cisco PEAP Supplicant With a Cisco radio installed, open the Wireless network properties as described in “Wireless Network Configuration”, later in this chapter. With the Authentication tab selected check the text in the EAP type drop down box. Refer to the following figures to determine if Cisco PEAP is installed. Figure 5-36 No Cisco PEAP Figure 5-37 Cisco PEAP installed. If the Cisco installation is correct continue, with the configuration. If it is not correct, follow the procedures below. Note: Instructions are also included in the README file located in the \SYSTEM folder. There are two Cisco CAB files in the \SYSTEM folder of the VX6. The default files are: • CISCO.CAB • CISCOPEAP.CAB The default CISCO.CAB file provides for all authentications except Cisco PEAP. When the default CISCO.CAB file is loaded, the Wireless Network Properties screen looks like the figure labeled “No Cisco PEAP”, above. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 225 If Cisco PEAP is desired: 1. Rename the CISCO.CAB file to CISCOMSCHAP.CAB. 2. Rename the CISCOPEAP.CAB file to CISCO.CAB. 3. Coldboot the terminal to install the new driver with the registry. The renamed CISCO.CAB file provides for Cisco PEAP and PEAP/GTC authentications. When the renamed CISCO.CAB file is loaded, the Wireless Network Properties screen looks like the figure labeled “Cisco PEAP Installed”, above. If it becomes necessary to switch to a different authentication than Cisco PEAP or PEAP/GTC, E-EQ-VX6RG-J 1. Rename the CISCO.CAB file to CISCOPEAP.CAB. 2. Rename the CISCOMSCHAP.CAB file to CISCO.CAB 3. Coldboot the terminal to install the new driver with the registry. VX6 Reference Guide 226 Cisco Radio Wireless Network Configuration Use the following instructions for all authentication protocols to configure the Microsoft Wireless Network configuration utility unless WPA/LEAP is used. WPA/LEAP is configured with the Cisco ACU (see Section “WPA/LEAP Authentication Configuration”). Click the ACU icon on the desktop. Figure 5-38 Cisco ACU Profile Selection From the “Select Active Profile” pull down list, select . Click OK and warmboot. Figure 5-39 Cisco ACU Reboot Message After booting up, the Microsoft Zero Config tool should start. If it does not, start configuring the wireless connection by clicking on the icon on the task bar shown in below. Figure 5-40 Microsoft Wireless Connection Icon VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 227 The Wireless Network Connection screen appears. Figure 5-41 Wireless Information Screen Make sure the “Notify me when new wireless networks are available” box is not checked. Click the Advanced… button. Figure 5-42 Advanced Wireless Settings Make sure the “Use Windows to configure my wireless settings” box is checked. Set the “Networks to access” drop down box to “Only access points”. Click the OK button to return to the Wireless Information Screen. Click the Add New … line. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 228 Cisco Radio Figure 5-43 Wireless Network Properties Enter the Network name (SSID) into the text field. For PEAP/MSCHAP and EAP/TLS, set Encryption to TKIP and Authentication to WPA. For WPA/PSK see “WPA/PSK Authentication Configuration”. To configure the IEEE 802.1X Authentication box see the following sections for configuration of each authentication protocol. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 229 PEAP/MS-CHAP Authentication Configuration The Microsoft supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP/MS-CHAP protocol. The Cisco CAB file without Cisco PEAP must be used with PEAP/MS-CHAP. See “Installing Radio Drivers”, earlier in this chapter, for more information. Configuring the PEAP/MS-CHAP Supplicant Figure 5-44 PEAP/MSCHAP Wireless Network Properties With the radio parameters configured (see “Wireless Network Configuration”, earlier in this chapter) set the EAP type to PEAP as shown above. If the EAP type box text is not exactly as shown see “Installing Radio Drivers”, earlier in this chapter, to change the radio cab file. Click the Properties button. Figure 5-45 Authentication Settings When first configuring and authenticating, do not validate the server certificate. This allows the user authentication to be tested. When that works, come back to this screen and validate the server certificate. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 230 Cisco Radio The login screen appears for logging into the wireless network. Figure 5-46 Wireless Network Login Once authenticated, click the IP Information tab. Figure 5-47 IP Information Tab If the network is set to use DHCP, the VX6 displays the IP address given by the DHCP server. Now go back and authenticate the server. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 231 Server Authentication To validate the server certificate install the root CA certificate. For instructions for installing, see “Root Certificates”, later in this chapter. Figure 5-48 Authentication Settings, Validate Server Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen. Click the Properties button. Check the Validate server Click OK to dismiss the configuration boxes. Figure 5-49 Advanced Wireless Settings, Authenticated SSID Once the authentication completes, the status changes to show the VX6 has authenticated to the , as shown in the figure above. Click on the IP Information tab and make sure there is a valid IP address as shown in the figure labeled “IP Information Tab”, earlier in this chapter. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 232 Cisco Radio PEAP/ GTC Authentication Configuration The Microsoft supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP/GTC protocol. Configuring the PEAP / GTC Supplicant With the radio parameters configured set the EAP type to Cisco PEAP as shown below. Figure 5-50 PEAP/GTC Wireless Network Properties If the EAP type box text is not exactly as shown see “Installing Radio Drivers”, earlier in this chapter, to change the radio cab file. Click the Properties button. Figure 5-51 PEAP Properties When first configuring and authenticating, do not validate the server certificate. This allows the user authentication to be tested. When user authentication is successful, return to this screen and validate the server certificate as shown later in this section. Check the Always try to resume secure session box. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 233 Note: This box must be checked for the LXE device to roam from one AP to another AP. Click the OK button. The login screen appears for logging into the wireless network. Figure 5-52 Login Screen Enter valid user credentials. Once authenticated click the IP Information tab Figure 5-53 IP Information Tab The device displays the IP address given by the DHCP server. Now go back and authenticate the server. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 234 Cisco Radio Server Authentication To validate the server certificate, the root CA certificate must be installed. For instructions for installing, see “Installing a Root CA Certificate” in this chapter. The RADIUS server certificate is not required, only the root CA which issued the server certificate. Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen. Click the Properties button. Figure 5-54 PEAP Properties, Validate Server Certificate Check the Validate server certificate box. Click OK to dismiss the configuration boxes. When the login box appears enter valid user credentials. It is possible for to be prompted to accept a Root CA certificate when using PEAP/GTC. If the trusted root certificate box (as shown in the previous figure) is blank the user will be prompted to accept the Root CA certificate by name as shown below. Figure 5-55 Server Connection Warning If this is the correct server certificate Root CA, click OK. If not, install the correct Root CA as described in “Installing a Root CA Certificate” in this chapter. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 235 By clicking OK, the Trusted root certificate box is filled in on the properties window. Figure 5-56 PEAP Properties, Trusted Root Certificate The same thing can be done for the Connect only if server name ends in field. Check the box and leave the field blank. A prompt window will appear asking for confirmation of the correct server name. Figure 5-57 Accept Server Connection Warning E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 236 Cisco Radio Figure 5-58 PEAP Properties, Connect Only If Server Name Ends In If the ACS server name is correct, click the OK button and the server name field will be filled in with the correct server name. The other option is to fill in the correct name Figure 5-59 Wireless Information, Authenticated Once the authentication completes the status will change to Authenticated to as shown. Click on the IP Information tab and make sure there is a valid IP address as shown previously in this section. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 237 WPA/LEAP LEAP is a Cisco proprietary authentication protocol and is not supported by the Microsoft supplicant. To configure the VX6 for WPA/LEAP, use the Cisco ACU installed during normal installation of the Cisco radio driver. Cisco ACU Start the Cisco ACU by clicking the icon on the desktop or navigate to Start | Programs | Cisco | ACU. Click on the Profile tab. Figure 5-60 ACU Profile Tab Click the Rename button. Name the profile Figure 5-61 Renaming Profile Click the Edit button. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 238 Cisco Radio The profile properties screen is displayed. Figure 5-62 Profile Properties Screen Enter the SSID and Client Name in the correct fields. Set the Network Security Type to LEAP(WPA). Click the OK button. Figure 5-63 Select Profile Use the drop down box to choose the profile just configured. Click OK. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 239 The VX6 associates and displays the sign on screen. Figure 5-64 Login Screen Click the Status tab to display status. Figure 5-65 ACU Status Tab E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 240 Cisco Radio EAP-TLS Authentication Configuration To authenticate using the EAP-TLS protocol you need a user certificate file and a private key file. Once you have the user certificate files run the certificate installer from the Microsoft control panel. For EAP-TLS it does not matter which Cisco cab file is installed. Note: It is important that all dates are correct on the device when using any type of certificate. Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail. User Certificate To check if a user certificate is installed navigate to Start | Control Panel | Certificates. Set the drop down box to “My Certificates” as shown below. The correct user certificate should be shown in the right pane. Figure 5-66 Certificate Stores Click the View button. Figure 5-67 View Certificate Details Set the Field to Private Key VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 241 Make sure the private key is Present. If it is not present, install the private key file. If there is no user certificate refer to “User Certificates”, earlier in this chapter, to acquire a user certificate and private key file. Setting EAP/TLS Parameters With the radio parameters configured (see “Wireless Network Configuration”) set the EAP type to TLS as shown. Figure 5-68 EAP/TLS Configuration Click the Properties button. Figure 5-69 Authentication Settings E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 242 Cisco Radio Click the Select button to choose the user certificate. Figure 5-70 Select Certificate Figure 5-71 Authentication Settings, Certificate Details Do not check the Validate server certificate box. This allows the user to be authenticated as the first step. When the user certificate successfully authenticates, come back to this screen and validate the server certificate as described in the next section. Click the OK button to dismiss the configuration screens. When the radio re-connects the user is authenticated with the user certificate. If the user does not authenticate, recheck the user certificate and the date on the computer. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Cisco Radio 243 Validating the Server Certificate Before validating the server certificate, make sure the Root CA certificate is installed on the VX6. Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen. Click the Properties button. Check the Validate server box as shown below. Figure 5-72 Validate Server Click OK to dismiss the configuration boxes. Figure 5-73 SSID Authenticated Once the authentication completes the status changes to show the VX6 has authenticated to as shown above. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 244 Cisco Radio WPA PSK Configuration Figure 5-74 WPA PSK Configuration Configure the Wireless Network Settings as described in “Wireless Network Settings”, earlier in this chapter. Change the Network Authentication to WPA-PSK. Enter an ASCII network key in the text field. Hex keys do not work in the Microsoft Zero Config utility at this time. There is no server authentication when using WPA-PSK. Click the OK button to complete configuration. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Symbol Radio 245 Symbol Radio The Symbol radio is a 2.4GHz 802.11b radio. This radio supports no encryption and WEP. Note: When making changes to profile parameters, the VX6 should be warmbooted afterwards. Access: Double Tap the Network Connected Icon in the Status Bar Figure 5-75 Symbol NETWLAN Screen IP Information Tab After the IP Address has been assigned to the VX6, tap the Renew button to renew the IP address if necessary. Tap the Details button to view the Network Connection details. IPv6 Information Tab This is the TCP/IPv6 information screen. The contents cannot be edited by the user. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J IPv6 can be disabled. Please see “Configuring IPv6 Broadcast Messages”, earlier in this chapter. VX6 Reference Guide 246 Symbol Radio Wireless Information Tab Factory Default Settings Wireless Information tab Notify when new networks available Advanced Button Use Windows to configure wireless settings Automatically connect to non-preferred networks Networks to access (Only APs, Only comp-to-comp) Encryption (WEP, TKIP) Authentication (WPA, Open, Shared, WPA-PSK) Ad hoc network Key provided automatically Enable 802.1X authentication EAP Type (MDF-Challenge, PEAP, TLS) Enabled Enabled Disabled All available WEP WPA Disabled Enabled Enabled TLS Figure 5-76 Symbol Wireless Information Tab View Log Displays the logon/connection data for the current network connection. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Symbol Radio 247 Add a new connection Select Add New. Enter the SSID in the Network Name text box. Figure 5-77 Symbol Wireless Network Properties Disable WEP • If WEP is to be disabled, tap the down arrow in the Authentication drop down box. Select Open. • Tap the down arrow in the Encryption drop down box. Tap Disabled and WEP is disabled. • Tap the OK button to return to the Wireless Information tab. Enable WEP E-EQ-VX6RG-J • Tap the down arrow in the Authentication drop down box. • Tap the WEP Authentication protocol. • If the key is provided automatically by your network, check the “Key provided automatically” checkbox. • If you wish to enter your Authentication key, uncheck the “Key provided automatically” checkbox and enter the Network Key in the Network Key text box. • Tap the OK button to return to the Wireless Information tab. VX6 Reference Guide 248 Symbol Radio Continue Tap the Advanced … button on the Wireless Information Tab. Make sure there is a checkmark in the “Use Windows to configure my wireless settings” checkbox. Make sure there is no checkmark in the “Automatically connect to non-preferred networks” checkbox. Tap OK to return to the Wireless Information tab. Tap the Connect button. Figure 5-78 Symbol Advanced Wireless Settings To access NETWLAN1 Properties again, double tap the Network Connected icon in the Toolbar. Select a User Certificate 1. Select Wireless Information Tab 2. Select a network by double tapping the network name. 3. In the IEEE 802.1X Authentication box, enable 802.1X authentication 4. Select an EAP type 5. Tap the Properties button. Validate Server is enabled by default. 6. At the Authentication Settings display, tap the Select button to choose a User Certificate. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Certificates 249 Certificates Root Certificates Generating a Root CA Certificate Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” for more information on obtaining and installing root certificates. The easiest way to get the root CA certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the CA. To request the root CA certificate, open a browser to http:// /certsrv. Sign into the CA with any valid username and password. Figure 5-79 Logon to Certificate Authority Figure 5-80 Certificate Services Welcome Screen Click the Download a CA certificate, certificate chain or CRL link. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 250 Certificates Make sure the correct root CA certificate is selected in the list box. Figure 5-81 Download CA Certificate Screen Click the DER button. To download the CA certificate, click on the Download CA certificate link. Figure 5-82 Download CA Certificate Screen Click the Save button and save the certificate. Make sure to keep track of the name and location of the certificate. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Certificates 251 Installing a Root CA Certificate Note: This section is used for Cisco radios only. Summit radios do not use the Windows certificate store. Instead, copy the certificate to the \System folder for use with a Summit radio. Copy the certificate file to the VX6. Import the certificate by navigating to Start | Control Panel | Certificates. Figure 5-83 Certificates Click the “Import” button. Figure 5-84 Import Certificate Make sure “From a File” is selected and click OK. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 252 Certificates Figure 5-85 Browsing to Certificate Location Using the explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the certificate, select the certificate desired and click OK. Figure 5-86 Certificate Import Confirmation Click Yes to import the certificate. Once the certificate is installed, return to the proper authentication section, earlier in this manual. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Certificates 253 User Certificates User certificates are only needed for EAP-TLS. Generating a User Certificate Please refer to the “LXE Security Primer” for more information on obtaining and installing user certificates. The easiest way to get the user certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the CA. To request the user certificate, open a browser to http:// /certsrv. Sign into the CA with the username and password of the person who will be logging into the mobile device. Figure 5-87 Logon to Certificate Authority This process saves a user certificate and a separate private key file. Windows CE equipped devices such as the VX6 require the private key to be saved as a separate file rather than including the private key in the user certificate. Figure 5-88 Certificate Services Welcome Screen E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 254 Certificates Click the Request a certificate link. Figure 5-89 Request a Certificate Screen Click on the advanced certificate request link. Figure 5-90 Advanced Certificate Request Screen Click on the Create and submit a request to this CA link. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Certificates 255 Figure 5-91 Advanced Certificate Details For the Certificate Template, select “User”. Check the “Mark keys as exportable” and the “Export keys to file” checkboxes. Type the full path on the local PC where the private key is to be copied. Also specify the private key filename. ! Be sure to note the name used for the private key file, for example VX6USER.PVK. The certificate file created later in this process must be given the same name, for example, VX6USER.CER. DO NOT check to use strong private key protection. Make any other desired changes and click the “Submit” button. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 256 Certificates Figure 5-92 Script Warnings If any script notifications occur, click the “Yes” button to continue the certificate request. Figure 5-93 Script Warnings When prompted for the private key password: VX6 Reference Guide • Click “None” if you do not wish to use a password, or • Enter and confirm your desired password then click “OK”. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Certificates 257 Figure 5-94 Certificate Issued Click the Download certificate link. Figure 5-95 Download Security Warning Click Save to download and store the user certificate to the PC. Make sure to keep track of the name and location of the certificate. The private key file is also downloaded and saved during this process. ! E-EQ-VX6RG-J Be sure use the same name for the certificate file as was used for the private key file. For example, it the private key was saved as VX6USER.PVK then the certificate file created must be given the same name, for example, VX6USER.CER. VX6 Reference Guide 258 Certificates Installing a User Certificate Copy the certificate and private key files to the VX6. Import the certificate by navigating to Start | Control Panel | Certificates. Select “My Certificates” from the pull down list. Figure 5-96 Certificates Click the “Import” button. Figure 5-97 Import Certificate Make sure “From a File” is selected and click OK. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Certificates 259 Figure 5-98 Browsing to Certificate Location Using the explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the certificate, select the certificate desired and click OK. The certificate is now shown in the list. Figure 5-99 Certificate Listing With the certificate you just imported highlighted, click View. From the Field pull down menu, select “Private Key. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 260 Certificates Figure 5-100 Private Key Not Present • If the private key is present, the process is complete. • If the private key is not present, import the private key. To import the private key, click OK to return to the Certificates screen. Click import. Figure 5-101 Browsing to Private Key Location Using the explorer buttons, browse to the location where you copied the private key file, change the Type pull down list to “Private Keys”, select the certificate desired and click OK. Enter the password for the certificate if appropriate. Click on View to see the certificate details again. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Certificates 261 Figure 5-102 Private Key Present The private key should now say present. If it does not, there is a problem. Possible items to check: E-EQ-VX6RG-J • Make sure the certificate was generated with a separate private key file, as shown earlier in this section. If the certificate was not generated with a separate private key file, generate a new certificate and follow the import process again. • Make sure the certificate and private key file have the same name, for example vx6user.cer for the certificate and vx6user.pvk for the private key file. If the file names are not the same, rename the private key file and import it again. VX6 Reference Guide 262 VX6 Reference Guide Certificates E-EQ-VX6RG-J Chapter 6 AppLock Introduction LXE’s AppLock is designed to be run on LXE certified Windows CE based devices only. LXE loads the AppLock program as part of the LXE customer installation process. Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device enduser. AppLock is password protected by the Administrator. End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured applications. The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes. The administrator-specified applications are automatically launched in the specified order and run in full screen mode when the device boots up. When the mobile device is reset to factory default values, for example after a cold reset, the Administrator may need to reconfigure the AppLock parameters. LXE has made the assumption, in this chapter, that the first user to power up a new mobile device is the system administrator. Note: AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not inter-relate with similarly-named options contained in other LXE Control Panels. Note: A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing. AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing, but is notified that the application has closed. For these applications, AppLock immediately restarts the application (see Auto Re-Launch) which causes the screen to flicker. If this type of application is being locked, the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end-user mode to minimize the screen flicker. AppLock is updated periodically as new options become available. Contact your LXE representative for assistance, downloads and update availability. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 264 Introduction Determining Your AppLock Version Multi-Application AppLock A mobile device running the Multi-Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated, dual application device. Only the applications or features specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the end-user. This version offers a user-mode taskbar icon allowing the end-user to switch between user applications. If your Administrator Control Panel has Application, Security and Status tabs, then the device has LXE Multi-Application AppLock installed. The Administrator can configure multiple applications to lock and the end user can swap between the applications. Figure 6-1 Multi-Application AppLock The configuration instructions in this chapter are designed for users of Multi-Application AppLock. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Introduction 265 Single Application AppLock A mobile device running the Single Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated, single application device. In other words, only the application or feature specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator is available to the user. If your Administrator Control Panel has Control, Security and Status tabs, then the device has LXE’s Single-Application AppLock installed. The Administrator can configure a single application to lock and the end user is limited to that application. Figure 6-2 Single-Application AppLock Though this chapter is designed for users of the newer Multi-Application AppLock, the instructions may also be used to configure Single-Application AppLock with the following differences: • The Control tab is used to specify the application to lock instead of the Application tab. While the Application tab contains provisions for multiple applications, the Control tab only allows the administrator to specify a single application. • The section on End User Switching Technique does not apply to this version. • Some configuration items may not be available. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 266 Setup a New Device Setup a New Device LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password, thus when the device is first booted, the user has full access to the device and no password prompt is displayed. After the administrator specifies the applications to lock, a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed, the device switches to end-user mode. Briefly, the process to configure a new device is as follows: 1. Connect an external power source to the device and press the Power button. 2. Adjust screen display, audio volume and other parameters if desired. Install accessories. 3. Tap Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon. 4. Assign applications on the Control (single application) or Application (dual application) tab screen. 5. Assign a password on the Security tab screen. 6. Select a view level on the Status tab screen, if desired. 7. Tap OK 8. Press the hotkey sequence to launch AppLock and lock the configured application(s). 9. The device is now in end-user mode. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Administration Mode 267 Administration Mode Administration mode gives full access to the mobile device, hardware and software configuration options. The administrator must enter a valid password (when a password has already been assigned) before access to Administration mode and configuration options are allowed. The administrator can configure the following options: • Create/change the keystroke sequence to activate administrator access. • Create/change the password for administrator access. • Assign the name of the application, or applications, to lock. • Select the command line of the application to lock. In addition to these configuration options, the administrator can view and manage the status logs of AppLock sessions. Administrator default values for this device: Administrator Hotkey Shift+Ctrl+A Password none Application path and name none Application command line none End User Mode End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application or applications. The end user can still reboot and respond to dialog boxes. Each application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up. The user cannot unintentionally or intentionally exit the application nor can the end user execute any other applications. Normal application exit or switching methods and all Microsoft defined Windows CE key combinations, such as close (X) icon, File Exit, File Close, Alt-F4, Alt-Tab, etc. are disabled. The Windows CE desktop icons, menu bars, task bar and system trays are not visible or accessible. Task Manager is not available. If the end-user selects File/Exit or Close from the applications menu bar, the menu is cleared and nothing else happens; the application remains active. Nothing happens when the end-user clicks on the Close icon on the application’s title bar and the application remains active. Note: A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing. AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing, but is notified that the application has closed. For these applications, AppLock immediately restarts the application which causes the screen to flicker. If this type of application is being locked, the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen flicker. Windows accelerator keys such as Alt-F4 are disabled. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 268 Passwords Passwords A password must be configured. If the password is not configured, a new device switches into Administration mode without prompting for a password. In addition to the hotkey press, a mode switch occurs if inaccurate information has been configured or if mandatory information is missing in the configuration. There are several situations that display a password prompt after a password has been configured. If the configured hotkey is pressed, the password prompt is displayed. In this case the user has 30 seconds to enter a password. If a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds, the password prompt is dismissed and the device returns to end-user mode. All other situations that present the password prompt do not dismiss the prompt -- this is because the other situations result in invalid end-user operation. These conditions include: • If inaccurate configuration information is entered by the administrator, i.e. an application is specified that does not exist. • If the application name, which is mandatory for end-user mode, is missing in the configuration. • Invalid installation of AppLock (e.g. missing DLLs). • Corrupted registry settings. To summarize, if an error occurs that prevents AppLock from switching to user mode, the password will not timeout and AppLock will wait until the correct password is entered. Troubleshooting Can’t locate the password that has been set by the administrator? Enter this LXE back door key sequence: Ctrl+L Ctrl+X Ctrl+E Or Ctrl+5 Ctrl+9 Ctrl+3 VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J End-User Switching Technique 269 End-User Switching Technique Note: The touch screen must be enabled. Figure 6-3 Switchpad Menu A checkmark indicates applications currently active or available for Launching by the user. When Keyboard is selected, the VX6 default input method (Input Panel, Transcriber, or custom input method) is activated. Using a Stylus Tap When the mobile device enters end-user mode, a Switchpad icon (it looks like three tiny windows one above the other) is displayed in the taskbar. The taskbar is always visible on top of the application in focus. When the user taps the Switchpad icon, a menu is displayed showing the applications available to the user. The user can tap an application name in the popup menu and the selected application is brought to the foreground. The previous application continues to run in the background. Stylus taps affect the application in focus only. When the user needs to use the Input Panel, they tap the Keyboard option. Input Panel taps affect the application in focus only. The figure shown above is an example and is shown only to aid in describing how the user can switch between applications using a stylus. The switchpad lists user applications as well as the Keyboard option. See Also: Application Panel | Launch | Manual (Launch) and Allow Close Using the Switch Key Sequence One switch key sequence (or hotkey) is defined by the administrator for the end-user to use when switching between locked applications. This is known as the Activation key. The Activation key is assigned by the Administrator using the Global Key parameter. When the switch key sequence is pressed on the keypad, the next application in the AppLock configuration is moved to the foreground and the previous application moves to the background. The previous application continues to run in the background. End-user key presses affect the application in focus only. See Also: Application Panel | Global Key E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 270 Application Configuration Application Configuration The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift+Ctrl+A. Administrator mode allows access to all features on the device. When the hotkey is pressed to switch into Administrator mode, a password prompt is displayed (if a password has been configured). A password must be entered within 30 seconds (and within three tries) or the password prompt is removed and the device remains in end-user mode with the focus returned to the locked application. Without entry of a valid password, the switch into Administrator mode will not occur. Access: Settings | Control Panel | Administration icon The password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured. When the valid password is entered, the Administration Control panel is displayed. When a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds, the user is returned to the System Control Panel. If a password has not been configured, the Administrator Control panel is displayed. Important: Before setting up multiple instances of the same application, make sure the targeted software application will allow two instances to run at the same time. Application Panel Note: Users of Single-Application AppLock have a Control tab instead of an Application tab. Some of the options in this section do not apply to the Control tab. Figure 6-4 Application Panel Note: If your Application Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may have the Single Application version. Single Application version. Use the Application tab options to select the applications to launch when the device boots up in End-user Mode. If no application is specified when the Administrator Control Panel is closed, the mobile device reboots into Administrator mode. If a password has been set, but an application has not been VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Application Configuration 271 specified, the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode. The password prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered. Option Explanation Filename Default is blank. Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the application path or tap the Browse button (the … button). The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed. After selecting the application from the Browse dialog, tap OK. Title Default is blank. Enter the Title to be associated with the application. The assumption is that multiple copies of the same application may need unique titles in order to differentiate them in the application switcher panel. Arguments Default is blank. Enter the command line parameters for the application in the Arguments text box. Order Default is 1. Enter the Order in which the application is to be loaded or presented to the end-user. Applications are launched in lowest to highest number order. Internet Default is Disabled. Enable the Internet checkbox to use the End-user Internet Explorer (EUIE.EXE) When the checkbox is enabled, the Internet Menu and Internet Status are available. See the section titled End-user Internet Explorer (EUIE) for more details. Launch Button See following section titled Launch Button. Note: AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not inter-relate with similarly-named options contained in other LXE Control Panels. Global Key Default is Ctrl+Spc. Select the Global Key key sequence the end-user is to press when switching between applications. The Global Key default key sequence must be defined by the AppLock Administrator. The Global key is presented to the end-user as the Activation key. Global Delay Default is 10 seconds. Enter the number of seconds that Applications must wait before starting to run after reboot. Note: Delay (Global) may not be available in all versions of AppLock. You can simulate a Global Delay function by setting a delay for the first application (lowest Order) launched and setting the delay to 0 for all other applications. See Boot Options. Input Panel Default is Disabled. Enable (check) to show the Keyboard option on the Switchpad menu. When enabled the input panel cannot be enabled or disabled for each individual application, and is available to the user for all configured applications. Clear Button Tap the Clear button to clear all currently displayed Filename or Application information. The Global settings are not cleared. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 272 Application Configuration Option Explanation Scroll Buttons Use the left and right scroll buttons to move from application setup screen to application setup screen. The left and right buttons update the information on the screen with the previous or next configured application respectively. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Application Configuration 273 Launch Button Note: The Launch button may not be available in all versions of Multi-AppLock. Contact your LXE representative for assistance, downloads and AppLock update availability. When clicked, displays the Launch options panel for the Filename selected on the Administration panel. Figure 6-5 Application Launch Options Note: Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab. The Order value does not have to be sequential. AppLock contains several types of delays and timeouts to accommodate different applications. Please note that the delays specified on this panel are delays before AppLock attempts to start the specified application(s). The timesouts specified on the Options panel are delays after AppLock has attempted to launch the application. Auto At Boot Default is Enabled. Auto At Boot, when enabled, automatically launches (subject to the specified Delay in seconds) the application after the unit is rebooted. If a Delay in seconds is specified, AppLock waits for the specified period of time to expire before launching the application. The Delay default value is 10 seconds; valid values are between 0 “no delay” and a maximum of 999 seconds. Auto At Boot Retries is the number of times the application launch will be retried if a failure occurs when the application is automatically launched at bootup. Valid values are between 0 (no tries) and 99 tries or -1 for infinite. Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches. The default is 0 retries. Auto At Boot Delay timer is the time that AppLock waits prior to the initial launch of the selected application when it is automatically launched at bootup. Delay default is 10 seconds. Valid values are between 0 seconds (no delay) and 999 seconds. The Auto At Boot delay is associated for each application; it will be either a value specified by the Administrator or it will be the delay default value. At startup, when a delay has been assigned for each application, AppLock waits for the delay associated with the first application to expire before launching the first application then AppLock waits for the delay associated with the second application to expire before launching the second application. AppLock continues in this manner until all applications are launched. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J A “Global Delay” can be accomplished by setting a timed delay for the first application to be launched (by lowest Order number) and no delay (0 seconds) for all other applications. VX6 Reference Guide 274 Application Configuration Auto Re-Launch Default is Enabled. Auto Re-Launch, when enabled for a specific application. automatically relaunches it (subject to the specified Auto Re-Launch Delay in seconds) after it terminates. This option allows the Administrator to disable the re-launch operation. AppLock cannot prevent all applications from closing. When an application that AppLock cannot prevent from closing terminates, perhaps because of an error condition, AppLock re-launches the application when this option is enabled. Note: If Allow Close is enabled and both Auto Re-launch and Manual (Launch) are disabled, the application cannot be restarted for the end-user or by the end-user after the application terminates. Auto Re-Launch Retries default is 0 tries. Retries is the number of times AppLock will try to relaunch the application. The retry count is reset after an application is successfully launched and controlled by AppLock. Valid values are between 0 (no tries) and 99 tries or -1 for infinite. Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches. Auto Re-Launch Delay timer default is 0 seconds (no delay). Delay is the amount of time AppLock waits prior to re-launching an application that has terminated. The delay is specified in seconds. Valid values are between 0 (no delay) and 99 seconds. AppLock must also be configured to automatically re-launch an application. To AppLock, application termination by the end-user is indistinguishable from application termination for any other reason. Manual (Launch) Default is Disabled. Enabling this option allows the end-user to launch the specified application(s). Upon bootup completion an application with Manual enabled is listed on the Switchpad accompanied by a checkmark that indicates the application is currently active or available for Launching. When an application name is tapped by the end-user, the application is launched (if inactive) and brought to the foreground. Applications set up with Manual (Launch) enabled may or may not be launched at bootup. This function is based on the application’s Auto At Boot setting. The applications have been listed as approved applications for end-user manual launch using the Switchpad menu structure. The approved applications are listed on the Switchpad. A checkmark indicates the applications active status. When Manual (Launch) is disabled for an application, and Allow Close is enabled for the application, when the end-user closes the specific application it is no longer available (shown) on the Switchpad. When Auto At Boot and Manual (Launch) are both disabled for a specific application, the application is 1) not placed on the list of approved applications for end-user manual launch and 2) never launched, and 3) not displayed on the Switchpad. Allow Close Default is Disabled. When enabled, the associated application can be closed by the end-user. This option allows the administrator to configure applications that consume system resources to be terminated if an error condition occurs or at the end-user’s request. Error conditions may generate a topmost popup requiring an end-user response, memory resource issues requiring an end-user response, etc. Also at the administrator’s discretion, these types of applications can be started manually (see Manual [Launch]) by the end-user. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Application Configuration 275 Match Default is blank (match is not used). AppLock works by associating display windows with the launched process ID. If an application uses different process IDs for windows it creates, the Match field must be used. Use the Match field to specify up to 32 characters of the class name for the application. For example, DOS applications using a standard DOS display box should specify condev_appcls in the Match textbox. End User Internet Explorer (EUIE) AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer, such as .HTML pages and JAVA applications. The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in Internet Explorer’s address bar. To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method, the address bar and Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer. This is accomplished by creating an Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode: End-user Internet Explorer (EUIE.EXE). The EUIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address bar and status bar. The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re-enable the address bar. The administrator specifies the EUIE by checking the Internet checkbox in the Application tab of the Administrator applet. The internet application should then be entered in the Application text box. When the Internet checkbox is enabled, the Menu and Status check boxes are available. Enabling the Menu checkbox displays the EUIE menu which contains navigation functions like Back, Forward, Home, Refresh, etc., functions that are familiar to most Internet Explorer users. When the Menu checkbox is blank, the EUIE menu is not displayed and Navigation functions are unavailable. When the Status checkbox is enabled, the status bar displayed by EUIE gives feedback to the end-user when they are navigating the Internet. If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the mobile device is desired, it should be treated like any other application. This means that IEXPLORER.EXE should be specified in the Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line. In this case, do not check the Internet checkbox. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 276 Application Configuration Security Panel Figure 6-6 Security Panel Hotkey Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode. The default hotkey sequence is Shift+Ctrl+A. A 2nd key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence. Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box. Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the Shift state key followed by a normal key. The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the application being locked does not use. The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not passed to the application. Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be pressed from the keyboard when switching modes. The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot key text box with “Shift”, “Alt”, and “Ctrl” text strings representing the shift state keys. The normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence. The hotkey must be entered via the keypad. Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel. Also, hotkeys entered via the SIP are not guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes. For example, if the ‘Ctrl’ key is pressed followed by ‘A’, “Ctrl+A” is entered in the text box. If another key is pressed after a normal key press, the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey sequence is started. A normal key is required for the hotkey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a mode switch; this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key. However, when the hotkey is pressed to switch modes, the normal key must be entered from the keypad; it cannot be entered from the SIP. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Application Configuration 277 Password Move the cursor to the Password text box. The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm Password fields must match. Passwords are case sensitive. When the user exits the Administrator Control panel, the two passwords are compared to verify that they match. If they do not match, a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error. After the user closes the dialog box, the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be entered and confirmed again. If the passwords match, the password is encrypted and saved. See Also: Passwords and Troubleshooting Multi-Application AppLock Options Panel AppLock contains several types of delays and timeouts to accommodate different applications. Please note that the delays specified on the Launch panel are delays before AppLock attempts to start the specified application(s). The timeouts specified on this panel are delays after AppLock has attempted to launch the application. Figure 6-7 Options Panel Launch timeout This timeout specifies the period of time (in milliseconds) for AppLock to wait for the application to initially launch after the application has been called. For example, if the application takes time to launch and then initialize before a display a window is created, use this delay to specify the delay period. Replace timeout This timeout specifies the period of time (in milliseconds) for AppLock to wait after an initial screen (like a password prompt screen) is replaced by another application window. Restart timeout This specifies the period of time (in milliseconds) for AppLock to wait for an application to restart. If the application fails to restart automatically, AppLock then proceeds according to the options selected when the application was configured on the Application and Launch panels. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 278 Application Configuration Status Panel Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operations and to configure which messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation. Status information is stored in a specific location on the storage device and in a specific logfile specified by the Administrator. For this reason, the administrator can configure the type of status information that is logged, as well as clear the status information. Figure 6-8 Status Panel Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the logfile path or tap the Browse button (the … button). The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed. After selecting the logfile from the Browse dialog, tap OK. Note: If your Status Panel does not look like the figure shown above, you may have the Single Application version which does not have as many options. Error Error status messages are logged when an error occurs and is intended to be used by the administrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked. Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly intended for LXE Customer Service when helping users troubleshoot problems with their AppLock program. Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process Logging. All messages are displayed. View Process Extended All Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another. The filtered records are displayed, all others are not displayed. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Application Configuration 279 Log Note: If a level higher than Error is selected, the status should be cleared frequently by the administrator. In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be logged or turn off all status information logging completely. The system default is ‘None’; however to reduce registry use, the administrator may want to select ‘None’ after verifying the configuration. Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the registry. • None • Error • Processing • Extended • All Save As When the 'Save As'… button is selected, a standard 'Save As' dialog screen is displayed. Specify the path and filename. If the filename exists, the user is prompted whether the file should be overwritten. If the file does not exist, it is created. See Also: E-EQ-VX6RG-J Error Messages VX6 Reference Guide 280 Troubleshooting AppLock Troubleshooting AppLock The mobile device won’t switch from Administration mode to end-user mode. • If the configuration is valid for one application but not the other, the switch to enduser mode fails. AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered. • If two copies of the same application are configured, but the application only allows one copy to run at a time, for example Microsoft Pocket Word and LXE RFTerm, the switch to end-user fails. AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered. The hotkey sequence needed is not allowed. What does this mean? When the Administrator is selecting a hotkey sequence to use when switching user modes, they are not allowed to enter key combinations that are reserved by installed software applications. LXE has validated RFTerm key combinations ONLY. When RFTerm is installed on the mobile device and an RFTerm restricted key sequence is specified as a hotkey sequence by the Administrator, the following error message is displayed in a message box: Selected hotkey is not allowed. Please reenter. When RFTerm is not installed on the mobile device, the RFTerm keys are not restricted from use. See Also: Appendix D – Reference Material, sections titled AppLock Error Messages and AppLock Registry Settings. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Appendix A Key Maps The VX6 Keypad ESC CTRL SHIFT ALT 2ND CAPS BREAK R/S F1 F2 F3 @ ! | E ; \ A SP $ # W BKLT F5 F4 % ^ R T : & D F G Z X C V ( * , I . H J B N F9 ) O P PgUp ? K _ ~ F8 F7 U Y ‘ S F6 L Home PgDn CAPS / 2nd = F10 INS BKSP ENTER END M [ < 7 4 1 0 { ] 8 5 2 + } > 9 6 3 DEL . Figure A-1 VX6 QWERTY Keyboard The key map table that follows lists the commands used when running LXE’s VX6. Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies When using a sequence of keys that includes the 2nd key, press the 2nd key first then the rest of the key sequence. Note: The VX6 keyboard does not have a NumLock indicator. NumLock isalways On. When the VX6 boots, the default condition of Caps (or CapsLock) is Off. The Caps (or CapsLock) condition can be set toggled with a <2nd>+ key sequence. The CAPS LED on the keyboard is illuminated when CapsLock is On. The warmboot behavior of CapsLock can be set via the MX3-VXC Options tab in the Windows CE Control Panel. Please see Chapter 3 for more details. Press These Keys and Then To get this key nd 2 Decrease Brightness 4 Increase Volume E-EQ-VX6RG-J Press this key CapsLock F4 x F5 5 x F6 5 x F7 x F8 Decrease Contrast 6 Alt x Increase Contrast 5 Ctrl 4 Increase Brightness 4 Shift 6 The Brightness Adjustment keys have no function. Brightness is adjusted via the buttons on the VX6 control panel. The Contrast Adjustment keys have no function because the VX6 is equipped with a TFT display that has no provision for these adjustments. The Volume Control keys have no function as the volume control is adjusted via the Windows CE Control Panel. VX6 Reference Guide 282 Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies Press These Keys and Then To get this key nd 2 Press this key CapsLock x F9 x F3 2nd 2nd Shift Shift Alt Alt Ctrl Ctrl Esc Esc Space Sp Enter Enter Enter (numeric) x Enter CapsLock (Toggle) x F1 Back Space Ins/BkSp Tab Tab x 8 Ctrl-Break Pause Tab x x x F2 F2 Up Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow Left Arrow Insert x Ins/BkSp Delete (numeric) x DOT Home x Left Arrow End x Right Arrow Page Up x Up Arrow Page Down x Down Arrow Right Shift x x F7 Right Alt x x F8 Right Ctrl x x F9 ScrollLock x x F4 9 x x F10 NumLock 9 Alt 7 BackTab 8 Ctrl Decrease Volume 6 Suspend/Resume 7 Shift F1 F1 F2 F2 F3 F3 The Suspend/Resume key has no function as Windows Power Management controls all power management modes on the VX6. Press then <2nd> then to produce Ctrl-Break. NumLock is always On. This keypress sequence has no effect. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies To get this key 283 Press These Keys and Then nd 2 Shift Ctrl Alt Press this key CapsLock F4 F4 F5 F5 F6 F6 F7 F7 F8 F8 F9 F9 F10 E-EQ-VX6RG-J F10 F11 x x F1 F12 x x F2 a A b B c C d D e E F F g G h H I I j J k K l L m M n N o O p P q Q r R s S t T u U v V w W x X y Y z Z A x A B x B C x C D x D E x E VX6 Reference Guide 284 Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies To get this key Press These Keys and Then nd 2 Shift Ctrl F VX6 Reference Guide Alt Press this key CapsLock x F G x G H x H I x I J x J K x K L x L M x M N x N O x O P x P Q x Q R x R S x S T x T U x U V x V W x W X x X Y x Y Z x Z 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 0 0 DOT DOT < x 0 [ x 1 ] x 2 > x 3 = x 4 { x 5 } x 6 / (numeric) x x 7 E-EQ-VX6RG-J Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies To get this key 285 Press These Keys and Then nd 2 E-EQ-VX6RG-J Shift Ctrl Alt Press this key CapsLock / (alpha) x 7 - (numeric) x - (alpha) x + (numeric) x + (alpha) x 9 * (numeric) x I * (alpha) x : (colon) x D ; (semicolon) x F ? x L ` x N _ (underscore) x M , (comma) x J ‘ (apostrophe) x H ~ (tilde) x B \ x S x 8 8 x x 9 I | x A “ x G ! x Q @ x W # x E $ x R % x T ^ x Y & x U ( x O ) x P VX6 Reference Guide 286 IBM 3270 Terminal Emulator Keypad IBM 3270 Terminal Emulator Keypad PA1 ESC 2ND PA3 PA2 CAPS BREAK R/S F1 F2 F3 BKLT F5 F4 F6 @ ! Attn SHIFT | $ # W E ; \ % R & ^ T : ‘ D S , G F O P Z 2nd = 7 8 + 9 INS BKSP 4 { 5 } 6 K L ENTER [ 1 ] 2 > 3 NL C X PgUp ? J H _ ~ SP ) I . Clr ALT / E-Inp ( * U Y CAPS F10 Del SysReq A F9 Ins Rst CTRL F8 F7 V B N Home PgDn < END M 0 DEL . Figure A-2 IBM 3270 Specific Keypad This keypad is designed to allow the user to enter terminal emulator commands when running LXE’s RFTermTM program. When running this program please refer to the RFTermTM Reference Guide for equivalent keys and keypress sequences. IBM 5250 Terminal Emulator Keypad ESC 2ND CAPS BREAK R/S F1 F2 F3 BKLT F5 F4 F6 Dup CTRL @ ! Attn SHIFT | E ; S % R ^ T & : D ‘ F G H SP . J X C V B N / 2nd = 7 8 + 9 P INS BKSP Field Exit PgUp L ENTER [ 4 1 { ] 5 2 } > 6 3 Fld- _ ~ Z ) O ? K NL Clr ALT I Fld+ , CAPS F10 E-Inp ( * U Y F9 Ins Del SysReq \ A $ # W F8 F7 Home PgDn END M < 0 DEL . Figure A-3 IBM 5250 Specific Keypad This keypad is designed to allow the user to enter terminal emulator commands when running LXE’s RFTermTM program. When running this program please refer to the RFTermTM Reference Guide for equivalent keys and keypress sequences. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Appendix B Technical Specifications Physical Specifications Features Specification CPU 400MHz Intel® PXA255 Memory Display Mass Storage Comments 10 ROM 128 MB Flash RAM 128MB of SDRAM 9 Controller SVGA compatible controller Type TFT Half Screen + Compact Flash PCMCIA Secure Digital System Memory Various sizes supported. Compact Flash supported via PCMCIA adapter. PCMCIA/CardBus Interface Two (2) PCMCIA: Accepts Type I and II PCMCIA cards. External Connectors/ Interfaces Two (2) external RS-232C serial ports: COM1 and COM3 11 9-pin “D” (male) connectors One USB Host and one USB Client Port Via Adapter Cable One (1) Ethernet Port Power Connector 12-80V DC input power Power Switch Sealed power switch Beeper Minimum loudness greater than 95dBm at 10 cm in front of unit Dimensions Length: 12.2 in (30.98 cm) 5-pin connector Width: 9.6 in (24.38 cm) Depth: 3.7 in (9.39 cm) 10 11 E-EQ-VX6RG-J Battery for CMOS Internal lithium Battery External Power Supply 120-240VAC to 12VDC AC Adapter 64MB Flash and 64MB RAM options have been discontinued. The COM3 port is labeled “COM2/3”. VX6 Reference Guide 288 Environmental Specifications Environmental Specifications The VX6 will withstand the following environmental characteristics and has been tested in accordance with applicable sections of MIL-STD-810E. Feature Specification Altitude Operational to 10,000 ft. (3048 meters) Operating Temperature Standard version: -4°F to 122°F (-20°C to 50°C) [non-condensing] Extended temperature version: -22º to 122º F (-30ºC to 50ºC [condensing] Storage Temperature Standard version: -22°F to 140°F (-30°C to 60°C) [non-condensing] Extended temperature version: -22°F to 140°F (-30°C to 60°C) [condensing] Water, Sand and Dust Humidity IP66 per IEC60529 Standard version: Up to 90% Non-condensing at 40°C (104°F) Extended temperature version: 100% Vibration ESD Shock VX6 Reference Guide Bounce loose cargo for 0.5 hour duration. Common carrier transportation, transit face. 15 kV 75G, 5msec duration, 100 shock impacts E-EQ-VX6RG-J Environmental Specifications 289 Display Specifications Characteristic Type Specification TFT SVGA Resolution 800 X 320 pixels (25 lines x 80 characters) Cell Size 8 x 16 pixels (8 x 8 also supported – 25 lines x 80 chars) Dot Dimensions Display Dimensions .30mm x .30mm 280mm x 218mm x 11mm (11.0” x 8.6” x 0.4”) Viewing Area 249mm x 187.5mm (9.8” x 7.38”) Active Display Area 246mm x 98.3mm (9.7” x 3.87”) UPS Battery Pack Specifications Feature Specification Altitude Operational to 10,000 ft. (3048 meters) Operating Temperature -30 °C to +50 °C (-22 °F to +122 °F) Storage Temperature -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to +158 °F) Water, Sand and Dust IP66 per IEC60529 Humidity 10-90% Non-condensing at 40°C (104°F) Vibration Bounce loose cargo for 0.5 hour duration. Common carrier transportation, transit face. ESD E-EQ-VX6RG-J 15 kV VX6 Reference Guide 290 Network Device Specifications Network Device Specifications Summit 802.11b/g CF 2.4GHz Bus Interface: Compact Flash via a PCMCIA adapter Radio Frequencies: 2.4 - 2.4897 GHz IEEE 802.11b 802.11g DSSS OFDM RF Data Rates: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps RF Power Level: 64 mW (18dBm) Channels 11 US, 13 Europe, 13 Japan Operating Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Storage Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Connectivity: Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI Summit 802.11a/b/g CF 2.4/5.0GHz Bus Interface: Compact Flash via a PCMCIA adapter Radio Frequencies: 2.4 - 2.4897 GHz IEEE 802.11b 802.11g DSSS OFDM 5.x - 5.x GHz IEEE 802.11a DSSS OFDM RF Data Rates: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54 Mbps RF Power Level: 64 mW (18dBm) Channels 11 US, 13 Europe, 13 Japan Operating Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Storage Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Connectivity: Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI Bus Interface CF card via a PCMCIA adapter Enhanced Data Rate Up to 3.0 Mbit/s over the air Connection No less than 32.80 ft (10 meters) line of sight Bluetooth Version 2.0 + EDR Operating Frequency: 2.402 - 2.480 GHz Operating Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Storage Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications QDID B013455 Bluetooth VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Network Device Specifications 291 PCMCIA Cisco 2.4GHz Type II Bus Interface: PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot Radio Frequencies: 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS RF Data Rates: 11 Mbps RF Power Level: 100 mW Channels 11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 1 Japan Operating Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Storage Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Connectivity: Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI PCMCIA Symbol 11Mb 2.4GHz Type II E-EQ-VX6RG-J Bus Interface: PCMCIA 2.0, Type II slot Radio Frequencies: 2.4 - 2.5 GHz IEEE 802.11b DS SS RF Data Rates: 11 Mbps maximum RF Power Level: 100 mW Channels 11 US, 13 Europe, 4 France, 1 Japan Operating Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Storage Temperature see VX6 Environmental Specifications Connectivity: Novell, TCP/IP, Ethernet, ODI VX6 Reference Guide 292 VX6 Reference Guide Network Device Specifications E-EQ-VX6RG-J Appendix C VX6 CE .NET 4.2 Introduction There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the VX6. Many of the setup and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and software installed on the unit. The examples found in this chapter are to be used as examples only, the configuration of your specific VX6 computer may vary. The following sections provide a general reference for the configuration of the VX6 and some of its optional features. Your VX6 operating system may be Windows CE .NET 4.2 or Windows CE 5.0. The VX6 operating system is displayed on the Desktop as Windows CE .NET or Windows CE. This is the factory default value for the Desktop Display Background. This chapter presents information and procedures for Windows CE .NET 4.2 only. Windows CE 5.0 information and procedures are contained in Chapter 3, “System Configuration”. Windows CE . NET 4.2 Operating System For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE user’s guides or the Windows CE on-line Help application installed with the VX6. This chapter’s contents assume the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows computers. Therefore, the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the VX6 and its Windows CE environment. Wireless Network Configuration All radio configuration is included in Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration”. Warmboot A warmboot reboots the computer without erasing any registry data. However, any applications installed to RAM are lost, as is all data in RAM. This happens because the operating system is stored on the flash drive, but must be loaded into RAM to run. All registry configurations are automatically preserved. Any applications stored as .CAB files in the System directory and configured in the registry to persist are reinstalled on boot up by the Launch utility. Coldboot A coldboot reboots the computer, erases all registry data and returns the computer to factory default settings. In order to be preserved, applications and data must be stored in the System folder. Registry information is not preserved. Only factory default applications and drivers stored as .CAB files in the System directory are loaded by Launch. A cold boot is initiated by running the Coldboot application in the \Windows directory. This application automatically cold boots the VX6, erasing any customer applied registry changes and returning the VX6 to its factory settings. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 294 Installed Software Installed Software When you order a VX6 you receive the software files required by the separate programs needed for operation and radio communication. The files are loaded by LXE and stored in subdirectories in the VX6. This section lists the contents of the subdirectories and the general function of the files. Files installed in each VX6 are specific to the intended function of the VX6. Files installed in each VX6 configured for an RF environment contain PCMCIA card radio specific drivers – the drivers for each type of radio are specific to the manufacturer (e.g. Summit, Cisco, Symbol) for the radios installed in the RF environment and are not interchangeable. Software Load The software loaded on the mobile computer consists of Windows CE .NET 4.2 hardware-specific OEM Adaptation Layer, device drivers, Internet Explorer 6.0 for Windows CE browser and utilities. The software supported is summarized below: Operating System • Full Operating System License: Includes all operating system components, including Windows CE .NET 4.2 kernel, file system, communications, connectivity (for remote APIs), device drivers, events and messaging, graphics, keyboard and touchscreen input, window management, and common controls. Network and Device Drivers Wavelink Avalanche (Optional) LXE AppLock Java (Optional) • Java executables and browser components are handled by the Java option (when installed). Terminal Emulation (Optional) • RFTerm (VT220, TN5250, TN3270). Runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot (if installed). LXE API Routines (see “Accessories” for the LXE SDK Kit part number) Note: Please contact your LXE representative for software updates and CAB files as they are released by LXE. Software Applications The following applications are included: VX6 Reference Guide • WordPad (was PocketWord in previous versions of Windows CE) • Word Viewer • Excel Viewer • PDF Viewer • Image Viewer E-EQ-VX6RG-J Installed Software 295 • Scanner Wedge (LXE developed) • ActiveSync • Transcriber • Media Player • Internet Explorer Note that the viewer applications allow viewing documents, but not editing them. Java (Optional) Installed by LXE. Files can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | JEM-CE. Doubletap the EVM icon to open the EVM Console. A folder of Java examples and Plug-ins is also installed with the Java option. LXE does not support Java applications running on the mobile device. LXE RFTerm (Optional) Installed by LXE. The application can be accessed by tapping Start | Programs | RFTerm. Please refer to “Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters” earlier in this guide for RFTerm quick start instruction. Refer to the “RFTerm Reference Guide” on the LXE Manuals CD for complete information and instruction. AppLock Installed by LXE. Application is setup by the Administrator by tapping Start | Settings | Control Panel | Administration. Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device end-user. AppLock is password protected by the Administrator. End-user mode locks the end-user into the configured application or applications. The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes. The administrator-specified application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up. See Also: Chapter 6 “AppLock” for instruction. Wavelink Avalanche Enabler (Optional) The following features are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in conjunction with the Avalanche Molility Center (MC) Console. After configuration, Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset. Network parameter configuration is supported for: • IP address: DHCP or static IP • RF network SSID • DNS hosts (primary, secondary, tertiary) • Subnet mask • Enabler update Related Manual: “Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers”. The VX6 has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded, but not installed, on the mobile device when it is shipped from LXE. The installation files are located in the System folder on CE devices. The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used. After the installation application is manually run, a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance. Following this reboot, the Enabler will by default be an auto-launch E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 296 Installed Software application. This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface. The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager is LXE_VXC. LXE CE devices manufactured before October 2006 must have their drivers and system files upgraded before they can use the Avalanche Enabler functions. Please contact an LXE representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline. If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device, the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device(s). VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Desktop 297 Desktop For general use instruction, please refer to commercially available Windows CE user’s guides or the Windows on-line Help application installed in the mobile device. The VX6 Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP. At a minimum, it has the following icons that can be double tapped with the stylus to access My Computer, Internet Explorer, and the Recycle Bin. At the bottom of the screen is the Start button. Clicking the Start Button causes the Start Menu to pop up. It contains the standard Windows menu options: Programs, Favorites, Documents, Settings, Help, and Run. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Desktop Icon Function My Computer Access files and programs. Recycle Bin Storage for files that are to be deleted. Internet Explorer Connect to the Internet/intranet (requires radio card and Internet Service Provider – ISP enrollment is not available from LXE). Wireless Configuration Icon Used for accessing the appropriate wireless configuration utility, either the SCU (Summit Client Utility) or ACU (Cisco Aironet Client Utility). Bluetooth Discover and then pair with nearby discoverable Bluetooth devices. My Documents Storage for downloaded files / applications. Start Access programs, select from the Favorites listing, documents last worked on, change/view settings for the control panel or taskbar, on-line help or run programs. VX6 Reference Guide 298 Desktop Folders Copies at Startup The following folders are copied on startup: System\Desktop => Windows\Desktop System\Favorites => Windows\Favorites System\Fonts => Windows\Fonts System\Help => Windows\Help System\Programs => Windows\Programs This function copies only the directory contents, no sub-folders. The following folders are NOT copied on startup: Windows\AppMgr Windows\Recent Windows\Startup Because copying these has no effect on the system or an incorrect effect. Files in the Startup folder are executed, but only from System\Startup. Windows\Startup is parsed too early in the boot process so it has no effect. Executables in System\Startup must be the actual executable, not a shortcut, because shortcuts are not parsed by launch. My Computer Folders Folder Description System Internal ATA Card Yes Network Mounted network drive No Storage Card PCMCIA No Media Card SD No Windows Operating System in ROM No Program Files Applications No Application Data Data saved by running applications No My Documents Storage for downloaded files / applications No Temp Location for temporary files No VX6 Reference Guide Preserved upon Reboot? E-EQ-VX6RG-J Start Menu Program Options 299 Start Menu Program Options The following options represent the factory default program installation. Your system may be different based on the software and hardware options purchased. Access: Start | Programs Cisco Set Cisco radio / network parameters (Please see Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for details) Communication Stores Network communication options ActiveSync Transfer files between a VX6 and a desktop computer Connect Run this command after setting up a connection Start FTP Server Begin connection to FTP server Stop FTP Server End connection to FTP server Microsoft File Viewers View downloaded files (see Note) Excel Viewer View Excel 97 and newer documents Image Viewer View BMP, JPEG and PNG images PDF Viewer View Adobe Acrobat documents Word Viewer View Word 97 and newer documents and RTF files Summit Set Summit radio / network parameters (Please see Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for details) Command Prompt The command line interface in a separate window Internet Explorer Access web pages on the world wide Internet Java Option LXE RFTerm Option. Terminal emulation application. Media Player Music management program Microsoft WordPad Opens an ASCII notepad Remote Desktop Connection Log on to a Windows Terminal Server Transcriber Enter data using the stylus on the touchscreen Avalanche Option. Remote management for networked devices Windows Explorer File management program Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J The Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected. VX6 Reference Guide 300 Start Menu Program Options Communication Access: Start | Programs | Communication ActiveSync Once a relationship (partnership) has been established with Connect, ActiveSync will synchronize using the radio link on the VX6. See also: Chapter 1 “Introduction”, section “ActiveSync – Initial Setup”. Requirement: ActiveSync version 3.7 (or higher) must be resident on the host (desktop/laptop) computer. ActiveSync is available from the Microsoft website. Follow their instructions to locate, download and install ActiveSync on your desktop computer. For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer, open ActiveSync, then open ActiveSync Help. See also section titled “Backup VX6 Files using ActiveSync” for more ActiveSync information. Synchronizing from the VX6 using a USB ActiveSync connection: You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device. 1. To initiate synchronization from your device, connect the USB cable to the PC and to the dongle cable on the VX6. The VX6 connects automatically. 2. Click the Sync Now button to synchronize with the PC. 3. Click the Disconnect button or remove the cable to disconnect. 4. To modify the Synchronization settings, see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on the desktop PC. Synchronizing from the VX6 using Serial or RF connection: You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device. 1. To initiate synchronization from your device, tap Start | Programs | Communication | ActiveSync to begin the process. 2. Click the Connect button. 3. Tap the Sync Now button to synchronize with the PC. 4. Tap the Disconnect button to disconnect. 5. To modify the Synchronization settings, see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on the desktop PC. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Start Menu Program Options 301 Connect Connect is used to initiate a hardwired connection to a host. Several pre-defined connect setups are included in the factory setup: • COM1 direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud • COM3 • USB direct connect 12 direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud The default connect setup is USB direct connect. After a connect setup is selected, Start | Programs | Communication | Connect will start to connect to a host. After this connection is made and an ActiveSync relationship established, the ActiveSync menu item can be used to establish the connection over the radio link. See Also: “Important Information – Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection” Start FTP Server / Stop FTP Server These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server. The server defaults to Off (for security) unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu. 12 E-EQ-VX6RG-J The COM3 port is labeled “COM2/3”. VX6 Reference Guide 302 Start Menu Program Options Command Prompt Access: Start | Programs | Command Prompt Figure C-1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands. Exit the Command Prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or select File | Close. Internet Explorer Access: Start | Programs | Internet Explorer This option requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider. There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options. Click the “?” button to access Internet Explorer Help. Media Player Access: Start | Programs | Media Player There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options. Click the “?” button to access Media Player Help. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Start Menu Program Options 303 Remote Desktop Connection Access: Start | Programs | Remote Desktop Connection There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Remote Desktop Connection as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection options. Select a computer from the drop down list or enter a host name and tap the Connect button. Tap the Options >> button to access the General, Display, Local Resources, Programs and Experience tabs. Click the “?” button to access Remote Desktop Connection Help. Note: VX6 and Custom Key Maps: before connecting to a host using Remote Desktop Connection, go to Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard and select Preload or 0409 (depending on system software revision) from the keymap popup. Click OK. Transcriber Access: Start | Programs | Transcriber Select Transcriber on the Start | Programs menu. To make changes to the Transcriber application, enable or disable the current Transcriber session, etc., click the “hand with a pen” icon in the toolbar. Click the “?” button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help. Windows Explorer Access: Start | Programs | Windows Explorer There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Explorer options. Click the “?” button to access Windows Explorer Help. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 304 Start Menu Program Options Taskbar Access: Start | Settings | Taskbar and Start Menu Factory Default Settings Always on Top Enabled Auto hide Disabled Show Clock Enabled There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Taskbar options. When the taskbar is auto hidden, press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button appear. Figure C-2 Taskbar Properties Advanced Tab Expand Control Panel Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the Settings | Control Panel menu option. Clear Contents of Document Folder Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Document folder. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 305 Control Panel Options Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel or My Computer | Control Panel Getting Help Please click the “?” box to get Help when changing Control Panel options. E-EQ-VX6RG-J Option Function About Displays hardware and software details. Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard, display or mouse functions. Administrator Control AppLock configuration. (See Chapter 6, “AppLock”.) Aironet Client Utility Set the parameters for a Cisco radio. (See section “Start Menu Program Options”, only present if Cisco radio software installed.) Bluetooth Discover and manage Bluetooth devices. Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication. Date/Time Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings. Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by LXE). Display Set background graphic, color scheme appearance, and power scheme properties. Input Panel Select the current key / data input method. Internet Options Set General, Connection, Security and Advanced options for Internet connectivity. Keyboard Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate. Mixer Adjust the volume, record gain, and sidetone for microphone input. Mouse Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen. Network and Dial Up Options Set network driver properties and network access properties. Owner Set VX6 owner details. Password Set VX6 access password properties. PC Connection Control the connection between the VX6 and a local desktop or laptop computer. PCMCIA Manage PCMCIA cards. Power Displays the status of all power managed devices. Regional Settings Set appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional and language settings. Remove Programs Remove user installed programs in their entirety. VX6 Reference Guide 306 Control Panel Options Option Function Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports. (See Chapter 4, “Scanner”.) Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel. System Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage and Program memory settings. Volume and Sounds Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE events. Wi-Fi Set the parameters for a Summit radio. See Chapter 5, “Wireless Network Configuration” for details on the SCU. About Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | About Displays hardware and software details. Tab Title Contents Software GUID, Windows Windows CE version, OAL Version, Bootloader Version, Compile Version, FPGA Version and Language Hardware CPU Type, Codec Type, FPGA Version, Scanner type, Display, Flash memory, and DRAM memory Versions LXE Utilities, LXE Drivers, LXE Image, LXE API, and Internet Explorer Network IP Current network connection IP and MAC address. User application version information can be shown in the Version window. Version window information is taken from the registry. Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor (see section titled “VX6 Utilities”). LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made. The registry settings for the Version window are under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE \ Software \ LXE \ Version in the registry. Create a new string value under this key. The string name should be the Application name to appear in the Version window. The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 307 Language and Fonts The Software tab displays any fonts built into the OS image. Figure C-3 About Properties, Software The fonts built into the OS image are noted in the Language section of this tab: • English only – No additional fonts are built into the OS • Japanese • Simplified Chinese • Traditional Chinese • Korean The above listed Asian fonts are ordered separately and built-in to the VX6 OS image. Built-in fonts are added to registry entries and are available immediately upon startup. Thai, Hebrew, Arabic and Cyrillic Russian fonts are available in the (English only) default (extended) fonts. When an Asian font is copied into the fonts folder on the /System folder; the font works for Asian web pages, the font works with RFTerm, the font does not work for Asian options in Regional Settings control panel, the font does not work for naming desktop icons with Asian names, the font does not work for third-party .NET applications, the font does not work for some third-party MFC applications. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 308 Control Panel Options Identifying Software Versions The “Versions” tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed. Not all installed software installed on the VX6 is included in this list and the list varies depending on the applications loaded on the VX6. The LXE Image line displays the revision of the system software installed. Please refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level (i.e.: in the example below, the revision level is 2BT). Figure C-4 About Properties, Versions Radio MAC Address The “Network IP” tab displays the MAC address of the radio card. Figure C-5 About Properties, Network IP VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 309 Accessibility Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard, sound, display, mouse, automatic reset and notification sound function. There is no change from general desktop Accessibility options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Figure C-6 Accessibility Properties, Keyboard Note: The StickyKeys option SHOULD NOT be used on the VX6. It does not work for the integrated VX6 keyboard. If the ToggleKeys option is selected, please note that Scroll Lock key does not produce a sound as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do. This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system. . Figure C-7 Accessibility Properties, Sound If the SoundSentry option is selected, please note that Scroll Lock does not produce a visual warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do. This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 310 Control Panel Options Administrator Control Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection Use this option to set parameters for computers intended to be used as dedicated, single (or multi) application devices. In other words, only the application(s) or feature(s) specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the user. LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password, thus when the device is first booted, the user has full access to the device and no password prompt is displayed. After the administrator specifies an application to lock, a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed, the device switches to end-user mode. AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters as specified by the Administrator. To set the AppLock parameters, please see Chapter 6, “AppLock” for details. Bluetooth Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Bluetooth Bluetooth is not supported with the Windows CE .NET Operating System. Please contact your LXE representative for upgrade options. Certificates Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication. Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the VX6 user. These values may change based on the type of radio security resident in the client, access point or the host system. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 311 Date/Time Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Date/Time Icon Set Date, Time, Time Zone, and Daylight Savings. Factory Default Settings Current Time Midnight Time Zone GMT-05:00 Daylight Savings Disabled Figure C-8 Date/Time Properties There is little change from general desktop PC Date/Time Properties options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Double tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes this display to appear. If an Internet connection is available, click the Sync button to synchronize time with a time server. The VX6 includes a GrabTime utility: E-EQ-VX6RG-J • GrabTime can be executed manually at any time by clicking the Sync button on this control panel. • GrabTime can be configured to synchronize the time at boot up. Please see “Enabling GrabTime”, later in this chapter, for details. VX6 Reference Guide 312 Control Panel Options Dialing Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Dialing Figure C-9 Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems (not supplied/supported by LXE). Tap the “?” and follow the instructions in Help. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 313 Display Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Display Icon Set background graphic, color scheme appearance, and power scheme properties. Factory Default Settings Background Tile Appearance Scheme: Backlight Battery Auto Turn Off Idle Time External Auto Turn Off Idle Time Windowsce Disable Windows Standard Enabled 30 seconds Enabled 2 minutes Background There is no change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Background options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Appearance No change from general desktop PC Display Properties / Appearance options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. The default is Windows Standard. Backlight Figure C-10 Display Properties / Backlight Tab Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. When the backlight timer expires, the display, display backlight and keyboard backlight are all turned off. Note: E-EQ-VX6RG-J The display can also be configured to turn off when the vehicle to which the VX6 is mounted is in motion. This feature required a serial cable connection and is enabled using the Scanner control panel. Please see “Screen Blanking” in Chapter 4 “Scanner”, for details. VX6 Reference Guide 314 Control Panel Options Input Panel Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Input Panel Select the current key / data input method. Factory Default Settings Input Method Allow applications to change input panel state Keys Use gestures Keyboard Disabled Small keys Disabled Figure C-11 Input Panel Properties Use this option to make the Soft Keyboard or the keypad primarily available when entering data. Selecting Keyboard enables both. The Input Panel is disabled by default. To enable the input panel, make sure the checkbox for “Allow applications to change input panel state” is checked and warmboot the VX6. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 315 Internet Options Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Internet Options Set General, Connection, Security and Advanced options for Internet connectivity. Factory Default Settings General Start Page Search Page Cache Size Connection Use LAN Autodial Name Proxy Server Security Allow cookies Allow TLS 1.0 security Allow SSL 2.0 security Allow SSL 3.0 security Warn when switching Advanced Display web images Play web sounds Enable web scripting Display script error note Underline links http://www.lxe.com/ http://www.google.com 512 Kb Disabled Blank Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Never Select a tab. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Keyboard Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Keyboard Icon Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate. Factory Default Settings Repeat Enable Delay Short Rate Slow Key Map 0409 There is no change from general desktop PC Keyboard Properties options. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. When new key maps are added to the registry, they will appear in the Key Map dropdown list on the Keyboard Panel. These values do not affect virtual keyboard taps. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 316 Control Panel Options Mixer Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mixer Icon Adjust the volume, record gain, and sidetone for microphone input. Factory Default Settings Master Volume 0dB Record Gain 22.5dB Sidetone 12.0dB Input None Input Boost Disabled Figure C-12 Mixer Select the Input for the mixer. Move the sliders to adjust the decibel level. Tap OK to save the settings. The following options are available for Input • None – No microphone. Use this setting when stereo headphones are attached to the device. • Mic1 – Use this setting when a mono headset with microphone is attached to the device. • Bluetooth – Reserved for future use. When checked, (enabled) Input Boost provides increased sensitivity of the microphone by 20 dB. Input Boost can only be enabled after an Input type other than None is selected. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 317 Mouse Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Mouse Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen. Network and Dialup Connections Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Network and Dialup Connections Create a dialup, direct, or VPN connection on the VX6. To configure the VX6 to use DHCP or a fixed IP address, select the desired connection. The default is to obtain an IP address via DHCP. A static IP address can be assigned by clicking the Specify an IP address radio button and entering the desired IP address, subnet mask and gateway. Figure C-13 Network Connection Properties E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 318 Control Panel Options Owner Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Owner Icon Set VX6 owner details. Factory Default Settings Identification Blank Notes Blank There is no change from general desktop PC Owner Properties display. Enter the information and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Figure C-14 Owner Properties VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 319 Password Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Password Icon Set VX6 access/power up password properties. Factory Default Settings Password Blank At Power On Disabled Note: Once a password is assigned, the Owner and Password Control Panel options require the password to be entered before the Control Panel option can be accessed. If you forget the password, it cannot be restored without performing a cold boot on the unit (which erases all memory). Enter the password, then type it again to confirm it and click the OK box to save the changes. The password is immediately in effect. Tap the Power On checkbox to set whether the user types a password at Power On. Tap the Screen Saver checkbox to set whether the user types a password to clear the screensaver. If there is no screensaver chosen, this checkbox is ignored. Note: Screensaver option only works with Remote Desktop screensavers. Figure C-15 Password Properties E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 320 Control Panel Options PC Connection Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | PC Connection Control the connection between the VX6 and a nearby desktop/laptop computer. Factory Default Settings Allow Connection Enabled Connect Using ‘USB Client’ Tap the Change button to adjust the settings and click the OK button to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Unchecking the “Allow connection with …..” disables ActiveSync. Change …. Clicking Change lists configured ActiveSync connections. In addition, there is a checkbox for Automatic Connect. This option applies to USB connection only. If this checkbox is checked, when the USB cable is connected, the VX6 will automatically try to start ActiveSync over the USB port. Note that this interferes with processes on the configured port at the same time. Figure C-16 Communication / PC Connection Tab Please refer to the “Backup VX6 Files” section later in this chapter for parameter setting recommendations. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 321 PCMCIA Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | PCMCIA Enable or disable the PCMCIA slots. Information on the card currently in the PCMCIA slots and the Compact Flash slot is provided. Factory Default Settings Disable slot now Unchecked The Slot 0 and Slot 1 Tabs contain the same parameters. If a card is present in the slot, a description of the card is displayed. To disable a slot, check the Disable slot now checkbox and tap OK. The change takes effect immediately. Slot 0 is the lower slot, labeled “PCMCIA B”. Slot 1 is the upper slot, labeled “PCMCIA A”. Figure C-17 PCMCIA Control Tab, Slot 0 and Slot 1 The Slot 2 Tab provides information on the internal Compact Flash ATA drive. There are no user configurable options. Figure C-18 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab, Slot 2 E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 322 Control Panel Options Power Depending on the Software Revision, some devices may have a Schemes tab. Factory Default Settings Switch state to User Idle Switch state to System Idle Switch state to Suspen Never Never Never The Schemes tab can be used to control the display backlight and shut the VX6 Off. The mode timers are cumulative. The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired. For example, if the User Idle timer is set to Never, the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle, System Idle or Suspend modes. For a VX6, the User Idle state turns off the display backlight. There is no System Idle mode so the VX6 remains in User Idle mode until the Suspend timer expires or a primary even occurs. Please see “Power Modes” in Chapter 2, “Physical Description and Layout”. IMPORTANT: There is no Suspend mode on the VX6. If the Suspend timer is enabled, the VX6 will shut down when the Suspend timer expires. Figure C-19 Power Properties The Device Status tab displays the status of power managed devices. Note that since the VX6 does not support power management, all devices show the “high” power level. There are no user options on this screen. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 323 Regional Settings Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Regional Settings Set the appearance of numbers, currency, time and date based on regional and language settings. Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Options (and defaults) for the regional settings depend on the fonts included in the OS image. Please refer to the section on the About control panel earlier in this chapter for more details. Factory Default Settings Regional Setting English (United States) Number 123,456,789.00 / -123,456,789.00 neg Currency $123,456,789.00 pos / ($123,456,789.00) neg Time h:mm:ss tt (tt=AM or PM) Date M/d/yy short / dddd,MMMM,dd,yyyy long Tap the Customize button to set Number, Currency, Time and Date format for the selected Locale. Remove Programs Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Remove Programs No change from general desktop Remove Programs options. Select a program and click Remove. Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user-installed only programs. The change takes effect immediately. Scanner Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge, scanner icon appearance, active scanner port, and scan key settings. Assign baud rate, parity, stop bits and data bits for available COM ports. To set the Scanner parameters, please see Chapter 4, “Scanner” for details. Storage Manager Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Storage Manager Installed storage devices are listed by device name in the dropdown box. To view information about the disk or perform store operations, select a device from the list. On-line help is available for this option. Topics available are: • Manage storage devices • Manage disk partitions • Creating a new partition • Advanced partition features LXE recommends caution when formatting or dismounting storage devices and when creating new partitions or deleting partitions on the storage device. The internal ATA (System) card does not appear in the Storage Manager menu. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 324 Control Panel Options Stylus Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and/or calibrate the touch panel. Double Tap Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Calibration Figure C-20 Stylus Properties / Recalibration Start Figure C-21 Stylus Properties / Recalibration VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 325 System Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | System Icon Review System and Computer data and revision levels. Adjust Storage and Program memory settings. Factory Default Settings General N/A Memory 1/3 storage, 2/3 program memory Device Name VXC0001 Device LXE_VXC Description Copyrights N/A General Figure C-22 System / General tab System: This screen is presented for information only. The System parameters cannot be changed by the user. Computer: The processor type is listed. The type cannot be changed by the user. The name of the installed radio card is listed in the dropdown list. Total computer memory and the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user. Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system. Hence, a system with 64 MB may only report 35 MB memory, since 29 MB is used up by the Windows CE operating system. This is actual DRAM memory, and does not include internal flash or the internal ATA card used for storage. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 326 Control Panel Options Memory Figure C-23 System / Memory Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage. If there isn’t enough space for a file, increase the amount of storage memory. If the VX6 is running slowly, try increasing the amount of program memory. Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Device Name Figure C-24 System / Device Name The device name and description can be changed. Enter the name and description using either the keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Copyrights This screen is presented for information only. The Copyrights information cannot be changed by the user. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Control Panel Options 327 Volume and Sounds Access: Start | Settings | Control Panel | Volume & Sounds Icon Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE events. Factory Default Settings Volume Events Enabled Application Enabled Notifications Enabled Volume Middle of Bar Key click Loud Screen tap Loud Sounds Scheme LOUD! Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes. The changes take effect immediately. Figure C-25 Volume and Sounds E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 328 VX6 Reference Guide Control Panel Options E-EQ-VX6RG-J Appendix D Reference Material Introduction Contents of this Appendix include: • AppLock Error Messages and Registry Settings • Revision History and the following charts: E-EQ-VX6RG-J • Valid VK Codes for CE • ASCII Control Codes • Hat Encoding • Decimal-Hexadecimal Chart VX6 Reference Guide 330 AppLock Error Messages AppLock Error Messages Any messages whose first word is an ‘ing’ word is output prior to the action described in the message. For example, “Switching to admin-hotkey press” is logged after the administrator has pressed the hotkey but prior to starting the switch process. For all operations that can result in an error, an Error level message is displayed when a failure occurs. These messages contain the word “failure”. These messages have a partner Extended level message that is logged which contains the word “OK” if the action completed successfully rather than with an error. For processing level messages, “Enter…” is logged at the beginning of the function specified in the message and “Exit…” is logged at the end (just before the return) of the function specified in the message. Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Error reading hotkey The hotkey is read but not required by AppLock. LOG_EX Error reading hotkey; using default A hotkey is required. If there is a failure reading the hotkey, the internal factory default is used. LOG_ERROR App Command Line= Command line of the application being locked LOG_PROCESSING App= Name of the application being locked LOG_PROCESSING dwProcessID= <#> Device ID of the application being locked LOG_EX Encrypt exported key len <#> Size of encrypt export key LOG_EX Encrypt password length= <#> The length of the encrypted password. LOG_EX Encrypted data len <#> Length of the encrypted password LOG_EX hProcess= <#> Handle of the application being locked LOG_EX Key pressed = <#> A key has been pressed and trapped by the hotkey processing. LOG_EX ***************** The status information is being saved to a file and the file has been opened successfully. LOG_EX Address of keyboard hook procedure failure AppLock found the kbdhook.dll, but was unable to get the address of the initialization procedure. For some reason the dll is corrupted. Look in the \Windows directory for kbdhook.dll. If it exists, delete it. Also delete AppLock.exe from the \Windows directory and reboot the unit. Deleting AppLock.exe triggers the AppLock system to reload. LOG_ERROR Address of keyboard hook procedure OK AppLock successfully retrieved the address of the keyboard filter initialization procedure. LOG_EX VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J AppLock Error Messages 331 Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Alt pressed The Alt key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing. LOG_EX Alt Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Application handle search failure The application being locked did not complete initialization. LOG_ERROR Application handle search OK The application initialized itself successfully LOG_ERROR Application load failure The application could not be launched by AppLock; the application could not be found or is corrupted. LOG_ERROR Backdoor message received The backdoor keys have been pressed. The backdoor hotkeys provide a method for customer service to get a user back into their system without editing the registry or reloading the device. LOG_PROCESSING Cannot find kbdhook.dll The load of the keyboard filter failed. This occurs when the dll is missing or is corrupted. Look in the \Windows directory for kbdhook.dll. If it exists, delete it. Also delete AppLock.exe from the \Windows directory and reboot the unit. Deleting AppLock.exe triggers the AppLock system to reload. LOG_ERROR Converted Pwd Converted password from wide to mbs. LOG_EX Could not create event EVT_HOTKEYCHG The keyboard filter uses this event at the Administrator Control panel. The event could not be created. LOG_ERROR Could not hook keyboard If the keyboard cannot be controlled, AppLock cannot process the hotkey. This failure prevents a mode switch into user mode. LOG_ERROR Could not start thread HotKeyMon The keyboard filter must watch for hot key changes. The watch process could not be initiated. LOG_ERROR Ctrl after L or X Processing the backdoor entry. LOG_EX Ctrl pressed The Ctrl key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing. LOG_EX Ctrl Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry. LOG_EX Decrypt acquire context failure Unable to decrypt password. LOG_ERROR Decrypt acquired context OK Decryption process ok. LOG_EX Decrypt create hash failure Unable to decrypt password. LOG_ERROR Decrypt created hash OK Decryption process ok. LOG_EX Decrypt failure Unable to decrypt password. LOG_ERROR E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 332 AppLock Error Messages Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Decrypt import key failure Unable to decrypt password. LOG_ERROR Decrypt imported key OK Decryption process ok. LOG_EX Encrypt acquire context failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt acquire encrypt context failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt acquired encrypt context OK Encrypt password process successful. LOG_EX Encrypt create hash failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt create key failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt created encrypt hash OK Encrypt password process successful. LOG_EX Encrypt export key failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt export key length failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt exported key OK Encrypt password process successful. LOG_EX Encrypt failure The password encryption failed. LOG_ERROR Encrypt gen key failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt generate key failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt get user key failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt get user key ok Encrypt password process successful. LOG_EX Encrypt hash data failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt hash data from pwd OK Encrypt password process successful. LOG_EX Encrypt length failure Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypt out of memory for key Unable to encrypt password. LOG_ERROR Encrypted data OK The password has been successfully encrypted. LOG_EX Enter AppLockEnumWindows In order for AppLock to control the application being locked so it can prevent the application from exiting, AppLock launches the application and has to wait until it has created and initialized its main window. This message is logged when the function that waits for the application initialization is entered. LOG_EX Enter DecryptPwd Entering the password decryption process. LOG_PROCESSING VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J AppLock Error Messages 333 Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Enter EncryptPwd Entering the password encryption processing. LOG_PROCESSING Enter FullScreenMode Entering the function that switches the screen mode. In full screen mode, the taskbar is hidden and disabled. LOG_PROCESSING Enter GetAppInfo Processing is at the beginning of the function that retrieves the application information from the registry. LOG_PROCESSING Enter password dialog Entering the password dialog processing. LOG_PROCESSING Enter password timeout Entering the password timeout processing. LOG_PROCESSING Enter restart app timer Some application shut down before AppLock can stop it. In these cases, AppLock gets notification of the exit. When the notification is received, AppLock starts a timer to restart the application. This message logs that the timer has expired and the processing is at the beginning of the timer function. LOG_PROCESSING Enter TaskbarScreenMode Entering the function that switches the screen to non-full screen mode and enable the taskbar. LOG_PROCESSING Enter ToAdmin Entering the function that handles a mode switch into admin mode. LOG_PROCESSING Enter ToUser Entering the function that handles the mode switch to user mode LOG_PROCESSING Enter verify password Entering the password verification processing. LOG_PROCESSING Exit AppLockEnumWindowsFound There are two exit paths from the enumeration function. This message denotes the enumeration function found the application. LOG_PROCESSING Exit AppLockEnumWindows-Not found There are two exit paths from the enumeration function. This message denotes the enumeration function did not find the application. LOG_PROCESSING Exit DecryptPwd Exiting password decryption processing. LOG_PROCESSING Exit EncryptPwd Exiting password encryption processing. LOG_PROCESSING Exit FullScreenMode Exiting the function that switches the screen to full screen. LOG_PROCESSING Exit GetAppInfo Processing is at the end of the function that retrieved the application information from the registry. LOG_PROCESSING Exit password dialog Exiting password prompt processing. LOG_PROCESSING Exit password dialog-cancel Exiting password prompt w/cancel. LOG_PROCESSING Exit password dialog-OK Exiting password prompt successfully. LOG_PROCESSING E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 334 AppLock Error Messages Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Exit password timeout Exiting password timeout processing. LOG_PROCESSING Exit restart app timer Processing is at the end of the timer function LOG_PROCESSING Exit TaskbarScreenMode Exiting the function that switches the screen mode back to normal operation for the administrator. LOG_PROCESSING Exit ToAdmin Exiting the function that handles the mode switch into admin mode. LOG_PROCESSING Exit ToUser Exiting the user mode switch function. LOG_PROCESSING Exit ToUser-Registry read failure The AppName value does not exist in the registry so user mode cannot be entered. LOG_PROCESSING Exit verify password-no pwd set Exiting password verification. LOG_PROCESSING Exit verify password-response from dialog Exiting password verification. LOG_PROCESSING Found taskbar The handle to the taskbar has been found so that AppLock can disable it in user mode. LOG_PROCESSING Getting address of keyboard hook init procedure AppLock is retrieving the address of the keyboard hook. LOG_PROCESSING Getting configuration from registry The AppLock configuration is being read from the registry. This occurs at initialization and also at entry into user mode. The registry must be re-read at entry into user mode in case the administration changed the settings of the application being controlled. LOG_PROCESSING Getting encrypt pwd length The length of the encrypted password is being calculated. LOG_EX Hook wndproc failure AppLock is unable to lock the application. This could happen if the application being locked encountered an error after performing its initialization and shut itself down prior to being locked by AppLock. LOG_ERROR Hook wndproc of open app failure The application is open, but AppLock cannot lock it. LOG_ERROR Hot key event creation failure The Admin applet is unable to create the hotkey notification. LOG_ERROR Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Hot key set event failure When the administrator changes the hotkey configuration the hotkey controller must be notified. This notification failed. LOG_ERROR Hotkey press message received The user just pressed the configured hotkey. LOG_PROCESSING VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J AppLock Error Messages 335 Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level In app hook:WM_SIZE In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting, AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application’s window. This message traps a change in the window size and corrects it. LOG_EX In app hook:WM_WINDOWPOSCHANG ED In addition to preventing the locked application from exiting, AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application’s window. This message traps a change in the window position and corrects it. LOG_EX Initializing keyboard hook procedure AppLock is calling the keyboard hook initialization. LOG_PROCESSING Keyboard hook initialization failure The keyboard filter initialization failed. LOG_ERROR Keyboard hook loaded OK The keyboard hook dll exists and loaded successfully. LOG_EX L after Ctrl Processing the backdoor entry. LOG_EX Loading keyboard hook When AppLock first loads, it loads a dll that contains the keyboard hook processing. This message is logged prior to the load attempt. LOG_PROCESSING Open failure The status information is being saved to a file and the file open has failed. This could occur if the file is write protected. If the file does not exist, it is created. LOG_ERROR Open registry failure If the Administration registry key does not exist, the switch to user mode fails because the AppName value in the Administration key is not available. LOG_ERROR Opened status file The status information is being saved to a file and the file has been opened successfully. LOG_EX Out of memory for encrypted pwd Not enough memory to encrypt the password. LOG_ERROR pRealTaskbarWndProc already set The taskbar control has already been installed. LOG_EX Pwd cancelled or invalid-remain in user mode The password prompt was cancelled by the user or the maximum number of failed attempts to enter a password was exceeded. LOG_EX Read registry error-hot key The hotkey registry entry is missing or empty. This is not considered an error. The keyboard hook uses an embedded default if the value is not set in the registry. LOG_ERROR Read registry failure-app name AppName registry value does not exist or is empty. This constitutes a failure for switching into user mode. LOG_ERROR E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 336 AppLock Error Messages Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Read registry failure-Cmd Line AppCommandLine registry entry is missing or empty. This is not considered an error since command line information is not necessary to launch and lock the application. LOG_ERROR Read registry failure-Internet The Internet registry entry is missing or empty. This is not considered an error since the Internet value is not necessary to launch and lock the application. LOG_ERROR Registering Backdoor MSG The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message. Both AppLock.exe and Kbdhook.dll register the message at initialization. LOG_PROCESSING Registering Hotkey MSG The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message. Both Applock.exe and Kbdhook.dll register the message at initialization. LOG_PROCESSING Registry read failure at reenter user mode The registry has to be read when entering user mode is the AppName is missing. This user mode entry is attempted at boot and after a hotkey switch when the administrator has closed the application being locked or has changed the application name or command line. LOG_ERROR Registry read failure at reenter user mode The registry has to be read when switching into user mode. This is because the administrator can change the settings during administration mode. The read of the registry failed which means the Administration key was not found or the AppName value was missing or empty. LOG_ERROR Registry read failure The registry read failed. The registry information read when this message is logged is the application information. It the Administration key cannot be opened or if the AppName value is missing or empty, this error is logged. The other application information is not required. If the AppName value is not available, AppLock cannot switch into user mode. LOG_ERROR Reset system work area failure The system work area is adjusted when in user mode to cover the taskbar area. The system work area has to be adjusted to exclude the taskbar area in administration mode. AppLock was unable to adjust this area. LOG_ERROR Shift pressed The Shift key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing. LOG_EX Shift Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Show taskbar The taskbar is now being made visible and enabled. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to admin-backdoor The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode. The switch occurred because of the backdoor key presses were entered by the administrator. LOG_PROCESSING VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J AppLock Error Messages 337 Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Switching to admin-hotkey press The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode. The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to admin-kbdhook.dll not found The keyboard hook load failed, so AppLock switches to admin mode. If a password is specified, the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to admin-keyboard hook initialization failure If the keyboard hook initialization fails, AppLock switches to admin mode. If a password is specified, the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to admin-registry read failure See the explanation of the “Registry read failure” above. AppLock is switching into Admin mode. If a password has been configured, the prompt will be displayed and will not be dismissed until a valid password is entered. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to TaskbarScreenMode In administration mode, the taskbar is visible and enabled. LOG_EX Switching to user mode The registry was successfully read and AppLock is starting the process to switch to user mode. LOG_PROCESSING Switching to user-hotkey press The system is currently in admin mode and is now switching to user mode. The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator. LOG_PROCESSING Taskbar hook failure AppLock is unable to control the taskbar to prevent the locked application from re-enabling it. LOG_ERROR Taskbar hook OK AppLock successfully installed control of the taskbar. LOG_EX Timeout looking for app window After the application is launched, AppLock must wait until the application has initialized itself before proceeding. The application did not start successfully and AppLock has timed out. LOG_ERROR ToUser after admin, not at boot The user mode switch is attempted when the device boots and after the administrator presses the hotkey. The mode switch is being attempted after a hotkey press. LOG_EX ToUser after admin-app still open The switch to user mode is being made via a hotkey press and the administrator has left the application open and has not made any changes in the configuration. LOG_EX ToUser after admin-no app or cmd line change If user mode is being entered via a hotkey press, the administrator may have left the configured application open. If so, AppLock does not launch the application again unless a new application or command line has been specified; otherwise, it just locks it. LOG_EX E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 338 AppLock Error Messages Message Explanation and/or corrective action Level Unable to move desktop The desktop is moved when switching into user mode. This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer. This error does not affect the screen mode switch; processing continues. LOG_ERROR Unable to move taskbar The taskbar is moved when switching into user mode. This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer. This error does not affect the screen mode switch; processing continues. LOG_ERROR Unhook taskbar wndproc failure AppLock could not remove its control of the taskbar. This error does not affect AppLock processing LOG_ERROR Unhook wndproc failure AppLock could not remove the hook that allows monitoring of the application. LOG_ERROR Unhooking taskbar In administration mode, the taskbar should return to normal operation, so AppLock’s control of the taskbar should be removed. LOG_EX Unhooking wndproc When the administrator leaves user mode, the device is fully operational; therefore, AppLock must stop monitoring the locked application. LOG_EX WM_SIZE adjusted This message denotes that AppLock has readjusted the window size. LOG_EX X after Ctrl+L Processing the backdoor entry. LOG_EX Ret from password <#> Return value from password dialog. LOG_EX Decrypt data len <#> Length of decrypted password. LOG_EX Window handle to enumwindows=%x The window handle that is passed to the enumeration function. This message can be used by engineering with other development tools to trouble shoot application lock failures. LOG_EX WM_WINDOWPOSCHG adjusted=%x Output the window size after it has been adjusted by AppLock LOG_EX VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J AppLock Registry Settings 339 AppLock Registry Settings This system application runs at startup via the “launch” feature of LXE Windows CE devices. When the launch feature is installed on the device, the following registry settings are created. The launch feature registry settings are embedded in the mobile device OS image: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\Filename=AppLock.exe HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\Installed= HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Persist\\FileCheck= AppLock registry settings identify the application that is going to be locked and any parameters that are needed by the application. These registry settings are as follows: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\Administration\\AppName HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppCommandLine= In addition to the registry settings needed to specify the application, additional registry settings are needed to store the configuration options for AppLock. These options include, among others, the administrator’s password and hotkey. HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppLock\\Administration\\HotKey= HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\Software\\LXE\\AppLock\\Administration\\EP= E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 340 Valid VK Codes for CE Valid VK Codes for CE This is the list of codes parsed by KEYCOMP compiler. Refer to Microsoft Windows documentation for further clarification of the meaning of these key codes. Any VK keys not defined here are not valid for use under Windows CE . VK_ADD VK_APOSTROPHE VK_APPS VK_ATTN VK_BACK VK_BACKQUOTE VK_BACKSLASH VK_BROWSER_BACK VK_BROWSER_FAVORITES VK_BROWSER_FORWARD VK_BROWSER_HOME VK_BROWSER_REFRESH VK_BROWSER_SEARCH VK_BROWSER_STOP VK_CANCEL VK_CAPITAL VK_CLEAR VK_COMMA VK_CONTROL VK_CONVERT VK_CRSEL VK_DECIMAL VK_DELETE VK_DIVIDE VK_DOWN VK_END VK_EQUAL VK_EREOF VK_ESCAPE VK_EXECUTE VK_EXSEL VK_F1 VK_F10 VK_F11 VK_F12 VK_F13 VK_F14 VK_F15 VK_F16 VK_F17 VK_F18 VK_F19 VK_F2 VK_F20 VK_F21 VK_F22 VK_F23 VK_F24 VX6 Reference Guide VK_F3 VK_F4 VK_F5 VK_F6 VK_F7 VK_F8 VK_F9 VK_FINAL VK_HANGUL VK_HANJA VK_HELP VK_HOME VK_HYPHEN VK_INSERT VK_JUNJA VK_KANA VK_KANJI VK_LAUNCH_APP1 VK_LAUNCH_APP2 VK_LAUNCH_MAIL VK_LAUNCH_MEDIA_SELECT VK_LBRACKET VK_LBUTTON VK_LCONTROL VK_LEFT VK_LMENU VK_LSHIFT VK_LWIN VK_MBUTTON VK_MEDIA_NEXT_TRACK VK_MEDIA_PLAY_PAUSE VK_MEDIA_PREV_TRACK VK_MEDIA_STOP VK_MENU VK_MULTIPLY VK_NEXT VK_NOCONVERT VK_NONAME VK_NUMLOCK VK_NUMPAD0 VK_NUMPAD1 VK_NUMPAD2 VK_NUMPAD3 VK_NUMPAD4 VK_NUMPAD5 VK_NUMPAD6 VK_NUMPAD7 VK_NUMPAD8 VK_NUMPAD9 VK_OEM_CLEAR VK_OFF VK_PA1 VK_PAUSE VK_PERIOD VK_PLAY VK_PRINT VK_PRIOR VK_RBRACKET VK_RBUTTON VK_RCONTROL VK_RETURN VK_RIGHT VK_RMENU VK_RSHIFT VK_RWIN VK_SCROLL VK_SELECT VK_SEMICOLON VK_SEPARATOR VK_SHIFT VK_SLASH VK_SLEEP VK_SNAPSHOT VK_SPACE VK_SUBTRACT VK_TAB VK_UP VK_VOLUME_DOWN VK_VOLUME_MUTE VK_VOLUME_UP VK_ZOOM E-EQ-VX6RG-J ASCII Control Codes 341 ASCII Control Codes The following table lists ASCII Control codes in hexadecimal and their corresponding Control-key combinations. Char Hex ControlKey Control Action NUL 0 ^@ NULL character Ctrl-Shift-` SOH 1 ^A Start Of Heading VK_CONTROL (0x11) down VK_A (0x41) down WM_CHAR (0x1) VK_A (0x41) up VK_CONTROL (0x11) up STX 2 ^B Start of TeXt Ctrl-b ETX 3 ^C End of TeXt Ctrl-c EOT 4 ^D End Of Transmission Ctrl-d ENQ 5 ^E ENQuiry Ctrl-e ACK 6 ^F ACKnowledge Ctrl-f BEL 7 ^G BELl, rings terminal bell Ctrl-g BS 8 ^H BackSpace (non-destructive) Ctrl-h HT 9 ^I Horizontal Tab (move to next tab position) Ctrl-i LF a ^J Line Feed Ctrl-j VT b ^K Vertical Tab Ctrl-k FF c ^L Form Feed Ctrl-l CR d ^M Carriage Return Ctrl-m SO e ^N Shift Out Ctrl-n SI f ^O Shift In Ctrl-o DLE 10 ^P Data Link Escape Ctrl-p DC1 11 ^Q Device Control 1, normally XON Ctrl-q DC2 12 ^R Device Control 2 Ctrl-r DC3 13 ^S Device Control 3, normally XOFF Ctrl-s DC4 14 ^T Device Control 4 Ctrl-t NAK 15 ^U Negative AcKnowledge Ctrl-u SYN 16 ^V SYNchronous idle Ctrl-v ETB 17 ^W End Transmission Block Ctrl-w E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 342 ASCII Control Codes Char Hex ControlKey CAN 17 ^X CANcel line Ctrl-x EM 19 ^Y End of Medium Ctrl-y SUB 1a ^Z SUBstitute Ctrl-z ESCape VK_CONTROL (0x11)down VK_PACKET (0xe7) down WM_CHAR 0x1b VK_PACKET up VK_CONTROL up File Separator VK_CONTROL (0x11)down VK_PACKET (0xe7) down WM_CHAR 0x1c VK_PACKET up VK_CONTROL up Group Separator VK_CONTROL (0x11)down VK_PACKET (0xe7) down WM_CHAR 0x1d down WM_CHAR (0x1d) up VK_PACKET up VK_CONTROL up Record Separator VK_CONTROL (0x11)down VK_SHIFT (0x10) down WM_CHAR 0x36 down WM_CHAR 0x36 up VK_SHIFT up VK_CONTROL up Unit Separator VK_CONTROL (0x11) down VK_SHIFT (0x10) down VK_PACKET (0xe7) down WM_CHAR 0x1f VK_PACKET (0xe7) up VK_SHIFT (0x10) up VK_CONTROL (0x11) up ESC FS GS RS US 1b 1c 1d 1e 1f VX6 Reference Guide ^[ ^\ ^] ^^ ^_ Control Action E-EQ-VX6RG-J Hat Encoding 343 Hat Encoding The VX6 supports only 7-bit hat encoding which means only ^@ through ^_ (underscore) are supported. Desired ASCII NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI DLE DC1 (XON) DC2 DC3 (XOFF) DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US IND NEL SSA ® ¯ ° ± E-EQ-VX6RG-J Hex Value Hat Encoded Desired ASCII Hex Value Hat Encoded 0X00 0X01 0X02 0X03 0X04 0X05 0X06 0X07 0X08 0X09 0X0A 0X0B 0X0C 0X0D 0X0E 0X0F 0X10 0X11 0X12 0X13 0X14 0X15 0X16 0X17 0X18 0X19 0X1A 0X1B 0X1C 0X1D 0X1E 0X1F 0X7F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 AE AF B0 B1 ^@ ^A ^B ^C ^D ^E ^F ^G ^H ^I ^J ^K ^L ^M ^N ^O ^P ^Q ^R ^S ^T ^U ^V ^W ^X ^Y ^Z ^[ ^\\ ^] ^^ ^_ (Underscore) ^? ~^@ ~^A ~^B ~^C ~^D ~^E ~^F ~. (Period) ~/ ~0 (Zero) ~1 ESA HTS HTJ VTS PLD PLU RI SS2 SS3 DCS PU1 PU2 STS CCH MW SPA EPA CSI ST OSC PM APC (no-break space) ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ 87 88 89 8A 8B 8C 8D 8E 8F 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9A 9B 9C 9D 9E 9F A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 ~^G ~^H ~^I ~^J ~^K ~^L ~^M ~^N ~^O ~^P ~^Q ~^R ~^S ~^T ~^U ~^V ~^W ~^X ~^Y ~^Z ~^[ ~^\\ ~^] ~^^ ~^_ (Underscore) ~ (Tilde and Space) ~! ~” ~# ~$ ~% ~& § ¨ © ª « ¬ (soft hyphen) × Ø Ù Ú A7 A8 A9 AA AB AC AD D7 D8 D9 DA ~’ ~( ~) ~* ~+ ~, ~- (Dash) ~W ~X ~Y ~Z VX6 Reference Guide 344 Hat Encoding Desired ASCII Hex Value Hat Encoded Desired ASCII Hex Value ² ³ ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿ À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï Ð Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 BA BB BC BD BE BF C0 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 CA CB CC CD CE CF D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 ~2 ~3 ~4 ~5 ~6 ~7 ~8 ~9 ~: ~; ~< ~= ~> ~? ~@ ~A ~B ~C ~D ~E ~F ~G ~H ~I ~J ~K ~L ~M ~N ~O ~P ~Q ~R ~S ~T ~U ~V Û Ü Ý Þ ß à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ DB DC DD DE DF E0 E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF F0 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF VX6 Reference Guide Hat Encoded ~[ ~\\ ~] ~\^ ~_ (Underscore) ~` ~a ~b ~c ~d ~e ~f ~g ~h ~i ~j ~k ~l ~m ~n ~o ~p ~q ~r ~s ~t ~u ~v ~w ~x ~y ~z ~{ ~| ~} ~~ ~^? E-EQ-VX6RG-J Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart 345 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13 0x14 0x15 0x16 0x17 0x18 0x19 0x1A 0x1B 0x1C 0x1D 0x1E 0x1F 0x20 0x21 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x25 0x26 0x27 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 0x28 0x29 0x2A 0x2B 0x2C 0x2D 0x2E 0x2F 0x30 0x31 0x32 0x33 0x34 0x35 0x36 0x37 0x38 0x39 0x3A 0x3B 0x3C 0x3D 0x3E 0x3F 0x40 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x45 0x46 0x47 0x48 0x49 0x4A 0x4B 0x4C 0x4D 0x4E 0x4F 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 0x50 0x51 0x52 0x53 0x54 0x55 0x56 0x57 0x58 0x59 0x5A 0x5B 0x5C 0x5D 0x5E 0x5F 0x60 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x64 0x65 0x66 0x67 0x68 0x69 0x6A 0x6B 0x6C 0x6D 0x6E 0x6F 0x70 0x71 0x72 0x73 0x74 0x75 0x76 0x77 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 0x78 0x79 0x7A 0x7B 0x7C 0x7D 0x7E 0x7F 0x80 0x81 0x82 0x83 0x84 0x85 0x86 0x87 0x88 0x89 0x8A 0x8B 0x8C 0x8D 0x8E 0x8F 0x90 0x91 0x92 0x93 0x94 0x95 0x96 0x97 0x98 0x99 0x9A 0x9B 0x9C 0x9D 0x9E 0x9F Figure D-1 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart (0 to 159 Decimal) E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 346 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 0xA0 0xA1 0xA2 0xA3 0xA4 0xA5 0xA6 0xA7 0xA8 0xA9 0xAA 0xAB 0xAC 0xAD 0xAE 0xAF 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 0xC8 0xC9 0xCA 0xCB 0xCC 0xCD 0xCE 0xCF 0xD0 0xD1 0xD2 0xD3 0xD4 0xD5 0xD6 0xD7 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 0xB0 0xB1 0xB2 0xB3 0xB4 0xB5 0xB6 0xB7 0xB8 0xB9 0xBA 0xBB 0xBC 0xBD 0xBE 0xBF 0xC0 0xC1 0xC2 0xC3 0xC4 0xC5 0xC6 0xC7 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 0xD8 0xD9 0xDA 0xDB 0xDC 0xDD 0xDE 0xDF 0xE0 0xE1 0xE2 0xE3 0xE4 0xE5 0xE6 0xE7 0xE8 0xE9 0xEA 0xEB 0xEC 0xED 0xEE 0xEF 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 0xF0 0xF1 0xF2 0xF3 0xF4 0xF5 0xF6 0xF7 0xF8 0xF9 0xFA 0xFB 0xFC 0xFD 0xFE 0xFF Figure D-2 Decimal - Hexadecimal Chart (160 to 255 Decimal) VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Revision History 347 Revision History Revision A, Initial Release: November 2004 Revision B: August 2005 Section Explanation Chapter 1 – Introduction Revised “Document Conventions”, “When To Use This Guide”, “Touchscreen and Mouse” and “Accessories” sections. Specified the proper USB adapter cable to use in “Connect” section. Chapter 2 – Physical Description and Layout Added “Identifying Your VX6”, “USB Keyboard/Mouse” and “Touchscreen Heater” sections. Updated “The Keyboards”, “CAPS LED”, “On/Off Switch”, “General Windows CE .NET Keyboard Shortcuts” and “Ethernet/USB Dongle Cable” sections. Replaced “CapsLock, Scroll Lock and the VX6” section with “CapsLock and the VX6” and “Scroll Lock and the VX6” sections. Replaced “Antenna Connector” section with “Antenna Connections” section. Chapter 4 – System Configuration Revised “About”, “administrator Control”, “LAUNCH.EXE”, “Reflash the VX6”, “Cisco Aironet Configuration Utility (ACU)”, “Symbol”, “Accessibility” and “Date/Time” sections. Added “2.4GHz Radio Configuration”, “Disabling the Touchscreen Heater”, “Configuring CapsLock Behavior” and “Configuring IPv6 Broadcast Messages” sections. Removed “Cisco – Aironet Configuration Utility (ACU)” and “Symbol” sections. This information is now included in Chapter 5. Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Added new chapter containing sections removed from Chapter 4. Appendix A – Key Maps Revised “Keymap Source Format” and “COLxROWx Format” sections. Revision C: October 2005 Section Explanation Chapter 1 – Introduction Updated “When To Use This Guide”. Updated “Accessories” list. Chapter 4 – System Configuration Renamed “Configuring IPv6 Broadcast Messages” section to “Configuring IPv6” and revised section. Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Revised “Introduction” and “Cisco – Aironet Client Utility (ACU)” section. Renamed “Configuring VX6 Radio” to “Configuring VX6 Radio Without WPA”. Added “WPA for the VX6” section. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 348 Revision History Revision D: 2006 Section Explanation Entire Manual Updated all images with the new LXE logo. Notices Updated copyrights and trademarks. Chapter 1 – Introduction Revised “Accessories” listing. Chapter 2 – Physical Description and Layout Revised “On/Off Switch”, “Scanner Serial Connector (COM1)”, “Printer/PC Serial Connector (COM3)”, “Install the 2.4GHz Type II PCMCIA Radio”, “Custom Key Maps”, “Input Panel (Virtual Keyboard)”, “Video Subsystem” and “The Display” . Added new section: “Technical Specifications – Screen Blanking Cable”. Chapter 3 – Power Supply Revised “VX6 Input Power Specifications”. Chapter 4 – System Configuration Revised “Installed Software”, “Start Menu Program Options”, “Network and Dialup Connections”, “Control Panel Options”, “About”, “Date/Time”, “Keyboard”, “Password”, “Regional Settings”, “Remote Desktop Connection”, “Scanner”, “Storage Manager”, “LAUNCH.EXE” and “Reflash the VX6” sections. Added new sections: “Folders Copies at Startup” and “Enabling GrabTime”. Removed section: “Bluetooth Manager”. Renamed “VX6 Command Line Utility” to “VX6 Command Line Utilities” and updated section. Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Revised “Profiles Tab” section. Split radio configuration section into two sections “Cisco Radio” and “Symbol radio”. Added a new section, “Summit Radio”. Each section contains the manufacturer specific configuration information. Moved all certificate generating and installation instructions to a new “Certificates” section. Chapter 6 – AppLock New chapter. Information previously included in Appendix B is now referred to as “Single Application”. Added Multi Application AppLock to chapter. Appendix A – Key Maps Revised section “Creating Custom Keymaps for the VX6”. Appendix B – Technical Specifications Added “Revision History” to appendix. Added Summit Radio Technical Specifications. Appendix C – AppLock Deleted appendix. Information is now included in Chapter 6, AppLock. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Revision History 349 Revision E: November 2006 Section Explanation Notices Added Wavelink trademark information. Chapter 1 – Introduction Revised “When to Use this Guide”. Chapter 2 – Physical Description and Layout Added information that was previously included in Chapter 3, “Power Supply”. Chapter 3 – Power Supply Deleted chapter. This information is now included in Chapter 2, “Physical Description and Layout”. Chapter 4 – System Configuration Renamed to Chapter 3, “System Configuration”. Revised “Software Load”, “LAUNCH.EXE”, Control Panel Options” and “Scanner” section. Scanner information is now included in Chapter 6, “Scanner”. Added new section “Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration”. Chapter 4 – Scanner Created new chapter with scanner information removed from Chapter 4, “System Configuration” and updated as necessary. Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Revised “Summit Radio” section to include new Sign-On screen and support for PEAP-GTC. Chapter 6 – AppLock Revised “Setup A New Device”. Revision F: November 2007 Section Explanation Entire Manual Added CE 5.0 information and instruction where applicable. Chapter 1 – Introduction Added Bluetooth information. Revised “Accessories” listing. Chapter 2 – Physical Description and Layout Added Bluetooth information. Revised “Vehicle 12-80VDC Power Connection” with updated graphic. Chapter 3 – System Configuration Added Bluetooth information. Revised “Mixer” and “Step 3: Check Barcode Length” sections. Revised “Enabling GrabTime”. Revised “Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration” for Avalanche Mobility Center. Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Updated chapter for EAP-FAST support, tray icon, help feature, etc. included in latest version of SCU. Revised section: “Admin login”. E-EQ-VX6RG-J VX6 Reference Guide 350 Revision History Revision G: May 2008 Section Explanation Chapter 1 – Introduction Revised “Accessories” listing. Chapter 2 – Physical Description and Layout Revised “Install the 2.4GHz Type II PCMCIA Radio” and “NumLock and the VX6”. Chapter 3 – System Configuration Revised “Control Panel Options”, “Vehicle 12-80VDC Direct Connection” and “Enabler Configuration”. Added “Wi-Fi” and “eXpress Scan” sections. Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Revised the following sections: “Introduction”, “Summit Radio”, “Summit Client Utility”, “Main Tab”. Revised Profile Tab parameters: “Radio Mode” and “TxPower”. Revised Global Tab parameters: “TX Diversity”, “Rx Diversity”. Added Global Tab parameter: “DFS Channels”. Appendix A – Key maps Revised NumLock information. Appendix B – Technical Specifications Revised “Network Device Specifications”. Revision H: September 2008 Section Explanation Chapter 1 - Introduction Added section “Configuring the VX6 with LXEConnect”. Chapter 2 – Physical Description and Layout Revised section “Custom Key Maps”. Chapter 3 – System Configuration Removed sections “Storage Manager”, “Disabling the Touchscreen”, “Disabling the Touchscreen Heater”, “Configuring CapsLock Behavior”, “Configuring IPv6” and “Enabling GrabTime”. Revised sections “Control Panel Options”and “LAUNCH.EXE”. Added section “KeyPad”, “MX3-VXC Options”. Chapter 4 – Scanner Revised chapter. Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Revised section “Summit Radio”. Chapter 6 – AppLock Added sections “Match” and “Options Tab”. Revised section “Launch Button”. Appendix A – Key Maps Removed section “Creating Custom Keymaps”. Keymapping is now in the KeyPad section of Chapter 3. Revised section: “Key Map 101-Key Equivalencies”. VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Revision History 351 Revision J: September 2008 Section Explanation Chapter 5 – Wireless Network Configuration Added sections: “Auto Profile” and “Auth Server” E-EQ-VX6RG-J Revised sections: “Main Tab”, “Radio Mode” and “Hide Password”. VX6 Reference Guide 352 Revision History VX6 Reference Guide E-EQ-VX6RG-J Index A About software, hardware, version, network IP ....88, 306 AC Adapter, Specifications ...................................287 AC to DC Power Supply .........................................69 Accessibility settings .......................................91, 309 Activation Key AppLock ...............................................................5 ActiveSync Cables..................................................................16 Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re-connection......127 Configure ............................................................16 Connect .......................................................16, 126 Create Comm Option ........................................129 Explore..............................................................126 Help.............................................................82, 300 IR port transmission....................................82, 300 Options..............................................................125 Prerequisites......................................................125 Setup Wizard.....................................................125 Troubleshooting ................................................128 Use this cable ..............................................39, 130 Version 3.7..................................................82, 300 ActiveSync version 3.8............................................13 Adapter Cable, VX1/2/4 Power Supply ..................72 Add prefix and suffix control ................................168 Admin Hotkey AppLock ...........................................................267 Allow Close ...........................................................274 Allow Connection..........................................116, 320 Antenna Connector, Location..........................................6, 8 Diversity Receive........................................................196 Transmit ......................................................195 External...............................................................50 Internal ................................................................51 API calls ................................................................134 Appearance Scheme......................................................102, 313 Application Panel ..................................................270 AppLock End-user mode ..................................................267 EUIE .................................................................275 Hotkey for Administrator..................................267 Passwords..........................................................268 E-EQ-VX6RG-J Setup .................................................................263 AppLock Registry settings ....................................339 ASCII Control Codes in hex..................................341 At Power On..................................................115, 319 Audio Connector............................................................46 Auto hide .........................................................86, 304 Auto-reconnect, Bluetooth ......................................99 B Background and Window colors ...................102, 313 Backlight timers.............................................102, 313 Barcode Data Entry .............................................................9 Enable or Disable..............................................161 Symbology Settings ..........................................163 Barcode data edit buttons........................................................166 Barcode manipulation............................................158 Barcode match list .................................................166 Barcode processing overview................................157 Barcode scanner data entry........................................9 Barcode Tab ..........................................................161 Battery CMOS, Specifications.......................................287 Battery Auto Turn Off ...................................102, 313 Baud Rate ..............................................119, 157, 323 Beeper, Specifications ...........................................287 Bluetooth barcode reader setup ...........................................21 devices ................................................................20 Initial Use............................................................17 LXEZ Pairing specification ................................33 Options................................................................18 Subsequent Use...................................................19 Bluetooth control panel ...........................................93 Bluetooth Properties panel ......................................96 Bluetooth Settings, Chart.........................................97 C CAB Files on the Flash Card.................................124 Calibration .....................................................120, 324 CAPS LOCK Mode LED Indicator.........................54 Caps-Lock Mode .....................................................54 Central Processing Unit...........................................31 Certificates.....................................................100, 310 VX6 Reference Guide 354 Root CA ............................................................249 User...................................................................253 Character Recognition Touchscreen ................................................85, 303 Cisco PEAP Suplicant.................................................224 WPA Radio Driver............................................223 Cisco Client ...........................................................222 Cisco Radio WEP ..................................................................221 Cleaning Display ................................................................60 Clear Contents of Document Folder ................86, 304 Clear persistant memory ........................................137 CMOS Battery .........................................................32 CMOS NiCd Battery ...............................................73 Code ID transmission setting.................................162 Coldboot ..................................................................24 COLDBOOT.EXE.................................................133 Color Cable Wiring.......................................................71 Color screen Backlight...................................................102, 313 COM port screen blanking .................................................176 COM port settings tab ...........................................160 COM Ports.............................................119, 157, 323 COM1/Scanner Connection, Location ......................7 COM3 Connector, Location ......................................7 Comm Ports COM1 ...........................................................36, 37 COM3 ...........................................................36, 38 Command Prompt............................................84, 302 Component Locations............................................6, 8 Computer Friendly Name ........................................98 Configuration AppLock ...........................................................270 Ethernet.............................................................137 Connect ActiveSync..................................................83, 301 Connect Using ...............................................116, 320 Connector Audio ..................................................................46 USB.....................................................................41 Connectors...............................................................36 Connectors, Specifications ....................................287 Contrast Up and Down Not applicable .....................................................56 Control characters..................................................169 Control Keys, location.............................................56 Control Panel options ......................................87, 305 Controller (Video), Specifications.........................287 Copyrights .....................................................122, 326 CPU .....................................................................1, 31 Create a dialup, direct, or VPN connection ...113, 317 VX6 Reference Guide Index Ctrl Char Mapping.........................................161, 169 Current Time .................................................100, 311 Custom ID parameters .........................................................171 Custom identifiers .................................................170 Custom Identifiers .................................................161 D Data Bits ................................................119, 157, 323 Data entry ..................................................................9 Daylight Savings ...........................................100, 311 DB9-DB9 Serial Cable Tech Specifications.....................................39, 130 Decimal - Hexadecimal Equivalent 0 - 159 ...............................................................345 160 - 255 ...........................................................346 Defaults Caps Lock ...........................................................54 Delay .............................................................105, 315 Desktop............................................................79, 297 Device Name and description........................122, 326 DHCP ............................................................113, 317 Dialup properties for dial up access ..............101, 312 Dimensions, Specifications ...................................287 Discover and Query.................................................94 Display.....................................................................31 Brightness Control Keys .....................................56 Cleaning ..............................................................60 Contrast Control Keys.........................................56 Features...............................................................60 Pixels...................................................................60 Specifications............................................287, 289 Diversity Receive..............................................................196 Transmit ............................................................195 Document Conventions .............................................3 Dot Pitch, Specifications .......................................289 E EAP-TLS Cisco Radio.......................................................240 Enable Code ID .............................................162, 170 Enable Code ID drop-down box............................161 Enable internal scanner sound ...............................159 Enable or Disable specific symbology ..................161 End user switching Touch ................................................................269 Enter Data..................................................................9 Environmental Specification .................................288 Error Messages AppLock ...........................................................330 Ethernet E-EQ-VX6RG-J Index Configuration ....................................................137 EUIE......................................................................275 Examples Barcode processing ...........................................173 Control Code replacement ................................172 raw scanner data and resulting data ..................173 Expand Control Panel......................................86, 304 External Auto Turn Off .................................102, 313 External Connectors ................................................36 Audio ..................................................................46 Power ..................................................................47 Serial .............................................................37, 38 USB.....................................................................41 External Connectors, Specifications......................287 F Factory Default Settings ATA Compact Flash Slot..........................117, 321 Cisco Client.......................................................220 Date/Time .................................................100, 311 Display ......................................................102, 313 Input Panel ................................................103, 314 Internet Options ........................................104, 315 Keyboard...................................................105, 315 Owner........................................................114, 318 Password ...................................................115, 319 PC Connection ..........................................116, 320 PCMCIA Slots ..........................................117, 321 Regional Settings ..............................................119 Scanner......................................................119, 323 System.......................................................121, 325 Volume Mixer...........................................110, 316 Factory Default, reset to ........................................137 Features .....................................................................1 Flash and Reflash ..........................................135, 136 Flash Memory............................................................1 FTP Server, start and stop ...............................83, 301 Fuse Replacement........................................................73 G General ..........................................................121, 325 Getting Started...........................................................4 H Hardware Configuration ......................................................30 Version................................................29, 180, 223 Hat Encoded Characters ........................................177 Hat Encoding and RFID ........................................343 Heater, Touchscreen ................................................60 E-EQ-VX6RG-J 355 Hexadecimal - Decimal Equivalent 0x00 to 0x9F .....................................................345 0xA0 to 0xFF ....................................................346 Hidden Keys ............................................................53 Host Connection prerequisites.................................12 Hotkey AppLock ...........................................................276 How To Initiate Page Up command..................................55 Install Radio Card ...............................................63 Keyboard data entry..............................................9 Toggle 2nd key on and off ..................................55 Toggle Caps-Lock on and off .............................55 Type .............................................................55 HyperTerminal ......................................................128 I Icons Explorer, Internet ........................................79, 297 My Computer ..............................................79, 297 My Documents............................................79, 297 Recycle Bin.................................................79, 297 Idle Time .......................................................102, 313 Input Panel.....................................................103, 314 Install Equipment Needed..............................................63 Fuse.....................................................................73 Type II 2.4GHz Radio Card....................63, 67, 68 Internet Explorer AppLock ...........................................................275 Radio card and ISP required .......................84, 302 Internet Options .............................................104, 315 CE 5.0 ...............................................................104 IP Address DHCP........................................................113, 317 Static .........................................................113, 317 K Key Map ................................................................281 101-Key Chart...................................................281 Hidden Keys .......................................................53 IBM 3270 keyboard ..........................................286 IBM 5270 keyboard ..........................................286 Keyboard 0409 ..........................................................105, 315 Backlight.............................................................53 Connector, Location..............................................7 Control Keys .......................................................56 Data entry..............................................................9 Hidden Key Functions ........................................53 LED Indicators....................................................54 Onscreen only ...........................................103, 314 VX6 Reference Guide 356 Shortcuts .............................................................57 KEYCOMP compiler ............................................340 L LAUNCH.EXE......................................................131 LEAP Cisco Radio.......................................................221 Summit Radio ...................................................206 LED indicators.........................................................54 LEDs 2nd ......................................................................55 Caps-Lock, CAPS ...............................................54 Secondary Keys ..................................................55 List configured ActiveSync connections .......116, 320 Location Antenna Connector .............................................36 COM1 and COM3...............................................36 Fuse.....................................................................36 Power DC Connector ..........................................36 Power Switch ......................................................36 Printer Port..........................................................36 RS232 ports.........................................................36 Scanner Port........................................................36 Serial Ports ..........................................................36 USB Connector ...................................................36 Logging AppLock ...........................................................279 Loss of Host Re-connection ..................................127 M MAC Address..................................................90, 308 Main...............................................................119, 323 Manuals ...................................................................25 Match list ...............................................................166 rules...................................................................167 Match List rules.....................................................167 Media Player....................................................84, 302 Memory ...................................................31, 121, 325 allocate for programs or storage................122, 326 installed .....................................................121, 325 Menu Options Start.............................................................81, 299 Modes AppLock ...........................................................267 Mouse, USB ............................................................11 Multi-Application AppLock ..................................264 My Computer Folders ........................................................80, 298 O On/Off VX6 Reference Guide Index condition of CapsLock......................................281 Switch .........................................................35, 287 Operating Temperature, Specifications .................288 Optional Power Supply............................................69 Owner Identification .............................................114, 318 Notes .........................................................114, 318 P Parity .....................................................119, 157, 323 Password........................................................115, 319 AppLock ...........................................................268 AppLock Save As .............................................279 lost at cold boot.................................................133 PC Card Slots, Location ........................................6, 8 PC Cards Plug and Play ......................................................32 PCMCIA Cards Plug and Play ......................................................32 Types, Specifications ........................................287 PCMCIA Slots.........................................................61 Disable/Enable ..........................................117, 321 PEAP/GTC Cisco Radio.......................................................232 Summit Radio ...........................................210, 216 PEAP/MSCHAP Cisco Radio.......................................................229 Summit Radio ...................................................208 Pen Stylus ..........................................................10, 60 Permanent storage of drivers and utilities .............124 Phillips No. 1 Screwdriver ......................................63 Physical Controls.....................................................35 Physical Specification............................................287 Pin 9 COM1 and Scanner.............................................37 Power ........................................................119, 323 Pin 9 Power ...........................................................157 Pinout COM1 .................................................................37 COM3 .................................................................38 Power Cable Adapting VX1/2/4 Power Supply .......................72 Power Connector .....................................................47 Location ................................................................7 Specification .....................................................287 Power Port 1 while asleep .....................................159 Power Status LED ...................................................35 Power Supply CMOS Battery ....................................................32 CMOS NiCd Battery...........................................73 Specifications....................................................287 Power Switch...........................................................35 Location ................................................................7 Specifications....................................................287 E-EQ-VX6RG-J Index PREGEDIT.EXE ...................................................133 Pre-loaded Files .......................................76, 131, 294 Printer Serial Port ....................................................38 Processing order ....................................................163 Prompt Command....................................................84, 302 Q Quick Start Instructions.............................................4 R Radio MAC Address .............................................90, 308 Radio Specifications 2.4 GHz.....................................................290, 291 Rate................................................................105, 315 Recalibration..................................................120, 324 Reflash...........................................................135, 136 Regional Setting ....................................................119 Registry and save settings........................................24 Registry content back up location ................................................124 Registry settings AppLock ...........................................................339 REGLOAD.EXE ...................................................133 Remote desktop connection.............................85, 303 Remove user installed programs....................119, 323 Repeat............................................................105, 315 Replacement ..........................................................169 Resolution................................................................31 Resolution, Specifications .....................................289 Reverse Polarity.......................................................71 Revision History....................................................347 Revision Level Hardware.............................................29, 180, 223 Software ..............................................................29 Root CA Certificates Generating.........................................................249 Installing on VX6..............................................251 RS-232 Data Entry .............................................................9 Rules match list...........................................................167 Match list ..........................................................167 S Save settings ............................................................24 Scan Keys Left and Right ...................................................157 Scanner and Pin 9 on COM1 ............................................37 E-EQ-VX6RG-J 357 Data entry..............................................................9 Scanner Control Characters Tab............................169 Screen blanking .....................................................176 Cable ...................................................................40 SD Flash Cards, CAB Files and Programs ............124 Secondary Mode LED Indicator..............................54 Security Options, Wirerless...................................179 Security Panel AppLock ...........................................................276 Security Password AppLock ...........................................................277 Send Key Messages and Wedge............................159 Serial Cable for ActiveSync ............................................39, 130 Serial Connector ................................................37, 38 Set the double-click sensitivity for stylus taps .....111, 317 Setup AppLock ...........................................................263 Show Clock .....................................................86, 304 Single Application AppLock .................................265 Slot 0 (Left) .............................................................61 Slot 1 (Right) ...........................................................61 Soft Keyboard................................................103, 314 Software and Files ...................................76, 131, 294 Software Load .................................................76, 294 Software Revision ...................................................29 Speaker Jack, Location..........................................6, 8 Speaker Volume Control Keys ................................56 Speaker/Beeper, Location......................................6, 8 Specifications Audio Connector.................................................46 Display ..............................................................289 Environmental...................................................288 Input Power.........................................................72 Physical.............................................................287 Power Connector.................................................47 USB Connector ...................................................41 Start Menu .......................................................81, 299 Static IP Address ...........................................113, 317 Status LED Indicator ...............................................54 Status Panel AppLock ...........................................................278 Stop Bits ................................................119, 157, 323 Storage Manager devices ..............................................................323 Storage Temperature, Specifications .....................288 Stored certificates ..........................................100, 310 Strip Code ID.........................................................170 Strip leading and trailing .......................................165 Strip Leading and Trailing.....................................157 Stylus .................................................................10, 60 Data Entry ...........................................................10 properties ..................................................120, 324 sensitivity ..................................................120, 324 VX6 Reference Guide 358 Switch applications Multi AppLock .....................................................5 Symbol ID and EV-15 Imager.............................................162 Symbology setting parameters...............................164 Symbology Settings...............................................161 System Hardware Configuration .....................................30 System Memory.......................................................31 System Requirements, WPA, Cisco ......................223 Index V Vehicle Chassis Ground ..........................................47 Vehicle Power ...................................................32, 69 Adapting VX1/2/4 Power Supply .......................72 Video Subsystem .....................................................31 View Display ................................................................60 Viewing Area, Specifications ................................289 Virtual Keyboard ...........................................103, 314 VK_Code List........................................................340 T Terminal Emulator List .............................................1 Terminal Emulator, connect ....................................12 Tile.................................................................102, 313 Time Zone .....................................................100, 311 Toggle 2nd key on and off ......................................55 Torque Wrench........................................................63 Touchscreen.......................................................10, 60 Data Entry ...........................................................10 Finger or Stylus...................................................10 Heater..................................................................60 Transcriber.......................................................85, 303 Translate All ..........................................................169 Translate control codes..........................................169 Troubleshooting ActiveSync........................................................128 AppLock Password ...........................................268 Multi-Application AppLock .............................280 Type II 2.4GHz Radio Card ........................63, 67, 68 U Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) ......................32 UPS..........................................................................32 Operating Temperature, Specifications.............289 Storage Temperature, Specifications ................289 USB Connector............................................................41 USB Connector, Location .........................................7 USB Mouse .............................................................11 User Certificates Generating.........................................................253 Installing on VX6..............................................258 User-specific application version information.88, 306 Utilities ..................................................................131 VX6 Reference Guide W Warmboot................................................................24 WARMBOOT.EXE...............................................133 WAVPLAY.EXE ..................................................133 Wedge....................................................................159 Wedge, Barcode ....................................................157 WEP Cisco Radio.......................................................221 Summit Radio ...................................................205 Symbol Radio....................................................247 When to use this guide ..............................................2 Windows Network Configuration .....................................137 Windows CE on-line Help...............................79, 297 Windows Explorer...........................................85, 303 Windows version...........................................121, 325 Wire Color Cable Wiring.......................................................71 WPA Radio Driver, Cisco ..........................................223 Supported Authentications................................179 Cisco Radio .................................................223 Summit Radio..............................................180 System Requirements, Cisco.............................223 WPA/LEAP Cisco Radio.......................................................237 Summit Radio ...........................................212, 214 WPA-PSK Cisco Radio.......................................................244 Summit Radio ...................................................218 Z Zero Config Utility, Microsoft ..............................226 E-EQ-VX6RG-J
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : 3.1-702 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 7.0.5 (Windows) Create Date : 2008:09:30 14:25:02-04:00 Creator Tool : Acrobat PDFMaker 7.0.7 for Word Modify Date : 2008:09:30 14:27:49-04:00 Metadata Date : 2008:09:30 14:27:49-04:00 Format : application/pdf Title : VX6 Reference Guide Creator : LXE Description : E-EQ-VX6RG-J Document ID : uuid:8389e526-871f-4d84-936a-cf4b8d3a1d7d Instance ID : uuid:f8a3177d-0b66-4485-8c5a-a3a754c5e712 Company : LXE Inc Has XFA : No Page Count : 380 Page Layout : OneColumn Subject : E-EQ-VX6RG-J Author : LXEEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools